i5/OS Information Center, Version 5 Release 4
  About information center
    Overview and what's new
      Notices
        Hardware topics
        Software topics
    Printable PDFs and manuals
    FAQ about information center
    Information center updates
    Site map
    Memo to users
  Connecting to System i
    Choose your connection
      Connecting to System i: Web clients
        iSeries Access for Web
      Connecting to System i: Windows clients
        iSeries Access for Windows
        EZ-Setup
        iSeries Navigator
      Connecting to System i: Linux clients
        iSeries Access for Linux iSeries
      Connecting to System i: Wireless clients
        iSeries Access for Wireless
        iSeries Navigator for Wireless
        IBM Toolbox for Java 2 Micro Edition
      Connecting to System i: Interfaces
        iSeries Navigator
        EZ-Setup
        Character-based interface
        Connecting to System i: Consoles
        Telnet
      Connecting to System i: Consoles
        Operations Console
        Twinaxial Console
        Hardware Management Console (HMC)
        Thin Console
    iSeries Access
      iSeries Access for Web
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        License information
        Planning
          iSeries Access for Web offerings
            Web application
            Portal application
          Security considerations
            Single sign-on considerations
              Configuring Enterprise Identity Mapping
          Checklist: Planning, installing, and configuring
          Prerequisites for installing iSeries Access for Web
            Hardware requirements
              Performance tuning
            iSeries software requirements
              SSL usage notes
              PTF requirements
            Web browser requirements
              Browser considerations
            Deleting the beta release
            Upgrade considerations
        Installing iSeries Access for Web on the iSeries server
          Installing iSeries Access for Web
          Installing iSeries Access for Web PTFs
        iSeries Access for Web in a Web application server environment
          Configuring iSeries Access for Web
            Examples for configuring a new Web application server environment
              i5/OS integrated Web application server
              WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server - Express V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server V6.0 for OS/400
              WebSphere Application Server V6.0 for OS/400 with Single sign-on
              WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.0 for OS/400
              WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries V5.1
              WebSphere Application Server V5.1 for iSeries
              WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries V5.0
              WebSphere Application Server V5.0 for iSeries
              ASF Tomcat
            Examples for configuring an existing Web application server environment
              WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server - Express V6.1 for i5/OS
              WebSphere Application Server V6.0 for OS/400
              WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.0 for OS/400
              WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries V5.1
              WebSphere Application Server V5.1 for iSeries
              WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries V5.0
              WebSphere Application Server V5.0 for iSeries
              ASF Tomcat
            New Web application server considerations
          Customizing iSeries Access for Web
            Policies
            Default page content
              Home page
                Customized content
                Special tags
                Style sheets
              Main page
                Customized content
              Page template
                Customized content
                Special tags
                Style sheets
              Login template
                Customized content
                Special tags
                Style sheets
          Using iSeries Access for Web
            iSeries Access for Web functions
              5250
              Command
              Customize
              Database
              Download
              File
              Jobs
              Mail
              Messages
              My folder
              My home page
              Other
              Print
            URL interfaces
            NLS considerations
          Saving and restoring iSeries Access for Web
        iSeries Access for Web in a portal environment
          Portal concepts
            Cooperative portlets
            Cross-site scripting
          Configuring iSeries Access for Web
            Examples for configuring a new portal environment
              Workplace Services Express V2.6
              WebSphere Portal - Express for Multiplatforms V5.0.2 (iSeries)
              WebSphere Portal - Express for Multiplatforms V5.0.2 (iSeries) with Single sign-on
            Examples for configuring an existing portal environment
              IBM WebSphere Portal V6.0
              Workplace Services Express V2.6
              WebSphere Portal - Express for Multiplatforms V5.0.2 (iSeries)
          Customizing iSeries Access for Web
            Creating pages
            Customizing portlets
            Portal roles
          Using iSeries Access for Web
            iSeries Access for Web functions
              5250
              Command
              Database
              Files
              IFrame
              Other
              Print
            NLS considerations
          Saving and restoring iSeries Access for Web
        Deleting iSeries Access for Web
        Related information
      iSeries Access for Windows
        Introduction
          Installation and setup
            What's new for V5R4
            Printable PDF
            License information
            Setting up the System i platform
              Prerequisites to install iSeries Access for Windows on i5/OS
                i5/OS release requirements
                i5/OS storage requirements
                Required and optional programs to install
              Installing iSeries Access for Windows on the i5/OS
              Obtaining and installing PTFs
              Configuring TCP/IP on i5/OS platform
              Configuring iSeries NetServer on i5/OS
              Removing iSeries Access for Windows from i5/OS
            Setting up the PC
              Prerequisites to set up the PC
              Setting up TCP/IP on the PC
                Installing a network adapter or modem
                Configuring TCP/IP support on the PC
                  Configuring TCP/IP on Windows operating systems
                  Adding the system name to the HOSTS file
                  Configuring TCP/IP over twinaxial connections
                Verifying the TCP/IP configuration
              Configuring the PC for iSeries NetServer
              Installing iSeries Access for Windows on the PC
                Installing from iSeries NetServer
                Installing from a CD-ROM
                Installing from a network drive
                Installing on multiple PCs
                  Creating and using a tailored installation image of iSeries Access for Windows
                  Creating a CD-ROM
                  Performing a silent installation of iSeries Access for Windows
                    Creating response files for iSeries Access for Windows installations
                      Example: Response file (setup.iss)
                    Starting a silent installation
                    Return codes for silent installations
                  SMS switch
                Installing service packs
                  Installing the service pack silently
                  When to check service level function
                    Setting check service level properties
                    Scheduling check service level
                  Obtaining and installing PTFs
                  Sites for downloading service packs
                  Accessing scheduled tasks remotely
                Integrating plug-ins
                Installing or removing individual components
                Installing other language versions
              Upgrading iSeries Access for Windows
              Uninstalling iSeries Access for Windows from the PC
            Related information
          Using
        Administration
          What's new for V5R4
          Printable PDF
          iSeries Access for Windows network environments
            Microsoft Windows Terminal Server
            Use iSeries Access for Windows in a three-tier environment
              Using distributed transaction support
              Access iSeries services from the middle tier
            Add TCP/IP configuration to all users
            Set PC5250 files location for all users
            User profiles for PCs with multiple users
          ODBC administration
            Overview of the iSeries Access ODBC driver
            Set up your system for the iSeries Access ODBC driver
              Adding the local system to the RDB directory
              Specify the ODBC data source
              Use independent ASPs through ODBC
            iSeries Access for Windows ODBC security
              Common ODBC strategies that are not secure
              ODBC program security strategies
              Related information for ODBC security
            Troubleshoot ODBC
              ODBC diagnostic and performance tools
                Client-side ODBC diagnostic and performance tools
                Server-side ODBC diagnostic and performance tools
                Collecting an ODBC Trace (SQL.LOG)
                Gather a detailed trace
                  Gather a detail trace for a Microsoft Transaction Server (MTS)
              iSeries Access ODBC error messages
              Troubleshoot the iSeries connection
                Checking the server status
                Verifying that subsystems are active
                Verifying that prestart jobs are running
                Additional TCP/IP considerations
              Common ODBC errors
                SQL errors
                  SQL0104 - Token &1 was not valid. Valid tokens: &2
                  SQL0113 - Name &1 not allowed.
                  SQL0114 - Relational database &1 not the same as current &2 server
                  SQL0204 - MYSYSCONF not found
                  SQL0208 - ORDER BY column not in result table
                  SQL0900 - Application process not in a connected state
                  SQL0901 - SQL System Error
                  SQL5001 - Column qualifier or table &2 undefined.
                  SQL5016 - Object name &1 not valid for naming convention
                  SQL7008 - &1 in &2 not valid for operation. The reason code is 3
                Stored procedure errors
                  SQL0444 - External program &A in &B not found (DB2 UDB SQL)
                  No data returned on OUTPUT and INPUT_OUTPUT parameters
                  SQL0501 - Cursor CRSR000x not open
                ODBC incorrect output and unpredictable errors
              Gather information for IBM Support
          Host server administration
            Identify i5/OS host servers and associated programs.
              Host servers by function
              File server
              Database server
                Database server programs
                SQL packages
                  SQL package names
                  Cleanup SQL packages
                Statement naming conventions
                Rules and restrictions when using DRDA
              Data queue server
              Network print server
              Central server
              Remote command and distributed program call server
              Signon server
              Server Port Mapper
              Extended Dynamic Remote SQL server (QXDAEDRSQL)
              DRDA/DDM server
            Use i5/OS host servers
              Establish client/server communications
                Host Servers port numbers
                  Port numbers for host servers and server mapper
                Start host servers
                  Server daemons
                  Example: STRHOSTSVR
                End host servers
                  Example: ENDHOSTSVR
              iSeries Subsystems
                Subsystems used for server Jobs
                Use of autostart jobs
                Use of prestart jobs
              iSeries system values
              Identify and display iSeries server jobs
                Use iSeries Navigator to identify server jobs
                Use the iSeries character-based interface to display server job
                  iSeries job names
                  Display using WRKACTJOB
                  Display using the history log
                  Display server job for a user
              Use EZ-Setup and iSeries Navigator with host servers
            Use server exit programs
              Register exit programs
              Write exit programs
              Exit program parameters
                File server
                Database server
                Data queue server
                Network print server
                Central server
                Remote command and distributed program call server
                Signon server
              Examples: Exit programs
                Examples: Creating exit programs with RPG
                Examples: Create exit programs with CL commands
          iSeries NetServer administration
          Restrict users with policies and application administration
            Overview of iSeries Access for Windows policies
            Set up your system to use policies
              Configure a system for using iSeries Access for Windows policies
              Configure client PCs for policies
              Create policy files
                Microsoft System Policy Editor
                Create iSeries Access for Windows policy templates
                Create and update policy files
            iSeries Access for Windows policy list
              Policies by function
                Policies by function: .NET Data provider
                  .NET Data Provider policy: Prevent .NET Data Provider usage
                Policies by function: ActiveX automation objects
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent data transfer upload automation object
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent data transfer download automation object
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent Remote Command automation object
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent Remote program automation object
                  ActiveX policy: Prevent data queue automation object
                Policies by function: Communication
                  Communication policy: Default user mode
                  Communications policy: TCP/IP Address Lookup Mode
                  Communication policy: Port lookup mode
                  Communication policy: Require Secure Sockets
                  Communication policy: Prevent changes to active environment
                  Communication policy: Prevent environment list changes
                  Communication policy: Prevent connections to systems not previously defined
                  Communication policy: Prevent use of non-mandated environments
                  Communication policy: Timeout value
                Policies by function: Data Transfer
                  Policies by function: Data Transfer uploads
                    Data Transfer policy: Prevent all Data Transfer
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent appending and replacing host files
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent Data Transfer GUI upload
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent usage of RFROMPCB
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent autostart uploads
                  Data Transfer policy: Data Transfer iSeries file creation
                    Data Transfer policy: Prevent host file creation
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent Wizard iSeries file creation
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent non-Wizard iSeries file creation
                  Data Transfer policy: Data Transfer downloads
                    Data Transfer policy: Prevent all Data Transfers from a system
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent Data Transfer GUI download
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent usage of RTOPCB
                      Data Transfer policy: Prevent autostart downloads
                Policies by function: Directory update
                  Directory update policy: Prevent using directory update
                Policies by function: Incoming Remote Command
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Run as system
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Command mode
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Cache security
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Allow generic security
                  Incoming Remote Command policy: Generic Security Runs command as logged on user
                Policies by function: Installation
                  Installation policy: Selective setup source directory
                  Installation policy: Prevent Setup
                  Installation policy: Prevent Selective Setup
                  Installation policy: Prevent uninstall
                  Installation policy: Prevent check service pack level
                  Installation policy: Prevent installation of service pack
                  Installation policy: Prevent upgrades
                  Installation policy: Prevent installation of individual components
                Policies by function: License management
                  License policy: Time to delay before releasing iSeries Access for Windows license
                Policies by function: National Language Support
                  National Language Support policy: ANSI code page
                  National Language Support policy: OEM code page
                  National Language Support policy: EBCDIC code page
                  Language policy: BiDi Transform
                Policies by function: ODBC
                  ODBC policy: Prevent use of named data sources
                  ODBC policy: Prevent use of program generated data sources
                Policies by function: OLE DB
                  OLE DB Provider policy: Prevent OLE DB Provider usage
                Policies by function: iSeries Navigator
                  iSeries Navigator policy: Prevent usage of iSeries Navigator
                Policies by function: Passwords
                  Password policy: Warn user before iSeries password expires
                  Password policy: Prevent iSeries Access for Windows password changes
                Policies by function: PC5250 emulation
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent configuration of display sessions
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent configuration of printer sessions
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent usage of PC5250 Emulator
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Maximum number of PC5250 sessions
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent changing of .WS profiles
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent menu configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent toolbar configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent multi-session configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent keyboard configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent mouse configuration
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent Java applet execution
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent access to macros
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent profile imports in Emulator Session Manager
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent profile deletion in Emulator Session Manager
                  PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent directory changes in Emulator Session Manager
                Policies by function: PC Commands
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwblogon.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbcfg.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbback.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbrest.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbenv.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of cwbundbs.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of Wrksplf.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of wrkmsg.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of wrkprt.exe
                  PC command policy: Prevent use of wrkusrj.exe
                Policies by function: Service
                  Service policy: When to check service level
                  Service policy: Delay time
                  Service policy: Frequency
                  Service policy: Copy image to PC
                  Service policy: Run silently
                  Service policy: Service path
                  Service policy: Autostart background service job
                Policies by function: User interface
                  User interface policy: Prevent creation of desktop icons
              Policies by template
                Caecfg.adm
                Caerestr.adm: iSeries Access for Windows Runtime Restrictions
                Config.adm: iSeries Access for Windows mandated connections
                Caeinrst.adm: Install restrictions
                SYSNAME.adm: Per-system policies
          Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) administration
          Code license and disclaimer information
        Programming
          What's new
          Printable PDFs
          iSeries Access for Windows C/C++ APIs
            iSeries Access for Windows C/C++ APIs overview
              API groups, header files, import libraries, and DLLs
              Programmer's Toolkit
                Install the Programmer's Toolkit
                Launch the Programmer's Toolkit
              iSeries name formats for connection APIs
              OEM, ANSI, and Unicode considerations
                Use a single iSeries Access for Windows API type
                Use mixed iSeries Access for Windows API types
                Write a generic iSeries Access for Windows application
              Obsolete iSeries Access for Windows APIs
                Obsolete Communications APIs
                Obsolete Data Queues APIs
                Obsolete Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
                Obsolete Security APIs
                Obsolete Serviceability APIs
                Obsolete System Object Access (SOA) API
                Obsolete National Language Support (NLS) APIs
                Obsolete Database APIs
              Return codes and error messages
                iSeries Access for Windows return codes that correspond to operating system errors
                iSeries Access for Windows return codes
                  Global iSeries Access for Windows return codes
                  iSeries Access for Windows-specific return codes
                    Security return codes
                    Communications return codes
                    Configuration return codes
                    Automation Object return codes
                    WINSOCK return codes
                    SSL return codes
                iSeries Access for Windowscomponent-specific return codes
                  Administration APIs return code
                  Communications APIs return codes
                  Database APIs return codes
                  Data Queues APIs return codes
                  Directory Update APIs return codes
                  National language support APIs return codes
                  iSeries Object APIs return codes
                  Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs return codes
                  Security APIs return codes
                  Serviceability APIs return codes
                  System Object Access APIs return codes
            iSeries Access for WindowsAdministration APIs
              Administration APIs list
                cwbAD_GetClientVersion
                cwbAD_GetProductFixLevel
                cwbAD_IsComponentInstalled
                cwbAD_IsOpNavPluginInstalled
              Example: Administration APIs
            iSeries Access for Windows Communications and Security APIs
              System object attributes
                System object attributes list
              Communications and security: Create and delete APIs
                cwbCO_CreateSystem
                cwbCO_CreateSystemLike
                cwbCO_DeleteSystem
              Communications and security: Connect and disconnect APIs
                cwbCO_Connect
                cwbCO_Disconnect
                cwbCO_GetConnectTimeout
                cwbCO_GetPersistenceMode
                cwbCO_IsConnected
                cwbCO_SetConnectTimeout
                cwbCO_SetPersistenceMode
                cwbCO_Verify
              Communication and security: Security validation and data APIs
                cwbCO_ChangePassword
                cwbCO_GetDefaultUserMode
                cwbCO_GetFailedSignons
                cwbCO_GetPasswordExpireDate
                cwbCO_GetPrevSignonDate
                cwbCO_GetPromptMode
                cwbCO_GetSignonDate
                cwbCO_GetUserIDEx
                cwbCO_GetValidateMode
                cwbCO_GetWindowHandle
                cwbCO_HasSignedOn
                cwbCO_SetDefaultUserMode
                cwbCO_SetPassword
                cwbCO_SetPromptMode
                cwbCO_SetUserIDEx
                cwbCO_SetWindowHandle
                cwbCO_SetValidateMode
                cwbCO_Signon
                cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
              Communications and security: Get and set attribute APIs
                cwbCO_CanModifyDefaultUserMode
                cwbCO_CanModifyIPAddress
                cwbCO_CanModifyIPAddressLookupMode
                cwbCO_CanModifyPersistenceMode
                cwbCO_CanModifyPortLookupMode
                cwbCO_CanModifyUseSecureSockets
                cwbCO_GetDescription
                cwbCO_GetHostCCSID
                cwbCO_GetHostVersionEx
                cwbCO_GetIPAddress
                cwbCO_GetIPAddressLookupMode
                cwbCO_GetPortLookupMode
                cwbCO_GetSystemName
                cwbCO_IsSecureSockets
                cwbCO_SetIPAddress
                cwbCO_SetIPAddressLookupMode
                cwbCO_SetPortLookupMode
                cwbCO_UseSecureSockets
              Defines for cwbCO_Service
              Differences between cwbCO_Signon and cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
              Similarities between cwbCO_Signon and cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
              Communications: Create and delete APIs
                cwbCO_CreateSysListHandle
                cwbCO_CreateSysListHandleEnv
                cwbCO_DeleteSysListHandle
                cwbCO_GetNextSysName
                cwbCO_GetSysListSize
              Communications: System information APIs
                cwbCO_GetActiveConversations
                cwbCO_GetConnectedSysName
                cwbCO_GetDefaultSysName
                cwbCO_GetHostVersion
                cwbCO_GetUserID
                cwbCO_IsSystemConfigured
                cwbCO_IsSystemConfiguredEnv
                cwbCO_IsSystemConnected
              Communications: Configured environments information
                cwbCO_GetActiveEnvironment
                cwbCO_GetEnvironmentName
                cwbCO_GetNumberOfEnvironments
              Communications: Environment and connection information
                cwbCO_CanConnectNewSystem
                cwbCO_CanModifyEnvironmentList
                cwbCO_CanModifySystemList
                cwbCO_CanModifySystemListEnv
                cwbCO_CanSetActiveEnvironment
              Example: Using iSeries Access for Windows communications APIs
            iSeries Access for Windows Data Queues APIs
              Data queues
              Ordering data queue messages
              Work with data queues
              Typical use of data queues
              Data Queues: Create, delete, and open APIs
                cwbDQ_CreateEx
                cwbDQ_DeleteEx
                cwbDQ_OpenEx
              Data Queues: Accessing data queues APIs
                cwbDQ_AsyncRead
                cwbDQ_Cancel
                cwbDQ_CheckData
                cwbDQ_Clear
                cwbDQ_Close
                cwbDQ_Create
                cwbDQ_Delete
                cwbDQ_GetLibName
                cwbDQ_GetQueueAttr
                cwbDQ_GetQueueName
                cwbDQ_GetSysName
                cwbDQ_Open
                cwbDQ_Peek
                cwbDQ_Read
                cwbDQ_Write
              Data Queues: Attributes APIs
                cwbDQ_CreateAttr
                cwbDQ_DeleteAttr
                cwbDQ_GetAuthority
                cwbDQ_GetDesc
                cwbDQ_GetForceToStorage
                cwbDQ_GetKeySize
                cwbDQ_GetMaxRecLen
                cwbDQ_GetOrder
                cwbDQ_GetSenderID
                cwbDQ_SetAuthority
                cwbDQ_SetDesc
                cwbDQ_SetForceToStorage
                cwbDQ_SetKeySize
                cwbDQ_SetMaxRecLen
                cwbDQ_SetOrder
                cwbDQ_SetSenderID
              Data Queues: Read and write APIs
                cwbDQ_CreateData
                cwbDQ_DeleteData
                cwbDQ_GetConvert
                cwbDQ_GetData
                cwbDQ_GetDataAddr
                cwbDQ_GetDataLen
                cwbDQ_GetKey
                cwbDQ_GetKeyLen
                cwbDQ_GetRetDataLen
                cwbDQ_GetRetKey
                cwbDQ_GetRetKeyLen
                cwbDQ_GetSearchOrder
                cwbDQ_GetSenderInfo
                cwbDQ_SetConvert
                cwbDQ_SetData
                cwbDQ_SetDataAddr
                cwbDQ_SetKey
                cwbDQ_SetSearchOrder
              Example: Using Data Queues APIs
            iSeries Access for Windows Data Transformation and National Language Support (NLS) APIs
              iSeries Access for Windows data transformation APIs
                iSeries Access for Windows data transformation API list
                  cwbDT_ASCII11ToBin4
                  cwbDT_ASCII6ToBin2
                  cwbDT_ASCIIPackedToPacked
                  cwbDT_ASCIIToHex
                  cwbDT_ASCIIToPacked
                  cwbDT_ASCIIToZoned
                  cwbDT_ASCIIZonedToZoned
                  cwbDT_Bin2ToASCII6
                  cwbDT_Bin2ToBin2
                  cwbDT_Bin4ToASCII11
                  cwbDT_Bin4ToBin4
                  cwbDT_EBCDICToEBCDIC
                  cwbDT_HexToASCII
                  cwbDT_PackedToASCII
                  cwbDT_PackedToASCIIPacked
                  cwbDT_PackedToPacked
                  cwbDT_ZonedToASCII
                  cwbDT_ZonedToASCIIZoned
                  cwbDT_ZonedToZoned
                Example: Using data transformation APIs
              iSeries Access for Windows National Language Support (NLS) APIs
                Coded character sets
                iSeries Access for Windows general NLS APIs list
                  cwbNL_FindFirstLang
                  cwbNL_FindNextLang
                  cwbNL_GetLang
                  cwbNL_GetLangName
                  cwbNL_GetLangPath
                  cwbNL_SaveLang
                iSeries Access for Windows conversion NLS APIs list
                  cwbNL_CCSIDToCodePage
                  cwbNL_CodePageToCCSID
                  cwbNL_Convert
                  cwbNL_ConvertCodePages
                  cwbNL_ConvertCodePagesEx
                  cwbNL_CreateConverter
                  cwbNL_CreateConverterEx
                  cwbNL_DeleteConverter
                  cwbNL_GetCodePage
                  cwbNL_GetANSICodePage
                  cwbNL_GetHostCCSID
                iSeries Access for Windows dialog-box NLS API list
                  cwbNL_CalcControlGrowthXY
                  cwbNL_CalcDialogGrowthXY
                  cwbNL_GrowControlXY
                  cwbNL_GrowDialogXY
                  cwbNL_LoadDialogStrings
                  cwbNL_LoadMenu
                  cwbNL_LoadMenuStrings
                  cwbNL_SizeDialog
                Example: iSeries Access for Windows NLS APIs
            iSeries Access for Windows Directory Update APIs
              Typical use of iSeries Access for Windows Directory Update APIs
              Requirements for Directory Update entries
              Options for Directory Update entries
              Directory Update package files syntax and format
              Directory Update sample program
              Directory Update: Create and delete APIs
                cwbUP_CreateUpdateEntry
                cwbUP_DeleteEntry
              Directory Update: Access APIs
                cwbUP_FindEntry
                cwbUP_FreeLock
                cwbUP_GetEntryHandle
              Directory Update: Free Resources APIs
                cwbUP_FreeEntryHandle
              Directory Update: Change APIs
                cwbUP_AddPackageFile
                cwbUP_RemovePackageFile
                cwbUP_SetCallbackDLL
                cwbUP_SetDescription
                cwbUP_SetEntryAttributes
                cwbUP_SetSourcePath
                cwbUP_SetTargetPath
              Directory Update: Information APIs
                cwbUP_GetCallbackDLL
                cwbUP_GetDescription
                cwbUP_GetEntryAttributes
                cwbUP_GetLockHolderName
                cwbUP_GetSourcePath
                cwbUP_GetTargetPath
            iSeries Access for Windows PC5250 emulation APIs
            System Objects APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
              iSeries Access objects attributes
                Advanced Function Printing
                Align Page
                Allow Direct Print
                Authority
                Authority to Check
                Automatically End Writer
                Back Margin Offset Across
                Back Margin Offset Down
                Backside Overlay Library Name
                Backside Overlay Name
                Back Overlay offset across
                Back Overlay Offset Down
                Characters per Inch
                Code Page
                Coded Font Name
                Coded Font Library Name
                Copies
                Copies left to Produce
                Current Page
                Data Format
                Data Queue Library Name
                Data Queue Name
                Date File Opened
                User Specified DBCS Data
                DBCS Extension Characters
                DBCS Character Rotation
                DBCS Characters per Inch
                DBCS SO/SI Spacing
                Defer Write
                Degree of Page Rotation
                Delete File After Sending
                Destination Option
                Destination Type
                Device Class
                Device Model
                Device Type
                Display any File
                Drawer for Separators
                Ending Page
                File Separators
                Fold Records
                Font Identifier
                Form Feed
                Form Type
                Form Type Message Option
                Front Margin Offset Across
                Front Margin Offset Down
                Front Overlay Library Name
                Front Overlay Name
                Front Overlay Offset Across
                Front Overlay Offset Down
                Graphic Character Set
                Hardware Justification
                Hold Spool File
                Initialize the writer
                Internet Address
                Job Name
                Job Number
                Job Separators
                Job User
                Last Page Printed
                Length of Page
                Library Name
                Lines Per Inch
                Manufacturer Type and Model
                Maximum Spooled Output Records
                Measurement Method
                Message Help
                Message ID
                Message Queue Library Name
                Message Queue
                Message Reply
                Message Text
                Message Type
                Message Severity
                Number of Bytes to Read/Write
                Number of Files
                Number of Writers Started to Queue
                Object Extended Attribute
                Open time commands
                Operator Controlled
                Order of Files On Queue
                Output Priority
                Output Queue Library Name
                Output Queue Name
                Output Queue Status
                Overflow Line Number
                Pages Per Side
                Pel Density
                Point Size
                Print Fidelity
                Print on Both Sides
                Print Quality
                Print Sequence
                Print Text
                Printer
                Printer Device Type
                Printer File Library Name
                Printer File Name
                Printer Queue
                Record Length
                Remote System
                Replace Unprintable Characters
                Replacement Character
                Resource library name
                Resource name
                Resource object type
                Restart Printing
                Save Spooled File
                Seek Offset
                Seek Origin
                Send Priority
                Separator page
                Source Drawer
                Spool SCS
                Spool the Data
                Spooled File Name
                Spooled File Number
                Spooled File Status
                Spooled Output Schedule
                Starting Page
                Text Description
                Time File Opened
                Total Pages
                Transform SCS to ASCII
                Unit of Measure
                User Comment
                User Data
                User defined data
                User defined object library
                User defined object name
                User defined object type
                User defined option(s)
                User driver program
                User driver program library
                User driver program name
                User ID
                User ID Address
                User transform program library
                User transform program name
                VM/MVS Class
                When to Automatically End Writer
                When to End Writer
                When to Hold File
                Width of Page
                Workstation Customizing Object Name
                Workstation Customizing Object Library
                Writer Job Name
                Writer Job Number
                Writer Job Status
                Writer Job User Name
                Writer Starting Page
                Network Print Server Object Attributes
                  NPS Attribute Default Value
                  NPS Attribute High Limit
                  NPS Attribute ID
                  NPS Attribute Low Limit
                  NPS Attribute Possible Value
                  NPS Attribute Text Description
                  NPS Attribute Type
                  NPS CCSID
                  NPS Object
                  NPS Object Action
                  NPS Level
              List APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_CloseList
                cwbOBJ_CreateListHandle
                cwbOBJ_DeleteListHandle
                cwbOBJ_GetListSize
                cwbOBJ_OpenList
                cwbOBJ_ResetListAttrsToRetrieve
                cwbOBJ_ResetListFilter
                cwbOBJ_SetListAttrsToRetrieve
                cwbOBJ_SetListFilter
                cwbOBJ_SetListFilterWithSplF
              iSeries Access for Windows Object APIs
                cwbOBJ_CopyObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_DeleteObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_GetObjAttr
                cwbOBJ_GetObjAttrs
                cwbOBJ_GetObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_GetObjHandleFromID
                cwbOBJ_GetObjID
                cwbOBJ_RefreshObj
                cwbOBJ_SetObjAttrs
              iSeries Access for Windows Parameter object APIs
                cwbOBJ_CopyParmObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_CreateParmObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_DeleteParmObjHandle
                cwbOBJ_GetParameter
                cwbOBJ_SetParameter
              iSeries Access for Windows Writer job APIs
                cwbOBJ_EndWriter
                cwbOBJ_StartWriter
              iSeries Access for Windows output queues APIs
                cwbOBJ_HoldOutputQueue
                cwbOBJ_PurgeOutputQueue
                cwbOBJ_ReleaseOutputQueue
              iSeries Access for Windows AFP resource APIs
                cwbOBJ_CloseResource
                cwbOBJ_CreateResourceHandle
                cwbOBJ_DisplayResource
                cwbOBJ_OpenResource
                cwbOBJ_OpenResourceForSplF
                cwbOBJ_ReadResource
                cwbOBJ_SeekResource
              iSeries Access for Windows APIs for new spooled files
                cwbOBJ_CloseNewSplF
                cwbOBJ_CloseNewSplFAndGetHandle
                cwbOBJ_CreateNewSplF
                cwbOBJ_GetSplFHandleFromNewSplF
                cwbOBJ_WriteNewSplF
              APIs for reading spooled files for iSeries Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_CloseSplF
                cwbOBJ_OpenSplF
                cwbOBJ_ReadSplF
                cwbOBJ_SeekSplF
              APIs for manipulating spooled files for iSeries Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_CallExitPgmForSplF
                cwbOBJ_CreateSplFHandle
                cwbOBJ_CreateSplFHandleEx
                cwbOBJ_DeleteSplF
                cwbOBJ_DisplaySplF
                cwbOBJ_HoldSplF
                cwbOBJ_IsViewerAvailable
                cwbOBJ_MoveSplF
                cwbOBJ_ReleaseSplF
                cwbOBJ_SendNetSplF
                cwbOBJ_SendTCPSplF
              APIs for handling spooled file messages for iSeries Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_AnswerSplFMsg
                cwbOBJ_GetSplFMsgAttr
              APIs for analyzing spooled file data for iSeries Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_AnalyzeSplFData
              Server program APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
                cwbOBJ_DropConnections
                cwbOBJ_GetNPServerAttr
                cwbOBJ_SetConnectionsToKeep
              Example: Using iSeries Objects APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
            iSeries Access for Windows Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
              Typical use of iSeries Access for Windows Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
              Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Access remote command APIs list for iSeries Access for Windows
                cwbRC_GetClientCCSID
                cwbRC_GetHostCCSID
                cwbRC_StartSysEx
                cwbRC_StopSys
              Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Run APIs list for iSeries Access for Windows
                cwbRC_RunCmd
              Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Access programs APIs list for iSeries Access for Windows
                cwbRC_AddParm
                cwbRC_CallPgm
                cwbRC_CreatePgm
                cwbRC_DeletePgm
                cwbRC_GetLibName
                cwbRC_GetParm
                cwbRC_GetParmCount
                cwbRC_GetPgmName
                cwbRC_SetLibName
                cwbRC_SetParm
                cwbRC_SetPgmName
              Example: Using Remote iSeries Access for Windows Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
            iSeries Access for Windows Serviceability APIs
              History log and trace files
              Error handles
              Typical use of Serviceability APIs
              Serviceability APIs list: Writing to history log
                cwbSV_CreateMessageTextHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteMessageTextHandle
                cwbSV_LogMessageText
                cwbSV_SetMessageClass
                cwbSV_SetMessageComponent
                cwbSV_SetMessageProduct
              Serviceability APIs list: Writing trace data
                cwbSV_CreateTraceDataHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteTraceDataHandle
                cwbSV_LogTraceData
                cwbSV_SetTraceComponent
                cwbSV_SetTraceProduct
              Serviceability API list: Writing trace points
                cwbSV_CreateTraceAPIHandle
                cwbSV_CreateTraceSPIHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteTraceAPIHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteTraceSPIHandle
                cwbSV_LogAPIEntry
                cwbSV_LogAPIExit
                cwbSV_LogSPIEntry
                cwbSV_LogSPIExit
                cwbSV_SetAPIComponent
                cwbSV_SetAPIProduct
                cwbSV_SetSPIComponent
                cwbSV_SetSPIProduct
              Serviceability API list: Reading service files
                cwbSV_ClearServiceFile
                cwbSV_CloseServiceFile
                cwbSV_CreateServiceRecHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteServiceRecHandle
                cwbSV_GetComponent
                cwbSV_GetDateStamp
                cwbSV_GetMaxRecordSize
                cwbSV_GetMessageText
                cwbSV_GetProduct
                cwbSV_GetRecordCount
                cwbSV_GetServiceFileName
                cwbSV_GetServiceType
                cwbSV_GetTimeStamp
                cwbSV_GetTraceData
                cwbSV_GetTraceAPIData
                cwbSV_GetTraceAPIID
                cwbSV_GetTraceAPIType
                cwbSV_GetTraceSPIData
                cwbSV_GetTraceSPIID
                cwbSV_GetTraceSPIType
                cwbSV_OpenServiceFile
                cwbSV_ReadNewestRecord
                cwbSV_ReadNextRecord
                cwbSV_ReadOldestRecord
                cwbSV_ReadPrevRecord
              Serviceability API list: Retrieving message text
                cwbSV_CreateErrHandle
                cwbSV_DeleteErrHandle
                cwbSV_GetErrClass
                cwbSV_GetErrClassIndexed
                cwbSV_GetErrCount
                cwbSV_GetErrFileName
                cwbSV_GetErrFileNameIndexed
                cwbSV_GetErrLibName
                cwbSV_GetErrLibNameIndexed
                cwbSV_GetErrSubstText
                cwbSV_GetErrSubstTextIndexed
                cwbSV_GetErrText
                cwbSV_GetErrTextIndexed
              Example: Using iSeries Access for Windows Serviceability APIs
            iSeries Access for Windows System Object Access (SOA) APIs
              SOA objects
              iSeries object views
              Typical use of System Object Access APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
                Displaying a customized list of iSeries objects
                  Sample program: Displaying a customized list of iSeries objects
                Displaying the Properties view for an iSeries Object
                  Sample program: Displaying the Properties view of an object
                Accessing and updating data for iSeries Objects
                  Sample program: Accessing and updating data for iSeries objects
              iSeries Access for Windows System Object Access programming considerations
                About System Object Access errors
                System Object Access application profiles
                Managing iSeries communications sessions for application programs
              System Object Access APIs for iSeries Access for Windows List
                CWBSO_CloseList
                CWBSO_CopyObjHandle
                CWBSO_CreateErrorHandle
                CWBSO_CreateListHandle
                CWBSO_CreateListHandleEx
                CWBSO_CreateObjHandle
                CWBSO_CreateParmObjHandle
                CWBSO_DeleteErrorHandle
                CWBSO_DeleteListHandle
                CWBSO_DeleteObjHandle
                CWBSO_DeleteParmObjHandle
                CWBSO_DisallowListActions
                CWBSO_DisallowListFilter
                CWBSO_DisplayErrMsg
                CWBSO_DisplayList
                CWBSO_DisplayObjAttr
                CWBSO_GetErrMsgText
                CWBSO_GetListSize
                CWBSO_GetObjAttr
                CWBSO_GetObjHandle
                CWBSO_OpenList
                CWBSO_ReadListProfile
                CWBSO_RefreshObj
                CWBSO_ResetParmObj
                CWBSO_SetListFilter
                CWBSO_SetListProfile
                CWBSO_SetListSortFields
                CWBSO_SetListTitle
                CWBSO_SetObjAttr
                CWBSO_SetParameter
                CWBSO_WaitForObj
                CWBSO_WriteListProfile
                SOA attribute special values
                  Job attributes
                  Message attributes
                  Printer attributes
                  Printer output attributes
                  TCP/IP interfaces attributes
                  Ethernet lines attributes
                  Token-ring lines attributes
                  Hardware resources attributes
                  Software products attributes
                  TCP/IP routes attributes
                  Users and groups attributes
                  Libraries in QSYS attributes
          iSeries Access for Windows: Database programming
            iSeries Access for Windows .NET provider
            iSeries Access for Windows OLE DB provider
            iSeries Access ODBC
              Files required to build an ODBC application
                Choose an interface to access the ODBC driver
                ODBC C/C++ application header files
                ODBC APIs: General concepts
                Parameter markers
                SQLFetch and SQLGetData
                Code directly to ODBC APIs
                  Call stored procedures
                  Block insert and block fetch C example
                  Example: Block inserts using Visual Basic
                  Visual Basic: The compromise between Jet and ODBC APIs
                Retrieve results
                Access a database server with an ODBC application
                Establish ODBC connections
                Execute ODBC functions
                Execute prepared statements
                  Convert strings and arrays of byte
                ODBC API return codes
                End ODBC functions
              Implementation issues of ODBC APIs
                ODBC 3.x APIs Notes
                  SQL Statement Considerations
                Connection string keywords
                  Connection string keywords - General properties
                  Connection string keywords - Server properties
                  Connection string keywords - Format properties
                  Connection string keywords - Package properties
                  Connection string keywords - Performance properties
                  Connection string keywords - Sort properties
                  Connection string keywords - Catalog properties
                  Connection string keywords - Translation properties
                  Connection string keywords - Diagnostic properties
                  Connection string keywords - other properties
                Version and release changes in the ODBC driver behavior
                ODBC API restrictions and unsupported functions
                Signon dialog behavior
                ODBC data types and how they correspond to DB2 UDB database types
                Large objects (LOBs) considerations
                  Example: Use the BLOB data type
                Connection and statement attributes
                Connection pooling
                SQLPrepare and SQLNativeSQL escape sequences and scalar functions
                Distributed transaction support
                Cursor Behavior Notes
                Extended dynamic disabled error
                ODBC 64-bit Windows and Linux Considerations
                Restrictions of the 64–bit iSeries Access for Windows ODBC Driver
                SQLTables Description
                Handle long-running queries
                Commitment control considerations
              iSeries Access for Windows ODBC performance
                Performance-tuning iSeries Access for Windows ODBC
                  Introduction to server performance
                  Introduction to client/server performance
                  The performance architecture of the iSeries Access for Windows ODBC driver
                    Select a stringent level of commitment control
                    Fine-tune record-blocking
                    Use Extended Dynamic SQL
                Performance considerations of common end-user tools
                  Examples: Common tool behaviors that degrade ODBC performance
                    Example: Query tool A
                    Example: Query tool B
                    Example: Query tool C
                SQL performance
                  SQL performance general considerations
                  Database design
                    Normalization
                    Table size
                    Use indexes
                    Match attributes of join fields
                  Optimizer
                    Cost estimation
                    Optimizer decision-making rules
                ODBC blocked insert statement
                Catalog functions
                Exit programs
                  Examples: User exit programs
                    Example: ILE C/400 user exit program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT
                    Example: CL user exit program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT
                    Example: ILE C/400 Program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL1
                    Example: ILE C/400 program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1
                  Exit program parameter formats
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL2 format ZDAQ0200
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT format ZDAI0100
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_NDB1 format ZDAD0100
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_NDB1 format ZDAD0200
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL1 format ZDAQ0100
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1 format ZDAR0100
                    Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1 format ZDAR0200
                Stored procedures
                  Stored procedure result sets
                  Examples: Stored procedures
                    Example: Run CL commands that use SQL stored procedures and ODBC
                    Example: Stored procedure calls from Visual Basic with return values
                    Example: Call an iSeries stored procedure by using Visual Basic
                    Example: Call CL command stored procedures
                    Tips: Run and call iSeries stored procedures
              ODBC program examples
                Example: Visual C++ - Access and return data by a call to a stored procedure
                Example: Visual Basic - Access and return data by a call to a stored procedure
                Examples: RPG - Host code for ODBC stored procedures
            iSeries Access for Windows database APIs
          Java programming
          ActiveX programming
        Operations Console
          What's new for V5R4
          Printable PDFs
          Planning considerations for Operations Console
            Planning considerations for your configuration
              Console planning considerations
              Planning considerations for your backup console
              Scenarios: Selecting your configuration
                Scenario: A single console directly attached to the system without remote support
                Scenario: A single console directly attached to the system with remote support
                Scenario: Consoles for multiple systems or partitions
              Preparation for your network environment
              Security of your Operations Console configuration
              Preparation for your Operations Console and iSeries Navigator configuration
              Verification of Operations Console requirements
                Operations Console hardware requirements
                Operations Console software requirements
                Operations Console cable requirements
                Verification of available communications port
            Planning considerations for your Operations Console installation or upgrade
            Planning considerations for your control panel
              Remote control panel
              Virtual control panel
                Limitations of the virtual control panel
                Installing the virtual control panel
          PC preparations for Operations Console
            Completing the setup prerequisite checklist
              Setting up a local console directly attached to the server
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console directly attached to the server
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console directly attached to the server
              Setting up a local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
              Setting up a local console on a network
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console on a network
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console on a network
              Setting up a remote console through dial-up support
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Remote console through dial-up support
                Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Remote console through dial-up support
            Completing required prerequisite tasks
              Installing iSeries Access for Windows
                Applying iSeries Access for Windows service packs
              Installing Operations Console connection modem
                Installing Operations Console connection modem for Windows 2000
                Installing Operations Console connection modem for Windows XP
              Installing PC modem
                Installing PC modem for Windows 2000
                Installing PC modem for Windows XP
              Granting remote access
                Granting remote access for Windows 2000
                Granting remote access for Windows XP
              Creating and configuring incoming connections
                Creating and configuring incoming connections for Windows 2000
                Creating and configuring incoming connections for Windows XP
              Installing an Operations Console cable
                Cabling a model 830 or a model 840 Operations Console
              Configuring Operations Console on the PC
            Completing the setup interview
          Managing Operations Console
            Managing your console configuration
              Changing a console configuration
              Deleting a console configuration
              Connecting a local console to a system
                Connecting a local console on a network to a system
                Connecting to another system
                Connecting a local console directly attached to the system
              Connecting a remote console to a local console by modem
              Control tasks between users
                Granting or refusing control to a remote console
                  System i control
                  Default user (SERVER)
                Identifying user in control of a system
                Displaying the remote control panel in read-only mode
                Requesting and releasing control at the local console
                Sending a message to a controlling remote console
                Requesting control at the remote console
                Releasing control at the remote console
                Sending a message to a controlling local console or remote console
                Transferring control between users
              Using the Properties page
              Customizing the Operations Console window
            Management of multiple consoles
              Multiple local PC consoles on a network
              Multiple remote consoles through dial-up support connecting to the same local console directly attached to the system
              Switching from one console type to another when a console is currently available
              Switching from one console type to another when the current console is not operational
              Takeover or recovery of an Operations Console connection
                Takeover details
                Recovery details
                Enabling console takeover
                Scenarios: Takeover and recovery
                  Scenario: LAN connected devices only with takeover enabled
                  Scenario: A normal IPL and dual-connectivity configurations with take over enabled
                  Scenario: Recovery of a console requiring a new console type setting
                  Scenario: How to recover the console during a D-mode IPL with take over enabled
            Changing from one console type to another
              Changing from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network (LAN)
                Changing the console from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network (LAN) in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
                Changing the console from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network in a logical partition
                Configuring the PC to use the new console type when changing from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network
              Changing from a local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached
                Changing the console from local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached for a non-partitioned system or a primary partition
                Changing the console from local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached for a logical partition
                Configuring the PC to use the new console type
              Changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console
                Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
                Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console in a logical partition
                Configuring the PC to use the new console type after changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console
              Changing from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console
                Changing the console from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
                Changing the console from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console in a logical partition
                Performing optional steps on the PC when changing from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console
            Managing your local console on a network
              Considerations for changing the service tools device ID passwords
              Changing the service tools device ID password on the PC and system
              Changing the access password
              Resynchronizing the PC and service tools device ID password
                Resetting the service tools device ID password on the system
                Resetting the service tools device ID password on the PC
              Creating service tools device IDs on the system
              Configuring a service host name (interface name)
              Deallocating or moving the LAN adapter card from use by Operations Console
              Changing network values for Operations Console (LAN)
                Completing the PC changes
            Common tasks
              Changing keyboard definitions
              Starting the system using a manual IPL
              Activating the asynchronous communications line on the system
              Deactivating the asynchronous communications line on the system
              Using the console service functions (65+21)
              Using the OPSCONSOLE macro
              Using service tools device IDs in system service tools
          Troubleshooting Operations Console connection
            Troubleshooting status message
              Status messages when configuration is running normally
              Status messages when you have connection problems
            Troubleshooting connection problems
              Local console connection problems
                Console fails to connect
                Network connection errors
                Error message: The connection to the system is not a secure connection
                Local or remote console status remains Connecting
                Console fails to connect and port detection fails
                Performance degradation on local console
                Unable to make a connection when infrared devices are installed
                Unexpected disconnections
                Using HyperTerminal to validate connectivity between client and the system
                  Installing HyperTerminal
                  Using HyperTerminal
              Remote console connection problems
                Remote console through dial-up fails to connect to local console
                Local console name mismatch when remote console connects to the local console
            Troubleshooting authentication problems
              Authentication errors
            Troubleshooting emulator problems
              PC5250 window does not display user data
            Troubleshooting system reference code data
              System reference code A6nn500x
              System reference code A6005001, A6005004, and A6005007
              System reference code A6005008
              System reference code A9002000
              System reference code A6005082
              Failure to display D1008065 and D1008066 automatically after calling the function
              IPL step C6004031 takes longer than expected
            Troubleshooting remote control panel and virtual control panel problems
              Remote control panel fails to start
              Unable to use the mode function
              Authentication problems
            Troubleshooting configuration wizard problems
              Local console does not detect console cable
              Old network data interfering with reconfiguration of network connectivity
            Troubleshooting other Operations Console problems
              Operations Console remains in QCTL
              System requests do not work
              Unable to sign on because of a lost or expired password or disabled user ID
      iSeries Access for Wireless
        iSeries Navigator for Wireless
          What's new for V5R4
          Printable PDF
          Setting up iSeries Navigator for Wireless
            Hardware and software requirements
            Selecting a device
              Selecting a device: Internet-ready telephones
              Selecting a device: PDAs
              Selecting a device: PCs
            Developing an Internet protection program
            Configuring your wireless environment
              Configuring a Web application server
                Configuring your ASF Jakarta Tomcat servlet engine for HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
                Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Base Edition, Version 5.1
                Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Express Edition, Version 5.1
                Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Version 6.0
              Configuring your firewall
              Configuring Management Central
              Selecting a language
            Connecting to your central system
            Customizing your connection
          Managing your systems with iSeries Navigator for Wireless
            Working with systems
            Working with Integrated xSeries Servers
            Working with tasks
            Running commands across multiple systems
            Viewing and interacting with monitors
              System monitors
              Job monitors
              Message monitors
              File monitors
              B2B activity monitors
          Related information for iSeries Navigator for Wireless
        IBM Toolbox for Java 2 Micro Edition
      iSeries Access for Linux
        What's new
        Printable PDFs
        IBM iSeries Access for Linux license information
        Prerequisites for using iSeries Access for Linux
        Install iSeries Access for Linux
        Update iSeries Access for Linux
        Uninstall iSeries Access for Linux
        iSeries Access for Linux security
        iSeries Access for Linux 5250 emulation
          Prerequisites for using 5250 emulation
          Configure 5250 emulation
            Command line emulator options
            X resources for the iSeries Access for Linux emulator
              Color mapping
              Image/fax (3849 emulation)
              Keyboard remapping
              Miscellaneous preferences
              Popup/pull down keypads
              Record/playback
              Screen print
              Session ID
            Languages for your emulator
            Emulator resources
          Troubleshoot 5250 emulation
            5250 problem isolation
            Font problems
          iSeries Access for Linux 5250 emulation FAQs
        iSeries Access for Linux Open Database Connectivity
          Prerequisites for using ODBC
          ODBC language considerations
          ODBC 64-bit Windows and Linux Considerations
          Restrictions when using ODBC with iSeries Access for Linux
          Configure an ODBC data source
            Use GUI to configure an ODBC data source
            Manually configure an ODBC data source
          ODBC examples
          Troubleshoot an iSeries Access for Linux ODBC
            ODBC problem isolation
            Error messages
          ODBC FAQs
        iSeries Access for Linux utilities
          CWBCOPWR - Change advanced communications settings
          CWBMEDIC - Service information collection tool
          CWBNLTBL - Download conversion tables
          CWBPING - Test the connection to the server
          CWBRUNSQL - Run batch SQL commands and procedures using an ODBC DSN
          CWBTRC - Trace iSeries Access for Linux
          RMTCMD - Run an iSeries batch/CL command
          RMTODBC - Run an iSeries batch/CL command using the ODBC driver
    iSeries Navigator
      Getting to know iSeries Navigator
        What's new for iSeries Navigator in V5R4
        Printable PDF
        iSeries Navigator functions by release
        Requirements for installing iSeries Navigator
        Installing iSeries Navigator
        Adding system connections to iSeries Navigator
        Working with iSeries Navigator
        Related information for iSeries Navigator
      iSeries Navigator for Wireless
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Setting up iSeries Navigator for Wireless
          Hardware and software requirements
          Selecting a device
            Selecting a device: Internet-ready telephones
            Selecting a device: PDAs
            Selecting a device: PCs
          Developing an Internet protection program
          Configuring your wireless environment
            Configuring a Web application server
              Configuring your ASF Jakarta Tomcat servlet engine for HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
              Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Base Edition, Version 5.1
              Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Express Edition, Version 5.1
              Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Version 6.0
            Configuring your firewall
            Configuring Management Central
            Selecting a language
          Connecting to your central system
          Customizing your connection
        Managing your systems with iSeries Navigator for Wireless
          Working with systems
          Working with Integrated xSeries Servers
          Working with tasks
          Running commands across multiple systems
          Viewing and interacting with monitors
            System monitors
            Job monitors
            Message monitors
            File monitors
            B2B activity monitors
        Related information for iSeries Navigator for Wireless
      iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Setting up iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
          Setting up iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web: Prerequisites
          Configuring security for iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
            Configuring Web browser connections to iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
            Configuring data-retrieval connections to the local system and managed secondary systems
          Configuring Application Administration
        Working with iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
        iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web concepts
          iSeries Navigator URL parameters and available Web tasks
          Working with iSeries Navigator lists on the Web
      Application Administration
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Application Administration concepts
          Application registration
            Application registration on Local Settings
            Application registration on Central Settings
          iSeries Navigator plug-ins and Application Administration
          Access settings for a function
            How access to a function is determined
          Administration system
            How clients initially discover their administration system
          Advanced settings in Central Settings
            How advanced settings are obtained for a user
            Mandated and suggested values
          Management Central and Application Administration
          When changes take effect
          Application Administration as a security tool
        Installing Application Administration
        Planning your Application Administration strategy
          Planning for Application Administration
          Planning for the administration system and Central Settings
        Setting up Application Administration
          Setting up Application Administration for Local Settings
          Setting up the administration system for Central Settings
        Managing Application Administration
          Registering applications for Application Administration (Local Settings)
          Registering applications on the administration system (Central Settings)
          Working with a function's access setting
          Working with user or group access settings
          Working with Central Settings
        Scenarios: Application Administration
          Scenario: Setting up Application Administration
          Scenario: Setting up an administration system for Central Settings
      Management Central
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Getting started with Management Central
          Before you begin
            Configuring TCP prerequisite checklist
            Management Central connection considerations
          Installing Management Central
            Checking for the most current MC code
            Installing and accessing Management Central
            Verifying the connection function
          Setting up the central system
            Setting up your central system for the first time
            Management Central settings and options
            Adding endpoint systems to your Management Central network
            How to completely remove endpoints
            Creating system groups in your Management Central network
            Changing the central system setup
          Management Central plug-ins
            Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS)
            Clusters
            Working with systems with partitions
            Advanced Job Scheduler
          Troubleshooting Management Central connections
        Working with Management Central monitors
          Monitor concepts
          Management collection objects
          Job monitors and Collection Services
            The QYRMJOBSEL job
            QZRCSRVS jobs and their impact on performance
          Special considerations
          Creating a new monitor
            Selecting the metrics
            Specifying the threshold values
            Specifying the collection interval
            Specifying threshold run commands
            Specifying event logging and actions
            Applying thresholds and actions for a monitor
          Viewing monitor results
            Graph history concepts
            Viewing graph history
          Resetting triggered threshold for a monitor
          Scenarios: iSeries Navigator monitors
            Scenario: System monitor
            Scenario: Job monitor for CPU utilization
            Scenario: Job monitor with Advanced Job Scheduler notification
            Scenario: Message monitor
        Using other features of Management Central
          Working with inventory
            Viewing an inventory
            How to use inventories
            Running actions on an inventory
            Searching a Management Central users and groups inventory
          Extreme Support
          Working with systems with partitions
          Running commands with Management Central
          Packaging and sending objects with Management Central
          Distributing fixes to multiple systems with iSeries Navigator
          Packaging and distribution considerations
          Managing users and groups with Management Central
          Sharing with other users in Management Central
          Synchronizing date and time values
          Synchronizing functions
          Scheduling tasks or jobs with Management Central scheduler
        Advanced Job Scheduler
          Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
          Scheduling jobs with Advanced Job Scheduler
            What's new in Advanced Job Scheduler for V5R4
            Installing the Advanced Job Scheduler
            Setting up the Advanced Job Scheduler
              Assigning the general properties
              Specifying permission levels
              Setting up a scheduling calendar
              Setting up a holiday calendar
              Setting up a fiscal calendar
              Specifying a mail server to use for notification
              Setting up multiple scheduling environments
              Assigning data libraries to users
            Managing the Advanced Job Scheduler
              Creating and scheduling a job
              Creating and scheduling a job group
              Predefined schedules
                Setting up a predefined schedule
                Adding a schedule to a scheduled job
                Adding a schedule to a holiday calendar
              Creating a temporary scheduled job
              Scheduling job dependencies
              The Work Flow Manager
                Creating a new work flow
                Starting a work flow
                Working with work flows
              Monitoring job activity for the Advanced Job Scheduler
                Scheduled job activity
                Specifying the activity retention
                Viewing the scheduled job activity details
                Viewing the scheduled job activity for a specific job
                Viewing the activity log details
                Viewing the activity log for a specific job
              Monitoring for messages with Advanced Job Scheduler
              Creating and working with local data area
              Creating and working with application controls and job controls
              Working with notification
              Working with library lists
              Working with command variables
            Working with Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
              Hardware and software requirements
              Selecting a device
              Configuring your wireless environment
                Configuring your Web application server
                Configuring your firewall
                Selecting a language
              Connecting to your i5/OS operating system
              Customizing your connection
              Managing Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
            Troubleshooting the Advanced Job Scheduler
        Related information for Management Central
      Intelligent agents
      Developing iSeries Navigator plug-ins
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Plug-in support in iSeries Navigator
          What you can do with a plug-in
          How plug-ins work
          Plug-in requirements
          Distributing plug-ins
            Setup.ini file
              Example: Information section of setup.ini
              Example: Service section of setup.ini
              Example: Identify files section of setup.ini
              Example: Exit programs section of the setup.ini
            MRI setup file
          Identifying plug-ins to iSeries Navigator
        Installing and running sample plug-ins
          Setting up sample C++ plug-ins
          Setting up sample Visual Basic plug-ins
            Sample Visual Basic plug-in directory of files
          Setting up the sample Java plug-ins
            Sample Java plug-in directory of files
        Plug-in programming reference
          C++ reference
            iSeries Navigator structure and flow of control for C++ plug-ins
            iSeries Navigator COM interfaces for C++
              Description of IA4HierarchyFolder Interface
              IA4HierarchyFolder interface specifications listing
                IA4HierarchyFolder::Activate
                IA4HierarchyFolder::BindToList
                IA4HierarchyFolder::DisplayErrorMessage
                IA4HierarchyFolder::GetAttributesOf
                IA4HierarchyFolder::GetColumnDataItem
                IA4HierarchyFolder::GetColumnInfo
                IA4HierarchyFolder::GetIconIndexOf
                IA4HierarchyFolder::GetItemCount
                IA4HierarchyFolder::GetToolBarInfo
                IA4HierarchyFolder::GetListObject
                IA4HierarchyFolder::ItemAt
                IA4HierarchyFolder::ProcessTerminating
                IA4HierarchyFolder::Refresh
              Description of IA4PropSheetNotify interface
              IA4PropSheetNotify interface specifications listing
                IA4PropSheetNotify::ApplyChanges
                IA4PropSheetNotify::GetErrorMessage
                IA4PropSheetNotify::InformUserState
            iSeries Navigator APIs
              iSeries Navigator API listing
              cwbUN_GetSystemValue
              cwbUN_GetSystemHandle
              cwbUN_ReleaseSystemHandle
              cwbUN_CheckObjectAuthority
              cwbUN_CheckSpecialAuthority
              cwbUN_CheckAS400Name
              cwbUN_GetUserAttribute
              cwbUN_ConvertPidlToString
              cwbUN_GetDisplayNameFromItemId
              cwbUN_GetDisplayNameFromName
              cwbUN_GetDisplayPathFromName
              cwbUN_GetIndexFromItemId
              cwbUN_GetIndexFromName
              cwbUN_GetIndexFromPidl
              cwbUN_GetListObject
              cwbUN_GetParentFolderNameFromName
              cwbUN_GetParentFolderPathFromName
              cwbUN_GetParentFolderPidl
              cwbUN_GetSystemNameFromName
              cwbUN_GetSystemNameFromPidl
              cwbUN_GetTypeFromName
              cwbUN_GetTypeFromPidl
              cwbUN_RefreshAll
              cwbUN_RefreshList
              cwbUN_RefreshListItems
              cwbUN_UpdateStatusBar
              cwbUN_GetODBCConnection
              cwbUN_EndODBCConnections
              cwbUN_GetIconIndex
              cwbUN_GetSharedImageList
              cwbUN_GetAdminValue
              cwbUN_GetAdminValueEx
              cwbUN_GetAdminCacheState
              cwbUN_GetAdminCacheStateEx
              cwbUN_IsSubcomponentInstalled
              cwbUN_OpenLocalLdapServer
              cwbUN_FreeLocalLdapServer
              cwbUN_GetLdapSvrPort
              cwbUN_GetLdapSvrSuffixCount
              cwbUN_GetLdapSvrSuffixName
              cwbUN_OpenLdapPublishing
              cwbUN_FreeLdapPublishing
              cwbUN_GetLdapPublishCount
              cwbUN_GetLdapPublishType
              cwbUN_GetLdapPublishServer
              cwbUN_GetLdapPublishPort
              cwbUN_GetLdapPublishParentDn
            Return codes unique to iSeries Navigator APIs
          Visual Basic reference
            iSeries Navigator structure and flow of control for Visual Basic plug-ins
            iSeries Navigator Visual Basic interfaces
              iSeries Navigator ListManager interface class
              iSeries Navigator ActionsManager interface class
              iSeries Navigator DropTargetManager interface class
          Java reference
            iSeries Navigator structure and flow of control for Java plug-ins
          Customizing the plug-in registry files
            Customizing the C++ registry values
              Primary registry key
              Data server implementation
              Shell plug-in implementation class
              Shell plug-in implementation for objects
                Shell plug-ins
              Global changes for C++ plug-in registry files
            Customizing the Visual Basic plug-in registry values
              Primary registry key
              Visual Basic plug-in implementation class
                Parent field values
                Example: New folder registry key
              Visual Basic plug-in implementation objects
              Global changes for Visual Basic plug-in registry files
            Sample Java registry file
            Property pages for a property sheet handler
              Description of QueryContextMenu flags
            Example: Constructing Visual Basic property pages for a property sheet handler
            Property sheet handling in Java
              Example: Java Properties Manager
            Secure Sockets Layer registry entry
    Operations Console
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDFs
      Planning considerations for Operations Console
        Planning considerations for your configuration
          Console planning considerations
          Planning considerations for your backup console
          Scenarios: Selecting your configuration
            Scenario: A single console directly attached to the system without remote support
            Scenario: A single console directly attached to the system with remote support
            Scenario: Consoles for multiple systems or partitions
          Preparation for your network environment
          Security of your Operations Console configuration
          Preparation for your Operations Console and iSeries Navigator configuration
          Verification of Operations Console requirements
            Operations Console hardware requirements
            Operations Console software requirements
            Operations Console cable requirements
            Verification of available communications port
        Planning considerations for your Operations Console installation or upgrade
        Planning considerations for your control panel
          Remote control panel
          Virtual control panel
            Limitations of the virtual control panel
            Installing the virtual control panel
      PC preparations for Operations Console
        Completing the setup prerequisite checklist
          Setting up a local console directly attached to the server
            Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console directly attached to the server
            Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console directly attached to the server
          Setting up a local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
            Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
            Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
          Setting up a local console on a network
            Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console on a network
            Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console on a network
          Setting up a remote console through dial-up support
            Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Remote console through dial-up support
            Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Remote console through dial-up support
        Completing required prerequisite tasks
          Installing iSeries Access for Windows
            Applying iSeries Access for Windows service packs
          Installing Operations Console connection modem
            Installing Operations Console connection modem for Windows 2000
            Installing Operations Console connection modem for Windows XP
          Installing PC modem
            Installing PC modem for Windows 2000
            Installing PC modem for Windows XP
          Granting remote access
            Granting remote access for Windows 2000
            Granting remote access for Windows XP
          Creating and configuring incoming connections
            Creating and configuring incoming connections for Windows 2000
            Creating and configuring incoming connections for Windows XP
          Installing an Operations Console cable
            Cabling a model 830 or a model 840 Operations Console
          Configuring Operations Console on the PC
        Completing the setup interview
      Managing Operations Console
        Managing your console configuration
          Changing a console configuration
          Deleting a console configuration
          Connecting a local console to a system
            Connecting a local console on a network to a system
            Connecting to another system
            Connecting a local console directly attached to the system
          Connecting a remote console to a local console by modem
          Control tasks between users
            Granting or refusing control to a remote console
              System i control
              Default user (SERVER)
            Identifying user in control of a system
            Displaying the remote control panel in read-only mode
            Requesting and releasing control at the local console
            Sending a message to a controlling remote console
            Requesting control at the remote console
            Releasing control at the remote console
            Sending a message to a controlling local console or remote console
            Transferring control between users
          Using the Properties page
          Customizing the Operations Console window
        Management of multiple consoles
          Multiple local PC consoles on a network
          Multiple remote consoles through dial-up support connecting to the same local console directly attached to the system
          Switching from one console type to another when a console is currently available
          Switching from one console type to another when the current console is not operational
          Takeover or recovery of an Operations Console connection
            Takeover details
            Recovery details
            Enabling console takeover
            Scenarios: Takeover and recovery
              Scenario: LAN connected devices only with takeover enabled
              Scenario: A normal IPL and dual-connectivity configurations with take over enabled
              Scenario: Recovery of a console requiring a new console type setting
              Scenario: How to recover the console during a D-mode IPL with take over enabled
        Changing from one console type to another
          Changing from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network (LAN)
            Changing the console from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network (LAN) in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
            Changing the console from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network in a logical partition
            Configuring the PC to use the new console type when changing from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network
          Changing from a local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached
            Changing the console from local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached for a non-partitioned system or a primary partition
            Changing the console from local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached for a logical partition
            Configuring the PC to use the new console type
          Changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console
            Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
            Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console in a logical partition
            Configuring the PC to use the new console type after changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console
          Changing from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console
            Changing the console from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
            Changing the console from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console in a logical partition
            Performing optional steps on the PC when changing from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console
        Managing your local console on a network
          Considerations for changing the service tools device ID passwords
          Changing the service tools device ID password on the PC and system
          Changing the access password
          Resynchronizing the PC and service tools device ID password
            Resetting the service tools device ID password on the system
            Resetting the service tools device ID password on the PC
          Creating service tools device IDs on the system
          Configuring a service host name (interface name)
          Deallocating or moving the LAN adapter card from use by Operations Console
          Changing network values for Operations Console (LAN)
            Completing the PC changes
        Common tasks
          Changing keyboard definitions
          Starting the system using a manual IPL
          Activating the asynchronous communications line on the system
          Deactivating the asynchronous communications line on the system
          Using the console service functions (65+21)
          Using the OPSCONSOLE macro
          Using service tools device IDs in system service tools
      Troubleshooting Operations Console connection
        Troubleshooting status message
          Status messages when configuration is running normally
          Status messages when you have connection problems
        Troubleshooting connection problems
          Local console connection problems
            Console fails to connect
            Network connection errors
            Error message: The connection to the system is not a secure connection
            Local or remote console status remains Connecting
            Console fails to connect and port detection fails
            Performance degradation on local console
            Unable to make a connection when infrared devices are installed
            Unexpected disconnections
            Using HyperTerminal to validate connectivity between client and the system
              Installing HyperTerminal
              Using HyperTerminal
          Remote console connection problems
            Remote console through dial-up fails to connect to local console
            Local console name mismatch when remote console connects to the local console
        Troubleshooting authentication problems
          Authentication errors
        Troubleshooting emulator problems
          PC5250 window does not display user data
        Troubleshooting system reference code data
          System reference code A6nn500x
          System reference code A6005001, A6005004, and A6005007
          System reference code A6005008
          System reference code A9002000
          System reference code A6005082
          Failure to display D1008065 and D1008066 automatically after calling the function
          IPL step C6004031 takes longer than expected
        Troubleshooting remote control panel and virtual control panel problems
          Remote control panel fails to start
          Unable to use the mode function
          Authentication problems
        Troubleshooting configuration wizard problems
          Local console does not detect console cable
          Old network data interfering with reconfiguration of network connectivity
        Troubleshooting other Operations Console problems
          Operations Console remains in QCTL
          System requests do not work
          Unable to sign on because of a lost or expired password or disabled user ID
    Twinaxial console
    Hardware Management Console
    Thin Console
  Database
    Printable PDFs
    Database overview
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      DB2 Universal Database for iSeries
      Terminology: SQL versus traditional file access
      Getting started with iSeries Navigator
        Starting iSeries Navigator
        Creating a schema
        Editing the list of schemas displayed
        Creating a table and defining a column
          Defining additional columns on a table
          Creating the supplier table
          Copying column definitions
          Inserting information into a table
          Viewing the contents of a table
          Changing information in a table
          Deleting information from a table
          Copying and moving a table
            Copying a table
            Moving a table
        Creating and using a view
          Creating a view over a single table
          Creating a WHERE clause
          Creating a view that combines data from multiple tables
        Deleting database objects
      iSeries Navigator database tasks
        Database objects creation tasks
        Database objects operation tasks
        Database performance optimization tasks
        Mapping your database
        Querying your database by running SQL scripts
          Stopping SQL scripts
          Viewing the job log
          Generating SQL for existing objects
          Building SQL statements with SQL Assist
          Starting iSeries System Debugger
        Managing check pending constraints
        Importing and exporting data
      Getting started with SQL
        Creating a schema
        Creating and using a table
        Using the LABEL ON statement
        Inserting information into a table
        Getting information from a single table
        Getting information from multiple tables
        Changing information in a table
        Deleting information from a table
        Creating and using a view
          Creating a view on a single table
          Creating a view that combines data from multiple tables
    Database information finder
    Administration
      Printable PDF
      Database administration
        Altering and managing database objects
        Creating database objects
        Ensuring data integrity
        Importing and exporting data between systems
        Managing journals
        Working with multiple databases
        Working with triggers and constraints
        Writing DB2 programs
      Database backup and recovery
        Backup and recovery
        Recovering and restoring your database
        Journal management
      Distributed database administration
        Planning and design
        Initial setup
        Administration
        Security
        Data availability and protection
        Performance
        Troubleshooting
        Application development
      Queries and reports
        V5R3 changes to Query for iSeries
      Security
        Controlling DDM and DRDA access
        Granting object and data authority
        Limiting access to specific fields of a database file
        Specifying public authority
        Using database file capabilities to control I/O operations
        Using logical files to secure data
    Commitment control
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Commitment control concepts
        How commitment control works
        How commit and rollback operations work
          Commit operation
          Rollback operation
        Commitment definition
          Scope for a commitment definition
          Commitment definition names
          Example: Jobs and commitment definitions
        How commitment control works with objects
          Types of committable resources
          Local and remote committable resources
          Access intent of a committable resource
          The commit protocol of a committable resource
          Journaled files and commitment control
          Sequence of journal entries under commitment control
          Commit cycle identifier
          Record locking
        Commitment control and independent disk pools
          Independent disk pool considerations for commitment definitions
          Considerations for XA transactions
        Considerations and restrictions for commitment control
        Commitment control for batch applications
        Two-phase commitment control
          Roles in commit processing
          States of the transaction for two-phase commitment control
          Commitment definitions for two-phase commitment control
            Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Allow vote read-only
            Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Not wait for outcome
            Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Indicate OK to leave out
            Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Not select a last agent
            Vote reliable effect on flow of commit processing
        XA transaction support for commitment control
        SQL server mode and thread-scoped transactions for commitment control
      Starting commitment control
        Commit notify object
        Commit lock level
      Ending commitment control
      System-initiated end of commitment control
        Commitment control during activation group end
        Implicit commit and rollback operations
        Commitment control during normal routing step end
        Commitment control during abnormal system or job end
        Updates to the notify object
        Commitment control recovery during initial program load after abnormal end
      Managing transactions and commitment control
        Displaying commitment control information
          Displaying locked objects for a transaction
          Displaying jobs associated with a transaction
          Displaying resource status of a transaction
          Displaying transaction properties
        Optimizing performance for commitment control
          Minimizing locks
          Managing transaction size
          Soft commit
      Scenarios and examples: Commitment control
        Scenario: Commitment control
        Practice problem for commitment control
          Logic flow for practice problem
          Steps associated with the logic flow for the practice program
        Example: Using a transaction logging file to start an application
        Example: Using a notify object to start an application
          Example: Unique notify object for each program
          Example: Single notify object for all programs
        Example: Using a standard processing program to start an application
          Example: Code for a standard processing program
            Processing flow
          Example: Code for a standard commit processing program
          Example: Using a standard processing program to decide whether to restart the application
      Troubleshooting transactions and commitment control
        Commitment control errors
          Error conditions
          Nonerror conditions
          Error messages to monitor during commitment control
          Monitoring for errors after a CALL command
          Failure of normal commit or rollback processing
        Detecting deadlocks
        Recovering transactions after communications failure
        When to force commit and rollback operations and when to cancel resynchronization
        Ending a long-running rollback
      Related information
    Performance and query optimization
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Query Engine Overview
        SQE and CQE Engines
        Query Dispatcher
        Statistics Manager
        Plan Cache
      Data access on DB2 UDB for iSeries: data access paths and methods
        Permanent objects and access methods
          Table
            Table scan
            Table probe
          Radix index
            Radix index scan
            Radix index probe
          Encoded vector index
            Encoded vector index symbol table scan
            Encoded vector index probe
        Temporary objects and access methods
          Temporary hash table
            Hash table scan
            Hash table probe
          Temporary sorted list
            Sorted list scan
            Sorted list probe
          Temporary list
            List scan
          Temporary row number list
            Row number list scan
            Row number list probe
          Temporary bitmap
            Bitmap scan
            Bitmap probe
          Temporary index
            Temporary index scan
            Temporary index probe
          Temporary buffer
            Buffer scan
          Queue
            Enqueue
            Dequeue
        Objects processed in parallel
        Spreading data automatically
      Processing queries: Overview
        How the query optimizer makes your queries more efficient
        General query optimization tips
        Access plan validation
        Single table optimization
        Join optimization
          Nested loop join implementation
          Join optimization algorithm
          Join order optimization
          Cost estimation and index selection for join secondary dials
          Predicates generated through transitive closure
          Look ahead predicate generation (LPG)
          Tips for improving performance when selecting data from more than two tables
          Multiple join types for a query
          Sources of join query performance problems
          Tips for improving the performance of join queries
        Distinct optimization
        Grouping optimization
          Grouping hash implementation
          Index grouping implementation
          Optimizing grouping by eliminating grouping columns
          Optimizing grouping by adding additional grouping columns
          Optimizing grouping by using index skip key processing
          Optimizing grouping by removing read triggers
        Ordering optimization
        View implementation
          View composite implementation
          View materialization implementation
        Materialized query table optimization
          MQT supported function
          Using MQTs during Query optimization
          MQT examples
          Details on the MQT matching algorithm
          Determining unnecessary MQTs
          Summary of MQT query recommendations
        Recursive query optimization
          Recursive query example
          Multiple initialization and iterative fullselects
          Predicate Pushing
          Specifying SEARCH consideration
          Specifying CYCLE considerations
          SMP and recursive queries
      Optimizing query performance using query optimization tools
        Verify the performance of SQL applications
        Examine query optimizer debug messages in the job log
        Gather information about embedded SQL statements with the PRTSQLINF command
        Viewing the plan cache with iSeries Navigator
        Monitoring your queries using memory-resident database monitor
          Memory-resident database monitor external API description
          Memory-resident database monitor external table description
          Sample SQL queries
          Memory-resident database monitor row identification
        Using iSeries Navigator with summary monitors
          Starting a summary monitor
          Analyzing summary monitor information
          Importing a monitor
        Monitoring your queries using Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON)
          Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON) command
          End Database Monitor (ENDDBMON) command
          Database monitor performance rows
          Database monitor examples
            Database monitor performance analysis example 1
            Database monitor performance analysis example 2
            Database monitor performance analysis example 3
            Additional database monitor examples
        Using iSeries Navigator with detailed monitors
          Starting a detailed monitor
          Analyze detailed monitor data
          Comparing monitor data
          Viewing statements in a monitor
          Importing a monitor
        Query optimizer index advisor
          Display index advisor information
            Database manager indexes advised system table
          Index advisor columns
          Querying database monitor view 3020 - Index advised
        View the implementation of your queries with Visual Explain
          Starting Visual Explain
          Overview of information available from Visual Explain
        Change the attributes of your queries with the Change Query Attributes (CHGQRYA) command
          Control queries dynamically with the query options file QAQQINI
            Specifying the QAQQINI file
            Creating the QAQQINI query options file
            QAQQINI query options file format
            Setting the options within the query options file
            QAQQINI query options file authority requirements
            QAQQINI file system supplied triggers
            QAQQINI query options
          Set resource limits with the Predictive Query Governor
            Using the Query Governor
            Canceling a query with the Query Governor
            Controlling the default reply to the query governor inquiry message
            Testing performance with the query governor
            Examples of setting query time limits
            Testing temporary storage usage with the query governor
            Examples of setting query temporary storage limits
          Control parallel processing for queries
            Controlling system wide parallel processing for queries
            Controlling job level parallel processing for queries
        Collecting statistics with the Statistics Manager
          Automatic statistics collection
          Automatic statistics refresh
          Viewing statistics requests
          Indexes versus column statistics
          Monitoring background statistics collection
          Replication of column statistics with CRTDUPOBJ versus CPYF
          Determining what column statistics exist
          Manually collecting and refreshing statistics
          Statistics Manager APIs
        Display information with Database Health Center
        Show Materialized Query Table columns
        Manage Check Pending Constraints columns
        Query optimization tools: Comparison table
      Creating an index strategy
        Binary radix indexes
          Specifying PAGESIZE on CRTPF or CRTLF commands
          General index maintenance
        Encoded vector indexes
          How the EVI works
          When to create EVIs
          EVI maintenance
          Recommendations for EVI use
        Comparing Binary radix indexes and Encoded vector indexes
        Indexes and the optimizer
          Instances where an index is not used
          Determining unnecessary indexes
          Show index for a table
          Manage index rebuilds
        Indexing strategy
          Reactive approach to tuning
          Proactive approach to tuning
        Coding for effective indexes
          Avoid numeric conversions
          Avoid arithmetic expressions
          Avoid character string padding
          Avoid the use of like patterns beginning with % or _
        Using indexes with sort sequence
          Using indexes and sort sequence with selection, joins, or grouping
          Using indexes and sort sequence with ordering
        Examples of indexes
          Index example: Equals selection with no sort sequence table
          Index example: Equals selection with a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Equal selection with a shared-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Greater than selection with a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Join selection with a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Join selection with a shared-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering with no sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering with a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering with a shared-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Grouping with no sort sequence table
          Index example: Grouping with a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Grouping with a shared-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering and grouping on the same columns with a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering and grouping on the same columns with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering and grouping on the same columns with a shared-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering and grouping on the same columns with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a shared-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering and grouping on different columns with a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering and grouping on different columns with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a unique-weight sort sequence table
          Index example: Ordering and grouping on different columns with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a shared-weight sort sequence table
      Application design tips for database performance
        Use live data
        Reduce the number of open operations
        Retain cursor positions
          Retaining cursor positions for non-ILE program calls
          Retaining cursor positions across ILE program calls
          General rules for retaining cursor positions for all program calls
      Programming techniques for database performance
        Use the OPTIMIZE clause
        Use FETCH FOR n ROWS
          Improve SQL blocking performance when using FETCH FOR n ROWS
        Use INSERT n ROWS
        Control database manager blocking
        Optimize the number of columns that are selected with SELECT statements
        Eliminate redundant validation with SQL PREPARE statements
        Page interactively displayed data with REFRESH(*FORWARD)
      General DB2 UDB for iSeries performance considerations
        Effects on database performance when using long object names
        Effects of precompile options on database performance
        Effects of the ALWCPYDTA parameter on database performance
        Tips for using VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC data types in databases
      Database monitor: Formats
        Database monitor SQL table format
        Optional database monitor SQL view format
          Database monitor view 1000 - SQL Information
          Database monitor view 3000 - Table Scan
          Database monitor view 3001 - Index Used
          Database monitor view 3002 - Index Created
          Database monitor view 3003 - Query Sort
          Database monitor view 3004 - Temp Table
          Database monitor view 3005 - Table Locked
          Database monitor view 3006 - Access Plan Rebuilt
          Database monitor view 3007 - Optimizer Timed Out
          Database monitor view 3008 - Subquery Processing
          Database monitor view 3010 - HostVar & ODP Implementation
          Database monitor view 3014 - Generic QQ Information
          Database monitor view 3015 - Statistics Information
          Database monitor view 3018 - STRDBMON/ENDDBMON
          Database monitor view 3019 - Rows retrieved
          Database monitor view 3020 - Index advised (SQE)
          Database monitor view 3021 - Bitmap Created
          Database monitor view 3022 - Bitmap Merge
          Database monitor view 3023 - Temp Hash Table Created
          Database monitor view 3025 - Distinct Processing
          Database monitor view 3026 - Set operation
          Database monitor view 3027 - Subquery Merge
          Database monitor view 3028 - Grouping
          Database monitor view 3030 - Materialized query tables
          Database monitor view 3031 - Recursive common table expressions
      Memory Resident Database Monitor: DDS
        External table description (QAQQQRYI) - Summary Row for SQL Information
        External table description (QAQQTEXT) - Summary Row for SQL Statement
        External table description (QAQQ3000) - Arrival sequence
        External table description (QAQQ3001) - Using existing index
        External table description (QAQQ3002) - Index created
        External table description (QAQQ3003) - Query sort
        External table description (QAQQ3004) - Temporary table
        External table description (QAQQ3007) - Optimizer information
        External table description (QAQQ3008) - Subquery processing
        External table description (QAQQ3010) - Host variable and ODP implementation
        External table description (QAQQ3030) - Materialized query table implementation
      Query optimizer messages reference
        Query optimization performance information messages
          CPI4321 - Access path built for &18 &19
          CPI4322 - Access path built from keyed file &1
          CPI4323 - The query access plan has been rebuilt
          CPI4324 - Temporary file built for file &1
          CPI4325 - Temporary result file built for query
          CPI4326 - &12 &13 processed in join position &10
          CPI4327 - File &12 &13 processed in join position &10
          CPI4328 - Access path of file &3 was used by query
          CPI4329 - Arrival sequence access was used for &12 &13
          CPI432A - Query optimizer timed out for file &1
          CPI432B - Subselects processed as join query
          CPI432C - All access paths were considered for file &1
          CPI432D - Additional access path reason codes were used
          CPI432F - Access path suggestion for file &1
          CPI4330 - &6 tasks used for parallel &10 scan of file &1
          CPI4331 - &6 tasks used for parallel index created over file
          CPI4332 - &1 host variables used in query
          CPI4333 - Hashing algorithm used to process join
          CPI4334 - Query implemented as reusable ODP
          CPI4335 - Optimizer debug messages for hash join step &1 follow
          CPI4336 - Group processing generated
          CPI4337 - Temporary hash table build for hash join step &1
          CPI4338 - &1 Access path(s) used for bitmap processing of file &2
          CPI433D - Query options used to build the i5/OS query access plan
          CPI433F - Multiple join classes used to process join
          CPI4340 - Optimizer debug messages for join class step &1 follow
          CPI4341 - Performing distributed query
          CPI4342 - Performing distributed join for query
          CPI4343 - Optimizer debug messages for distributed query step &1 of &2 follow:
          CPI4345 - Temporary distributed result file &3 built for query
          CPI4346 - Optimizer debug messages for query join step &1 of &2 follow:
          CPI4347 - Query being processed in multiple steps
          CPI4348 - The ODP associated with the cursor was hard closed
          CPI4349 - Fast past refresh of the host variables values is not possible
          CPI434C - The query access plan was not rebuilt
          CPI4350 - Materialized query tables were considered for optimization
          CPI4351 - Additional reason codes for query access plan has been rebuilt.
        Query optimization performance information messages and open data paths
          SQL7910 - All SQL cursors closed
          SQL7911 - ODP reused
          SQL7912 - ODP created
          SQL7913 - ODP deleted
          SQL7914 - ODP not deleted
          SQL7915 - Access plan for SQL statement has been built
          SQL7916 - Blocking used for query
          SQL7917 - Access plan not updated
          SQL7918 - Reusable ODP deleted
          SQL7919 - Data conversion required on FETCH or embedded SELECT
          SQL7939 - Data conversion required on INSERT or UPDATE
        PRTSQLINF message reference
          SQL400A - Temporary distributed result file &1 was created to contain join result
          SQL400B - Temporary distributed result file &1 was created to contain join result
          SQL400C - Optimizer debug messages for distributed query step &1 and &2 follow
          SQL400D - GROUP BY processing generated
          SQL400E - Temporary distributed result file &1 was created while processing distributed subquery
          SQL4001 - Temporary result created
          SQL4002 - Reusable ODP sort used
          SQL4003 - UNION
          SQL4004 - SUBQUERY
          SQL4005 - Query optimizer timed out for table &1
          SQL4006 - All indexes considered for table &1
          SQL4007 - Query implementation for join position &1 table &2
          SQL4008 - Index &1 used for table &2
          SQL4009 - Index created for table &1
          SQL401A - Processing grouping criteria for query containing a distributed table
          SQL401B - Temporary distributed result table &1 was created while processing grouping criteria
          SQL401C - Performing distributed join for query
          SQL401D - Temporary distributed result table &1 was created because table &2 was directed
          SQL401E - Temporary distributed result table &1 was created because table &2 was broadcast
          SQL401F - Table &1 used in distributed join
          SQL4010 - Table scan access for table &1
          SQL4011 - Index scan-key row positioning used on table &1
          SQL4012 - Index created from index &1 for table &2
          SQL4013 - Access plan has not been built
          SQL4014 - &1 join column pair(s) are used for this join position
          SQL4015 - From-column &1.&2, to-column &3.&4, join operator &5, join predicate &6
          SQL4016 - Subselects processed as join query
          SQL4017 - Host variables implemented as reusable ODP
          SQL4018 - Host variables implemented as non-reusable ODP
          SQL4019 - Host variables implemented as file management row positioning reusable ODP
          SQL402A - Hashing algorithm used to process join
          SQL402B - Table &1 used in hash join step &2
          SQL402C - Temporary table created for hash join results
          SQL402D - Query attributes overridden from query options file &2 in library &1
          SQL4020 - Estimated query run time is &1 seconds
          SQL4021 - Access plan last saved on &1 at &2
          SQL4022 - Access plan was saved with SRVQRY attributes active
          SQL4023 - Parallel table prefetch used
          SQL4024 - Parallel index preload access method used
          SQL4025 - Parallel table preload access method used
          SQL4026 - Index only access used on table number &1
          SQL4027 - Access plan was saved with DB2 UDB Symmetric Multiprocessing installed on the system
          SQL4028 - The query contains a distributed table
          SQL4029 - Hashing algorithm used to process the grouping
          SQL4030 - &1 tasks specified for parallel scan on table &2.
          SQL4031 - &1 tasks specified for parallel index create over table &2
          SQL4032 - Index &1 used for bitmap processing of table &2
          SQL4033 - &1 tasks specified for parallel bitmap create using &2
          SQL4034 - Multiple join classes used to process join
          SQL4035 - Table &1 used in join class &2
    Programming
      Database programming
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Database file concepts
          DB2 Universal Database for iSeries
          Interfaces to DB2 Universal Database for iSeries
            Traditional system interface
            SQL
            iSeries Navigator
            IBM Query for iSeries
          Database files
          How database files are described
            Externally and program-described data
            Dictionary-described data
            Record format description
            Access path description
            Naming conventions for a database file
          Database data protection and monitoring
          Database file sizes
            Example: Database file sizes
        Setting up database files
          Creating and describing database files
            Creating a library
            Setting up source files
              Why source files are used
              Creating a source file
                Creating a source file using the Create Source Physical File (CRTSRCPF) command
                Creating a source file with DDS
                Creating a source file without DDS
                IBM-supplied source files
                Source file attributes
            Describing database files
              Describing database files using DDS
                Example: Describing a physical file using DDS
                Example: Describing a logical file using DDS
                Additional DDS field definition functions
                Using existing field descriptions and field reference files to describe a database file
                Using a data dictionary for field reference in a database file
                Sharing existing record format descriptions in a database file
                  Record format relationships between physical and logical files
                  Record format sharing limitation with physical and logical files
              Specifying database file and member attributes
                Specifying the file name and member name (FILE and MBR) parameters
                Specifying the physical file data members (DTAMBRS) parameter
                Specifying the source file and source member (SRCFILE and SRCMBR) parameters
                Specifying the file type (FILETYPE) parameter
                Specifying the maximum number of members (MAXMBRS) parameter
                Specifying the preferred storage unit (UNIT) parameter
                Specifying the force write ratio (FRCRATIO) parameter
                Specifying the force keyed access path (FRCACCPTH) parameter
                Specifying the record format level check (LVLCHK) parameter
                Specifying the access path maintenance (MAINT) parameter
                  MAINT parameter comparison
                  MAINT parameter tips
                Specifying the access path recovery (RECOVER) parameter
                Specifying the share open data path (SHARE) parameter
                Specifying the maximum file and record wait time (WAITFILE and WAITRCD) parameters
                Specifying the authority (AUT) parameter
                Specifying the system (SYSTEM) parameter
                Specifying the text description (TEXT) parameter
                Specifying the coded character set identifier (CCSID) parameter
                Specifying the sort sequence (SRTSEQ) parameter
                Specifying the language identifier (LANGID) parameter
            Setting up physical files
              Creating a physical file
              Specifying physical file and member attributes
                Expiration date
                Size of a physical file member
                Storage allocation
                Method of allocating storage
                Record length
                Deleted records
                Physical file capabilities
                Source type
              Implicit physical file journaling
          Setting up logical files
            Creating a logical file
              Creating a logical file with more than one record format
                Controlling how records are retrieved in a logical file with multiple formats
                Controlling how records are added to a logical file with multiple formats
              Defining logical file members
            Describing logical file record formats
              Describing field use for logical files
                Describing field use for logical files: Both
                Describing field use for logical files: Input only
                Describing field use for logical files: Neither
              Deriving new fields from existing fields
                Concatenated fields
                Substring fields
                Renamed fields
                Translated fields
              Describing floating-point fields in logical files
            Describing access paths for logical files
              Selecting and omitting records for logical files
                Access path select/omit
                Dynamic select/omit
                Selecting and omitting logical file records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              Sharing existing access paths between logical files
                Example: Implicitly shared access paths
            Setting up a join logical file
              Example 1: Basic concepts of joining two physical files
                Reading a join logical file
                Case 1: Matching records in primary and secondary files
                Case 2A: A record missing in the secondary file (JDFTVAL keyword not specified)
                Case 2B: A record missing in the secondary file (JDFTVAL keyword specified)
                Case 3: Secondary file has more than one match for a record in the primary file
                Case 4: An extra record in the secondary file
                Case 5: Random access
              Setting up a join logical file
              Example 2: Using more than one field to join files
              Example 3: Reading duplicate records in the secondary file
              Example 4: Using join fields whose attributes are different
              Example 5: Describing fields that never appear in the record format
              Example 6: Specifying key fields in a join logical file
              Specifying select/omit statements in a join logical file
              Example 7: Joining three or more physical files
              Example 8: Joining a physical file to itself
              Example 9: Using defaults for missing records from secondary files
              Example 10: A complex join logical file
              Join logical file considerations
                Performance considerations
                Data integrity considerations
                Summary of rules
                  Requirements
                  Join fields
                  Fields in join logical files
                  Miscellaneous rules
          Describing access paths for database files
            Using arrival sequence access paths for database files
            Using keyed sequence access paths for database files
              Arranging key fields in an alternative collating sequence
              Arranging key fields with the SRTSEQ parameter
              Arranging key fields in ascending or descending sequence
              Using more than one key field
              Preventing duplicate key values
              Arranging duplicate keys
            Using existing access path specifications
            Using floating-point fields in database file access paths
          Securing database files
            Granting file and data authority
              Authorizing a user or group using iSeries Navigator
              Types of object authority
              Types of data authority
            Specifying public authority
              Defining public authority using iSeries Navigator
              Setting a default public authority using iSeries Navigator
            Using database file capabilities to control I/O operations
            Limiting access to specific fields in a database file
            Using logical files to secure data
        Processing database files
          Database file processing: Runtime considerations
            File and member name
            File processing options
              Specifying the type of processing
              Specifying the initial file position
              Reusing deleted records
              Ignoring the keyed sequence access path
              Delaying end-of-file processing
              Specifying the record length
              Ignoring record formats
              Determining whether duplicate keys exist
            Data recovery and integrity
              Protecting your files with journaling and commitment control
              Writing data and access paths to auxiliary storage
              Checking changes to the record format description
              Checking the expiration date of a physical file member
              Preventing the job from changing data in a file
            Locking shared data
              Locking records
              Locking files
              Locking members
              Locking record format data
              Database lock considerations
              Displaying locked rows using iSeries Navigator
              Displaying locked records using the Display Record Locks (DSPRCDLCK) command
            Sharing database files in the same job or activation group
              Open considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
              Input/output considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
              Close considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
                Example 1: A single set of files with similar processing options
                Example 2: Multiple sets of files with similar processing options
                Example 3: A single set of files with different processing options
            Sequential-only processing of database files
              Open considerations for sequential-only processing
              Input/output considerations for sequential-only processing
              Close considerations for sequential-only processing
            Summary of runtime considerations for processing database files
            Storage pool paging option effect on database performance
          Opening a database file
            Opening a database file member
            Using Open Database File (OPNDBF) command
            Using Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              Creating a query with the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              Using an existing record format in the file
              Using a file with a different record format
              CL program coding with the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              The zero-length literal and the contains (*CT) function
              Usage notes for the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) examples
              Selecting records without using DDS
                Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 1: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 2: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 3: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 4: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 5: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 6: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 7: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 8: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 9: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 10: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 11: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
                  Example 1: Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
                  Example 2: Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
                  Example 3: Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
                  Example 4: Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
                Specifying key fields from different files
                Dynamically joining database files without DDS
                  Example 1: Dynamically joining database files without DDS
                  Example 2: Dynamically joining database files without DDS
                  Example 3: Dynamically joining database files without DDS
                Handling missing records in secondary join files
                Unique-key processing
                  Example 1: Unique-key processing
                  Example 2: Unique-key processing
                Defining fields derived from existing field definitions
                  Example 1: Defining fields derived from existing field definitions
                  Example 2: Defining fields derived from existing field definitions
                  Example 3: Defining fields derived from existing field definitions
                Handling divide-by-zero errors
                Summarizing data from database file records (grouping)
                  Example: Summarizing data from database file records (grouping)
                Final total-only processing
                  Example 1: Final total-only processing
                  Example 2: Final total-only processing
                  Example 3: Final total-only processing
                Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 1: Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                  Example 2: Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File command
              Considerations for using the FORMAT parameter
              Considerations for arranging records
              Considerations for DDM files
              Considerations for writing a high-level language program
              Messages sent when the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command is run
              Using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command for more than just input
              Comparing date, time, and timestamp using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              Performing date, time, and timestamp arithmetic using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                Durations
                Rules for date, time, and timestamp arithmetic
                Subtracting dates
                Incrementing and decrementing dates
                Subtracting times
                Incrementing and decrementing times
                Subtracting timestamps
                Incrementing and decrementing timestamps
              Using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command for random processing
              Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command: Performance considerations
              Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command: Performance considerations for sort sequence tables
                Grouping, joining, and selection: Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command performance
                Ordering: Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command performance
              Performance comparisons with other database functions
              Field use
              Files shared in a job
              Checking if the record format description changed
              Other runtime considerations for the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                Overrides and the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
                Copying from an open query file
                  Example 1: Copying from an open query file
                  Example 2: Copying from an open query file
                  Example 3: Copying from an open query file
                  Example 4: Copying from an open query file
              Typical errors when using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
              Open data path considerations
              Field names
              Expressions
              Built-in functions
              Restricted built-in functions
          Basic database file operations in programs
            Setting a position in the file
            Reading database records
              Reading database records using an arrival sequence access path
                Reading next operation
                Reading previous operation
                Reading first operation
                Reading last operation
                Reading same operation
                Reading by relative record number operation
              Reading database records using a keyed sequence access path
                Reading next operation
                Reading previous operation
                Reading first operation
                Reading last operation
                Reading same operation
                Reading by key operation
                Reading by relative record number operation
                Reading when logical file shares an access path with more keys operation
              Waiting for more records when end of file is reached
              Releasing locked records
            Updating database records
            Adding database records
              Identifying which record format to add in a file with multiple formats
              Using the force-end-of-data operation
            Deleting database records
          Closing a database file
          Monitoring database file errors in a program
            System handling of error messages
            Effect of error messages on file positioning
            Determining which messages you want to monitor
        Managing database files
          Basic operations for managing database files
            Copying a file
            Moving a file
          Managing database members
            Member operations common to all database files
              Adding members
              Changing member attributes
              Renaming members
              Removing members
            Physical file member operations
              Initializing data in a physical file member
              Clearing data from a physical file member
              Reorganizing a physical file member
                Reorganizing a table using iSeries Navigator
                Reorganizing a physical file member using the Reorganize Physical File Member (RGZPFM) command
                  Example: Reorganizing a physical file member
                Usage notes: Reorganizing a physical file member
                Reorganization options
                Suspending or canceling a reorganize operation
              Displaying records in a physical file member
          Using database attribute and cross-reference information
            Displaying information about database files
              Displaying attributes of a file using iSeries Navigator
              Displaying attributes of a file using the Display File Description (DSPFD) command
              Displaying the description of the fields in a file
              Displaying the relationships between files on the system
              Displaying the files used by programs
              Displaying the system cross-reference files
            Writing the output from a command directly to a database file
              Example: A command output file
              Output files for the Display File Description (DSPFD) command
              Output files for the Display Journal (DSPJRN) command
              Output files for the Display Problems (DSPPRB) command
          Changing database file descriptions and attributes
            Effects of changing fields in a file description
            Changing a physical file description and attributes
              Example 1: Changing a physical file description and attributes
              Example 2: Changing a physical file description and attributes
            Changing a logical file description and attributes
          Recovering and restoring your database
            Recovering data in a database file
              Managing journals
                Journals
                Working with journals
                  Creating a journal using iSeries Navigator
                  Creating a journal receiver using iSeries Navigator
                  Values for new journals and journal receivers
                  Adding a remote journal using iSeries Navigator
                  Removing a remote journal using iSeries Navigator
                  Activating a remote journal using iSeries Navigator
                  Deactivating a remote journal using iSeries Navigator
                  Displaying journal information for a table using iSeries Navigator
                  Swapping journal receivers using iSeries Navigator
                  Starting or stopping a journal for a table (file) using iSeries Navigator
              Ensuring data integrity with commitment control
                Transactions
                Benefits of using commitment control
                Usage notes: Commitment control
            Reducing time in access path recovery
              Saving access paths
              Restoring access paths
              Journaling access paths
              System-managed access-path protection
              Rebuilding access paths
                Controlling when access paths are rebuilt
                Designing files to reduce access path rebuilding time
                Other methods to avoid rebuilding access paths
            Database recovery process after an abnormal system end
              Database file recovery during the IPL
              Database file recovery after the IPL
              Effects of the storage pool paging option on database recovery
              Database file recovery options table
            Database save and restore
            Database considerations for save and restore
          Using source files
            Working with source files
              Using the source entry utility
              Using device source files
              Copying source file data
                Copying to and from source files using the Copy Source File (CPYSRCF) command
                Copying to and from source files using the Copy File (CPYF) command
                Source sequence numbers used in copies
              Loading and unloading data from systems other than System i
              Using source files in a program
            Creating an object using a source file
              Creating an object from source statements in a batch job
              Determining which source file member was used to create an object
            Managing a source file
              Changing source file attributes
              Reorganizing source file member data
              Determining when a source statement was changed
              Using source files for documentation
          Controlling the integrity of your database with constraints
            Setting up constraints for your database
            Removing unique, primary key, or check constraints
            Working with a group of constraints
              Details: Working with a group of constraints
              Working with constraints that are in check pending status
                Displaying records that put a constraint in check pending status
                Processing constraints that are in check pending status
            Unique constraints
            Primary key constraints
            Check constraints
          Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
            Adding referential constraints
              Before you add referential constraints
              Defining the parent file in a referential constraint
              Defining the dependent file in a referential constraint
              Specifying referential constraint rules
                Details: Specifying referential constraint delete rules
                Details: Specifying referential constraint update rules
                Details: Specifying referential constraint rules—journaling requirements
              Details: Adding referential constraints
              Details: Avoiding constraint cycles
            Verifying referential constraints
            Enabling or disabling referential constraints
            Removing referential constraints
              Details: Removing a constraint with the CST parameter
              Details: Removing a constraint with the TYPE parameter
            Details: Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
            Example: Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
            Referential integrity terms
            Referential integrity enforcement
              Foreign key enforcement
              Parent key enforcement
                Enforcement of delete rules
                Enforcement of update rules
            Constraint states
            Check pending status in referential constraints
              Dependent file restrictions in check pending
              Parent file restrictions in check pending
            Referential integrity and CL commands
          Triggering automatic events in your database
            Uses for triggers
            Benefits of using triggers in your business
            Creating trigger programs
              Adding triggers using iSeries Navigator
              How trigger programs work
              Other important information about working with trigger programs
                Recommendations for trigger programs
                Precautions to take when coding trigger programs
                  Functions to use with care in trigger programs
                  Commands, statements, and operations that you cannot use in trigger programs
                Monitoring the use of trigger programs
                Trigger and application programs that are under commitment control
                Trigger and application programs that are not under commitment control
                Trigger program error messages
              Examples: Trigger programs
                Example: Insert trigger written in RPG/400
                Example: Update trigger written in ILE COBOL
                Example: Delete trigger written in ILE C
                Data structures for the example database files
              Trigger buffer sections
                Trigger buffer field descriptions
            Adding triggers
            Displaying triggers
            Removing triggers
            Enabling or disabling physical file triggers
            Triggers and their relationship to CL commands
            Triggers and their relationship to referential integrity
          Database distribution
        Double-byte character set considerations
          DBCS field data types
          DBCS field mapping considerations
          DBCS field concatenation
          DBCS field substring operations
          Comparing DBCS fields in a logical file
          Using DBCS fields in the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
            Using the wildcard function with DBCS fields
            Comparing DBCS fields through the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
            Using concatenation with DBCS fields
            Using sort sequence with DBCS fields
        Related information
      Distributed database programming
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Introduction to distributed database programming
          Distributed relational database processing
            Remote unit of work
            Distributed unit of work
            Other distributed relational database terms and concepts
          Distributed Relational Database Architecture support
          DRDA and CDRA support
          Application requester driver programs
          Distributed relational database on i5/OS
          Managing an i5/OS distributed relational database
          Example: Spiffy Corporation distributed relational database
            Spiffy organization and system profile
            Business processes of the Spiffy Corporation Automobile Service
            Distributed relational database administration for the Spiffy Corporation
        Planning and design
          Identifying your needs and expectations for a distributed relational database
            Data needs for distributed relational databases
            Distributed relational database capabilities
            Goals and directions for a distributed relational database
          Designing the application, network, and data for a distributed relational database
            Tips: Designing distributed relational database applications
            Network considerations for a distributed relational database
            Data considerations for a distributed relational database
          Developing a management strategy for a distributed relational database
            General operations for a distributed relational database
            Security considerations for a distributed relational database
            Accounting for a distributed relational database
            Problem analysis for a distributed relational database
            Backup and recovery for a distributed relational database
        Initial setup
          i5/OS work management
            Setting up your work management environment for DRDA
            APPC subsystems
            TCP/IP subsystems
          User databases on independent auxiliary storage pools
          Using the relational database directory
            Working with the relational database directory
              Adding an entry for SNA usage
              Adding an entry for TCP/IP usage
              Specifying a relational database alias name
              Adding an entry for an application requester driver
              Using the WRKRDBDIRE command
              The *LOCAL directory entry
              Directory entries for user databases on independent auxiliary storage pools
            Example: Setting up a relational database directory
          Setting up DRDA security
          Setting up the TCP/IP server for DRDA
          Setting up SQL packages for interactive SQL
          Setting up DDM files
          Loading data into tables in a distributed relational database
            Loading new data into the tables of a distributed relational database
              Loading data into a table using SQL
              Manipulating data in tables and files using the i5/OS query management function
              Entering data, update tables, and make inquiries using data file utility
            Moving data from one system to another
              Creating a user-written application program
              Querying a database using interactive SQL
              Querying remote systems using DB2 UDB for iSeries query management function
              Copying files to and from tape
              Moving data between systems using copy file commands
              Transferring data over network using network file commands
              Moving a table using object save and restore commands
            Moving a database to i5/OS from a system other than i5/OS
              Moving data from another IBM system
              Moving data from a non-IBM system
        Security
          Elements of distributed relational database security
            Elements of security in an APPC network
              APPN configuration lists
              Conversation level security
              DRDA application server security in an APPC network
            Elements of security in a TCP/IP network
              Application requester security in a TCP/IP network
              Application server security in a TCP/IP network
              Connection security protocols for DDM and DRDA
              Secure Sockets Layer for DDM and DRDA
                Required programs
                i5/OS requirements
              Internet Protocol Security Architecture for DDM and DRDA
              Considerations for certain passwords being sent as clear text
              Ports and port restrictions for DDM and DRDA
          DRDA server access control exit programs
            Example: DRDA server access control exit program
          Object-related security for DRDA
          Authority to distributed relational database objects
          Programs that run under adopted authority for a distributed relational database
          Protection strategies in a distributed relational database
        Application development
          Programming considerations for a distributed relational database application
            Naming of distributed relational database objects
              System (*SYS) naming convention
              SQL (*SQL) naming convention
              Default collection name
            Connecting to a distributed relational database
              Remote unit of work
                Activation group states
                  Connectable and connected state
                  Unconnectable and connected state
                  Connectable and unconnected state
              Distributed unit of work
                Activation group states
                  Initial state of an activation group
                Connection states
                Activation group connection states
                When a connection is ended
                Run with both RUW and DUW connection management
              Implicit connection management for the default activation group
              Implicit connection management for nondefault activation groups
              Explicit connection management
            SQL specific to distributed relational database and SQL CALL
              Distributed relational database statements
              SQL CALL statement (stored procedures)
                DB2 Universal Database for iSeries CALL considerations
              DB2 Universal Database for iSeries coexistence
            Ending DRDA units of work
            Stored procedures, user-defined functions, and commitment control
            Coded character set identifier
              i5/OS support
            Other DRDA data conversion
            DDM files and SQL
          Preparing distributed relational database programs
            Precompiling programs with SQL statements
              Listing
              Temporary source file member
              SQL package creation
              Precompiler commands
            Compiling an application program
            Binding an application
            Testing and debugging
              Program references
          Working with SQL packages
            Using the Create SQL Package (CRTSQLPKG) command
            Managing an SQL package
              Deleting an SQL package using the Delete SQL Package (DLTSQLPKG) command
              Modifying package authorizations
              Using the SQL DROP PACKAGE statement
        Administration
          Monitoring relational database activity
            Working with jobs in a distributed relational database
            Working with user jobs in a distributed relational database
            Working with active jobs in a distributed relational database
            Working with commitment definitions in a distributed relational database
            Tracking request information with the job log of a distributed relational database
            Locating distributed relational database jobs
          Operating remote systems
          Controlling DDM conversations
            Reclaiming DDM resources
          Displaying objects used by programs
            Example: Displaying program reference
          Dropping a collection from a distributed relational database
          Job accounting in a distributed relational database
          Managing the TCP/IP server
            DRDA TCP/IP server terminology
            TCP/IP communication support concepts for DDM
              Establishing a DRDA or DDM connection over TCP/IP
              DRDA and DDM listener program
              Start TCP/IP Server (STRTCPSVR) CL command
                DDM listener restriction
                Examples: Starting TCP/IP Server
              End TCP/IP Server (ENDTCPSVR) CL command
                End TCP/IP server restrictions
                Example: Ending TCP/IP server
              Starting DDM listener in iSeries Navigator
            DRDA and DDM server jobs
              Subsystem descriptions and prestart job entries with DDM
              DRDA and DDM prestart jobs
                Monitoring prestart jobs
                Managing prestart jobs
                Removing prestart job entries
                Routing entries
            Configuring the DDM server job subsystem
            Identifying server jobs
              i5/OS job names
              Displaying server jobs
                Displaying active jobs using the WRKACTJOB command
                Displaying active user jobs using the WRKUSRJOB command
              Displaying the history log
          Auditing the relational database directory
        Data availability and protection
          Recovery support for a distributed relational database
            Data recovery after disk failures for distributed relational databases
              Auxiliary storage pools
              Checksum protection in a distributed relational database
              Mirrored protection for a distributed relational database
            Journal management for distributed relational databases
              Index recovery
              Designing tables to reduce index rebuilding time
              System-managed access-path protection
            Transaction recovery through commitment control
            Save and restore processing for a distributed relational database
              Saving and restoring indexes in the distributed relational database environment
              Saving and restoring security information in the distributed relational database environment
              Saving and restoring SQL packages in the distributed relational database environment
              Saving and restoring relational database directories
          Network redundancy considerations for a distributed relational database
          Data redundancy in your distributed relational database network
        Performance
          Improving distributed relational database performance through the network
          Improving distributed relational database performance through the system
          Improving distributed relational database performance through the database
            Deciding DRDA data location
            Factors that affect blocking for DRDA
              DB2 UDB for iSeries to DB2 UDB for iSeries blocking
              DB2 UDB for iSeries to non-DB2 UDB for iSeries blocking
              Non-DB2 UDB for iSeries to DB2 UDB for iSeries blocking
              Summarization of DRDA blocking rules
            Factors that affect the size of DRDA query blocks
        Troubleshooting
          i5/OS problem handling overview
          Isolating distributed relational database problems
            DRDA incorrect output problems
            Application does not complete in the expected time
          Working with distributed relational database users
            Copy screen
            Messages
              Message types
              Distributed relational database messages
            Handling program start request failures for APPC
            Handling connection request failures for TCP/IP
              Server is not started or the port ID is not valid
              DRDA connection authorization failure
              System not available
              Connection failures specific to interactive SQL
              Not enough prestart jobs at server
          Application problems
            Listings
              Precompiler listing
              CRTSQLPKG listing
            SQLCODEs and SQLSTATEs
              Distributed relational database SQLCODEs and SQLSTATEs
          System and communications problems
          Getting data to report a failure
            Printing a job log
            Finding job logs from TCP/IP server prestart jobs
            Printing the product activity log
            Job tracing
              Trace job
              Start trace
            Communications trace
              Standard communications trace
                Finding your line, controller, and device descriptions
            TCP/IP communications trace
              TCP/IP communication trace formatting
          Finding first-failure data capture data
          Starting a service job to diagnose application server problems
            Service jobs for APPC servers
            Creating your own transaction program name and setting QCNTSRVC
              Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 UDB for iSeries application requester
              Creating your own transaction program name for debugging a DB2 UDB for iSeries application server job
              Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 UDB for VM application requester
              Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 UDB for z/OS application requester
              Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows application requester
            Service jobs for TCP/IP servers
            QRWOPTIONS data area
              Example: CL command to create the data area
        Examples: Application programming
          Example: Program definitions
          Example: RPG program
          Example: COBOL program
          Example: C program using embedded SQL
          Example: Java program
          Example: Program output
        User FAQs
          Connecting to a distributed relational database
          i5/OS system value QCCSID
          CCSID conversion considerations for DB2 UDB for z/OS and DB2 UDB server for VM database managers
          Why am I getting an SQL5048N message when I attempt to connect from DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows?
          Do i5/OS files have to be journaled?
          When will query data be blocked for better performance?
          How do you interpret an SQLCODE and the associated tokens reported in an SQL0969N error message?
          How can the host variable type in WHERE clauses affect performance?
          Can I use a library list for resolving unqualified table and view names?
          Can a DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows user specify that the NLSS sort sequence table of the DRDA job on i5/OS be used instead of the usual EBCDIC sequence?
          Why are no rows returned when I perform a query?
          What level of DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows is required to interact with DB2 for iSeries?
          How can I get scrollable cursor support enabled from DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows to the System i platform?
          Other tips for interoperating in unlike environments
        Interpreting trace job and first-failure data capture data
          Interpreting data entries for the RW component of trace job
            Example: Analyzing the RW trace data
            Description of RW trace points
              RWff RC—Receive Data Stream Trace Point
              RWff SN—Send Data Stream Trace Point
              RWQY S1—Partial Send Data Stream Trace Point 1
              RWQY S2—Partial Send Data Stream Trace Point 2
              RWQY BP—Successful Fetch Trace Point
              RWQY NB—Unsuccessful Fetch Trace Point
              RWQY P0—Result Set Pseudo-Open
              RWQY AR—Array Result Set Processed
              RWQY DA—Array Result Set SQLDA
              RWQY DO—Debug Options
              RWQY L1 and RWEX L1—Saved in Outbound LOB Table Trace Point
              RWQY L2 and RWEX L2—Built in Datastream from LOB Table Trace Point
              RWQY L0 and RWEX L0—Saved in Inbound LOB Table Trace Point
              RWAC RQ—Access RDB Request Trace Point
              RWAC cb—Access RDB Control Block Trace Points
              RWSY FN: SYNCxxx [TYPE:x]—Source TCP SYNC/RESYNC Trace Point
              RWSY xx: yyyyyyy...—Target TCP SYNC/RESYNC Trace Point
              RW_ff_m—Application Requester Driver Control Block Trace Point
          First-failure data capture
            First-failure data capture dump
            FFDC dump output description
            DDM error codes
              Command check codes
              Conversational protocol error code descriptions
              DDM syntax error code descriptions
        Related information
          System i information
          Distributed relational database library
          Other IBM distributed relational database platform libraries
          Architecture books
          IBM Redbooks
      Embedded SQL programming
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Common concepts and rules for using embedded SQL
          Writing applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in SQL statements
            Assignment rules for host variables in SQL statements
              Rules for string assignment of host variables in SQL statements
              Rules for CCSIDs of host variables in SQL statements
              Rules for numeric assignment of host variables in SQL statements
              Rules for date, time, and timestamp assignment of host variables in SQL statements
            Indicator variables in applications that use SQL
              Indicator variables used with host structures
              Indicator variables used to set null values
          Handling SQL error return codes using the SQLCA
          Using the SQL diagnostics area
            Updating applications to use the SQL diagnostics area
            i5/OS programming model
            Additional notes on using the SQL diagnostics area
            Example: SQL routine exception
            Example: Logging items from the SQL diagnostics area
          Handling exception conditions with the WHENEVER statement
        Coding SQL statements in C and C++ applications
          Defining the SQL communications area in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Comments in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Including code in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Margins in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Names in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            NULLs and NULs in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Preprocessor sequence for C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Trigraphs in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              Numeric host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              Character host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              Graphic host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              Binary host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              LOB host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
              ROWID host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Host structure declarations in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Host structure indicator array in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using arrays of host structures in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Host structure array in C and C++ applications that use SQL
            Host structure array indicator structure in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using pointer data types in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using typedef in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Using ILE C compiler external file descriptions in C and C++ applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and C or C++ data types
            Notes on C and C++ variable declaration and usage
          Using indicator variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
        Coding SQL statements in COBOL applications
          Defining the SQL communication area in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Comments in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Including code in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Margins in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Sequence numbers in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Names in COBOL applications that use SQL
            COBOL compile-time options in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in COBOL applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Multiple source COBOL programs and the SQL COBOL precompiler
          Using host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Numeric host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Floating-point host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Character host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Graphic host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Binary host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              LOB host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              Datetime host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
              ROWID host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Host structure in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Host structure indicator array in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Using host structure arrays in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Host structure array in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Host array indicator structure in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Using external file descriptions in COBOL applications that use SQL
            Using external file descriptions for host structure arrays in COBOL applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and COBOL data types
            Notes on COBOL variable declaration and usage
          Using indicator variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
        Coding SQL statements in PL/I applications
          Defining the SQL communications area in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Example: Embedding SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Comments in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Including code in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Margins in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Names in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in PL/I applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              Numeric-host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              Character-host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              Binary host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              LOB host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
              ROWID host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Host structures in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Host structure indicator arrays in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Using host structure arrays in PL/I applications that use SQL
            Host structure array in PL/I applications that use SQL
              Host structure array indicator in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Using external file descriptions in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and PL/I data types
          Using indicator variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
          Differences in PL/I because of structure parameter passing techniques
        Coding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications
          Defining the SQL communications area in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Example: Embedding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Comments in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Including code in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Sequence numbers in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Names in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using host structure arrays in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using external file descriptions in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            External file description considerations for host structure arrays in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and RPG/400 data types
            Assignment rules in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Using indicator variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
            Example: Using indicator variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
          Differences in RPG/400 because of structure parameter passing techniques
          Correctly ending a called RPG/400 program that uses SQL
        Coding SQL statements in ILE RPG applications
          Defining the SQL communication area in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Defining SQL descriptor areas in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Embedding SQL statements in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Comments in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Continuation for SQL statements in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Including code in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Using directives in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Sequence numbers in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Names in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            WHENEVER statement in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Declaring host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              Declaring binary host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              Declaring LOB host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
                LOB host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
                LOB locators in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
                LOB file reference variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
              Declaring ROWID variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Using host structures in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Using host structure arrays in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Using external file descriptions in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            External file description considerations for host structure arrays in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Determining equivalent SQL and ILE RPG data types
            Notes on ILE RPG variable declaration and usage
          Using indicator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
            Example: Using indicator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Example: SQLDA for a multiple row-area fetch in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
          Example: Dynamic SQL in an ILE RPG application that uses SQL
        Coding SQL statements in REXX applications
          Using the SQL communication area in REXX applications
          Using SQL descriptor areas in REXX applications
          Embedding SQL statements in REXX applications
            Comments in REXX applications that use SQL
            Continuation of SQL statements in REXX applications that use SQL
            Including code in REXX applications that use SQL
            Margins in REXX applications that use SQL
            Names in REXX applications that use SQL
            Nulls in REXX applications that use SQL
            Statement labels in REXX applications that use SQL
            Handling errors and warnings in REXX applications that use SQL
          Using host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
            Determining data types of input host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
            The format of output host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
            Avoiding REXX conversion in REXX applications that use SQL
          Using indicator variables in REXX applications that use SQL
        Preparing and running a program with SQL statements
          Basic processes of the SQL precompiler
            Input to the SQL precompiler
            Source file CCSIDs in the SQL precompiler
            Output from the SQL precompiler
              Listing
              Temporary source file members created by the SQL precompiler
              Sample SQL precompiler output
          Non-ILE SQL precompiler commands
            Compiling a non-ILE application program that uses SQL
          ILE SQL precompiler commands
            Compiling an ILE application program that uses SQL
          Setting compiler options using the precompiler commands
          Interpreting compile errors in applications that use SQL
            Error and warning messages during a compile of application programs that use SQL
              Error and warning messages during a PL/I, C, or C++ compile
              Error and warning messages during a COBOL compile
              Error and warning messages during a RPG compile
          Binding an application that uses SQL
            Program references in applications that use SQL
          Displaying SQL precompiler options
          Running a program with embedded SQL
            Running a program with embedded SQL: i5/OS DDM considerations
            Running a program with embedded SQL: Override considerations
            Running a program with embedded SQL: SQL return codes
        Example programs: Using DB2 UDB for iSeries statements
          Example: SQL statements in ILE C and C++ programs
          Example: SQL statements in COBOL and ILE COBOL programs
          Example: SQL statements in PL/I programs
          Example: SQL statements in RPG/400 programs
          Example: SQL statements in ILE RPG programs
          Example: SQL statements in REXX programs
          Report produced by example programs that use SQL
        CL command descriptions for host language precompilers
          CRTSQLCBL (Create Structured Query Language COBOL) command
          CRTSQLCBLI (Create SQL ILE COBOL Object) command
          CRTSQLCI (Create Structured Query Language ILE C Object) command
          CRTSQLCPPI (Create Structured Query Language C++ Object) command
          CRTSQLPLI (Create Structured Query Language PL/I) command
          CRTSQLRPG (Create Structured Query Language RPG) command
        Related information
      SQL programming
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Introduction to DB2 UDB for iSeries Structured Query Language
          SQL concepts
            SQL relational database and system terminology
            SQL and system naming conventions
            Types of SQL statements
            SQL communication area
            SQL diagnostics area
          SQL objects
            Schemas
            Journals and journal receivers
            Catalogs
            Tables, rows, and columns
            Aliases
            Views
            Indexes
            Constraints
            Triggers
            Stored procedures
            Sequences
            User-defined functions
            User-defined types
            SQL packages
          Application program objects
            User source file member
            Output source file member
            Program
            SQL package
            Module
            Service program
        Data definition language
          Creating a schema
          Creating a table
            Adding and removing constraints
            Referential integrity and tables
              Adding and removing referential constraints
              Example: Adding referential constraints
            Example: Removing constraints
            Check pending
          Creating a table using LIKE
          Creating a table using AS
          Creating and altering a materialized query table
          Declaring a global temporary table
          Creating and altering an identity column
          Using ROWID
          Creating and using sequences
            Comparison of identity columns and sequences
          Creating descriptive labels using the LABEL ON statement
          Describing an SQL object using COMMENT ON
          Changing a table definition
            Adding a column
            Changing a column
            Allowable conversions of data types
            Deleting a column
            Order of operations for the ALTER TABLE statement
          Creating and using ALIAS names
          Creating and using views
            WITH CHECK OPTION on a view
              WITH CASCADED CHECK OPTION
              WITH LOCAL CHECK OPTION
              Example: Cascaded check option
          Creating indexes
          Catalogs in database design
            Getting catalog information about a table
            Getting catalog information about a column
          Dropping a database object
        Data manipulation language
          Retrieving data using the SELECT statement
            Basic SELECT statement
            Specifying a search condition using the WHERE clause
              Expressions in the WHERE clause
              Comparison operators
              NOT keyword
            GROUP BY clause
            HAVING clause
            ORDER BY clause
            Static SELECT statements
            Handling null values
            Special registers in SQL statements
            Casting data types
            Date, time, and timestamp data types
              Specifying current date and time values
              Date/time arithmetic
            Handling duplicate rows
            Defining complex search conditions
              Special considerations for LIKE
              Multiple search conditions within a WHERE clause
            Using OLAP specifications
            Joining data from more than one table
              Inner join
                Inner join using the JOIN syntax
                Inner join using the WHERE clause
                Joining data with the USING clause
              Left outer join
              Right outer join
              Exception join
              Cross join
              Simulating a full outer join
              Multiple join types in one statement
            Using table expressions
            Using recursive queries
            Using the UNION keyword to combine subselects
              Specifying the UNION ALL keyword
            Using the EXCEPT keyword
            Using the INTERSECT keyword
            Data retrieval errors
          Inserting rows using the INSERT statement
            Inserting rows using the VALUES clause
            Inserting rows using a select-statement
            Inserting multiple rows using the blocked INSERT statement
            Inserting data into tables with referential constraints
            Inserting values into an identity column
          Changing data in a table using the UPDATE statement
            Updating a table using a scalar-subselect
            Updating a table with rows from another table
            Updating tables with referential constraints
              Examples: UPDATE rules
            Updating an identity column
            Updating data as it is retrieved from a table
          Removing rows from a table using the DELETE statement
            Removing rows from tables with referential constraints
              Example: DELETE rules
          Using subqueries
            Subqueries in SELECT statements
              Subqueries and search conditions
              Usage notes on subqueries
              Including subqueries in the WHERE or HAVING clause
            Correlated subqueries
              Correlated names and references
              Example: Correlated subquery in a WHERE clause
              Example: Correlated subquery in a HAVING clause
              Example: Correlated subquery in a select-list
              Example: Correlated subquery in an UPDATE statement
              Example: Correlated subquery in a DELETE statement
        Sort sequences and normalization in SQL
          Sort sequence used with ORDER BY and row selection
            Sort sequence and ORDER BY
            Sort sequence and row selection
          Sort sequence and views
          Sort sequence and the CREATE INDEX statement
          Sort sequence and constraints
          ICU sort sequence
          Normalization
        Data protection
          Security for SQL objects
            Authorization ID
            Views
            Auditing
          Data integrity
            Concurrency
            Journaling
            Commitment control
            Savepoints
            Atomic operations
            Constraints
              Adding and using check constraints
            Save and restore functions
            Damage tolerance
            Index recovery
            Catalog integrity
            User auxiliary storage pool
            Independent auxiliary storage pool
        Routines
          Stored procedures
            Defining an external procedure
            Defining an SQL procedure
            Calling a stored procedure
              Using the CALL statement where procedure definition exists
              Using the embedded CALL statement where no procedure definition exists
              Using the embedded CALL statement with an SQLDA
              Using the dynamic CALL statement where no CREATE PROCEDURE exists
              Examples: CALL statements
                Example 1: ILE C and PL/I procedures called from an ILE C program
                Example 2: A REXX procedure called from an ILE C program
            Returning result sets from stored procedures
              Example 1: Calling a stored procedure that returns a single result set
              Example 2: Calling a stored procedure that returns a result set from a nested procedure
            Parameter passing conventions for stored procedures and user-defined functions
            Indicator variables and stored procedures
            Returning a completion status to the calling program
          Using user-defined functions
            UDF concepts
            Writing UDFs as SQL functions
              Example: SQL scalar UDFs
              Example: SQL table UDFs
            Writing UDFs as external functions
              Registering UDFs
                Example: Exponentiation
                Example: String search
                Example: BLOB string search
                Example: String search over a user-defined type (UDT)
                Example: AVG over a user-defined type (UDT)
                Example: Counting
                Example: Table function returning document IDs
              Passing arguments from DB2 to external functions
                Parameter style SQL
                Parameter style DB2SQL
                Parameter style GENERAL
                Parameter style GENERAL WITH NULLS
                Parameter style DB2GENERAL
                Parameter style Java
              Table function considerations
              Error processing for UDFs
              Threads considerations
              Parallel processing
              Fenced or unfenced considerations
              Save and restore considerations
            Examples: UDF code
              Example: Square of a number UDF
              Example: Counter
              Example: Weather table function
            Using UDFs in SQL statements
              Using parameter markers or the NULL values as function arguments
              Using qualified function references
              Using unqualified function references
              Summary of function references
          Triggers
            SQL triggers
              BEFORE SQL triggers
              AFTER SQL triggers
              INSTEAD OF SQL triggers
              Handlers in SQL triggers
              SQL trigger transition tables
            External triggers
              Example: External triggers
          Debugging an SQL routine
          Improving performance of procedures and functions
            Improving implementation of procedures and functions
            Redesigning routines for performance
        Processing special data types
          Large objects
            Large object data types
            Large object locators
            Example: Using a locator to work with a CLOB value
              Example: LOBLOC.SQC in C
              Example: LOBLOC.SQB in COBOL
            Indicator variables and LOB locators
            LOB file reference variables
            Example: Extracting CLOB data to a file
              Example: LOBFILE.SQC in C
              Example: LOBFILE.SQB in COBOL
            Example: Inserting data into a CLOB column
            Displaying the layout of LOB columns
            Journal entry layout of LOB columns
          User-defined distinct types
            Defining a UDT
              Example: Money
              Example: Resumé
            Defining tables with UDTs
              Example: Sales
              Example: Application forms
            Manipulating UDTs
            Examples: Using UDTs
              Example: Comparisons between UDTs and constants
              Example: Casting between UDTs
              Example: Comparisons involving UDTs
              Example: Sourced UDFs involving UDTs
              Example: Assignments involving UDTs
              Example: Assignments in dynamic SQL
              Example: Assignments involving different UDTs
              Example: Using UDTs in UNION
          Examples: Using UDTs, UDFs, and LOBs
            Example: Defining the UDT and UDFs
            Example: Using the LOB function to populate the database
            Example: Using UDFs to query instances of UDTs
            Example: Using LOB locators to manipulate UDT instances
          Using DataLinks
            Linking control levels in DataLinks
              NO LINK CONTROL
              FILE LINK CONTROL with FS permissions
              FILE LINK CONTROL with DB permissions
            Working with DataLinks
        Using SQL in different environments
          Using a cursor
            Types of cursors
            Examples: Using a cursor
              Step 1: Defining the cursor
              Step 2: Opening the cursor
              Step 3: Specifying what to do when the end of data is reached
              Step 4: Retrieving a row using a cursor
              Step 5a: Updating the current row
              Step 5b: Deleting the current row
              Step 6: Closing the cursor
            Using the multiple-row FETCH statement
              Multiple-row FETCH using a host structure array
              Multiple-row FETCH using a row storage area
            Unit of work and open cursors
          Dynamic SQL applications
            Designing and running a dynamic SQL application
            CCSID of dynamic SQL statements
            Processing non-SELECT statements
              Using the PREPARE and EXECUTE statements
            Processing SELECT statements and using a descriptor
              Fixed-list SELECT statements
              Varying-list SELECT statements
              SQL descriptor areas
              SQLDA format
              Example: A SELECT statement for allocating storage for SQLDA
              Example: A SELECT statement using an allocated SQL descriptor
              Parameter markers
          Using dynamic SQL through client interfaces
            Accessing data with Java
            Accessing data with Domino
            Accessing data with ODBC
            Accessing data with i5/OS PASE
            Accessing data with iSeries Access for Windows OLE DB Provider
            Accessing data with Net.Data
            Accessing data through a Linux partition
            Accessing data using Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA)
          Using interactive SQL
            Starting interactive SQL
            Using the statement entry function
            Prompting
              Syntax checking
              Statement processing mode
              Subqueries
              CREATE TABLE prompting
              Entering DBCS data
            Using the list selection function
              Example: Using the list selection function
            Session services description
            Exiting interactive SQL
            Using an existing SQL session
            Recovering an SQL session
            Accessing remote databases with interactive SQL
          Using the SQL statement processor
            Execution of statements after errors occur
            Commitment control in the SQL statement processor
            Source member listing for the SQL statement processor
        Distributed relational database function and SQL
          DB2 UDB for iSeries distributed relational database support
          DB2 UDB for iSeries distributed relational database example program
          SQL package support
            Valid SQL statements in an SQL package
            Considerations for creating an SQL package
              CRTSQLPKG authorization
              Creating a package on a database other than DB2 UDB for iSeries
              Target release (TGTRLS) parameter
              SQL statement size
              Statements that do not require a package
              Package object type
              ILE programs and service programs
              Package creation connection
              Unit of work
              Creating packages locally
              Labels
              Consistency token
              SQL and recursion
          CCSID considerations for SQL
          Connection management and activation groups
            Source code for PGM1
            Source code for PGM2
            Source code for PGM3
            Multiple connections to the same relational database
            Implicit connection management for the default activation group
            Implicit connection management for nondefault activation groups
          Distributed support
            Determining the connection type
            Connect and commitment control restrictions
            Determining the connection status
            Distributed unit of work connection considerations
            Ending connections
          Distributed unit of work
            Managing distributed unit of work connections
            Checking the connection status
            Cursors and prepared statements
          Application requester driver programs
          Problem handling
          DRDA stored procedure considerations
        Reference
          DB2 Universal Database for iSeries sample tables
            Department table (DEPARTMENT)
              DEPARTMENT
            Employee table (EMPLOYEE)
              EMPLOYEE
            Employee photo table (EMP_PHOTO)
              EMP_PHOTO
            Employee resumé table (EMP_RESUME)
              EMP_RESUME
            Employee to project activity table (EMPPROJACT)
              EMPPROJACT
            Project table (PROJECT)
              PROJECT
            Project activity table (PROJACT)
              PROJACT
            Activity table (ACT)
              ACT
            Class schedule table (CL_SCHED)
              CL_SCHED
            In-tray table (IN_TRAY)
              IN_TRAY
            Organization table (ORG)
              ORG
            Staff table (STAFF)
              STAFF
            Sales table (SALES)
              SALES
          DB2 UDB for iSeries CL command descriptions
    Reference
      Database information finder
      DB2 Multisystem
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        DB2 Multisystem overview
          Benefits of using DB2 Multisystem
          DB2 Multisystem: Basic terms and concepts
        Node groups with DB2 Multisystem: Overview
          How node groups work with DB2 Multisystem
          Tasks to complete before using the node group commands with DB2 Multisystem
          Create Node Group command
          Display Node Group command
          Change Node Group Attributes command
          Delete Node Group command
        Distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
          Create Physical File command and SQL CREATE TABLE statement
            Restrictions when creating or working with distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
          System activities after the distributed file is created
            How CL commands work with distributed files
              CL commands: Allowable to run against a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
              CL commands: Affecting only local pieces of a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
              CL commands: Affecting all the pieces of a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
                Journaling considerations with DB2 Multisystem
                Copy File command with distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
          Partitioning with DB2 Multisystem
            Planning for partitioning with DB2 Multisystem
            Choosing partitioning keys with DB2 Multisystem
          Customizing data distribution with DB2 Multisystem
        Partitioned tables
          Creation of partitioned tables
          Modification of existing tables
            From a nonpartitioned table to a partitioned table
            Modification of existing partitioned tables
              Restrictions when altering a column's data type
            From a partitioned table to a nonpartitioned table
          Indexes with partitioned tables
          Query performance and optimization
            Queries using SQL Query Engine
              Check constraint optimization
              SQL Query Engine: Index usage
            Queries using Classic Query Engine
              Materialization
              CQE query optimization considerations
              Classic Query Engine: Index usage
          Save and restore considerations
          Journaling a partitioned table
          Traditional system interface considerations
          Restrictions for a partitioned table
        Scalar functions available with DB2 Multisystem
          PARTITION with DB2 Multisystem
            Examples of PARTITION with DB2 Multisystem
          HASH with DB2 Multisystem
            Example of HASH with DB2 Multisystem
          NODENAME with DB2 Multisystem
            Examples of NODENAME with DB2 Multisystem
          NODENUMBER with DB2 Multisystem
            Example of NODENUMBER with DB2 Multisystem
          Special registers with DB2 Multisystem
            Relative record numbering function with DB2 Multisystem
        Performance and scalability with DB2 Multisystem
          Why you should use DB2 Multisystem
            Performance enhancement tip with DB2 Multisystem
          How DB2 Multisystem helps you expand your database system
            Redistribution issues for adding systems to a network
        Query design for performance with DB2 Multisystem
          Optimization with DB2 Multisystem: Overview
          Implementation and optimization of a single file query with DB2 Multisystem
          Implementation and optimization of record ordering with DB2 Multisystem
          Implementation and optimization of the UNION and DISTINCT clauses with DB2 Multisystem
          Processing of the DSTDTA and ALWCPYDTA parameters with DB2 Multisystem
          Implementation and optimization of join operations with DB2 Multisystem
            Collocated join with DB2 Multisystem
            Directed join with DB2 Multisystem
            Repartitioned join with DB2 Multisystem
            Broadcast join with DB2 Multisystem
            Join optimization with DB2 Multisystem
              Partitioning keys over join fields with DB2 Multisystem
          Implementation and optimization of grouping with DB2 Multisystem
            One-step grouping with DB2 Multisystem
            Two-step grouping with DB2 Multisystem
            Grouping and joins with DB2 Multisystem
          Subquery support with DB2 Multisystem
          Access plans with DB2 Multisystem
          Reusable open data paths with DB2 Multisystem
          Temporary result writer with DB2 Multisystem
            Temporary result writer job: Advantages with DB2 Multisystem
            Temporary result writer job: Disadvantages with DB2 Multisystem
            Control of the temporary result writer with DB2 Multisystem
          Optimizer messages with DB2 Multisystem
          Changes to the Change Query Attributes command with DB2 Multisystem
            Asynchronous job usage parameter with DB2 Multisystem
            Apply remote parameter with DB2 Multisystem
          Summary of performance considerations
        Related information
      DB2 Web Query
        Printable PDFs
        Introducing IBM DB2 Web Query for System i
        Using the Reporting Interface
        Using Power Painter
        Creating a Report With Report Assistant
        Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
        Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant
        Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Using the DB2 Web Query Viewer
        Understanding User Interface Basics
        Creating a Reporting Procedure With SQL Report Wizard
        Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the HTML Layout Painter
        Describing and Accessing Data: Overview
        Using the Synonym Editor
        Analyzing Metadata and Procedures
        Running Web Query Reports Using the Java Batch Run Utility
      Distributed data management
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Introduction to i5/OS DDM
          System compatibility
          Overview of DDM functions
          Basic DDM concepts
          Parts of DDM
            Parts of DDM: Source DDM
            Parts of DDM: Target DDM
            Parts of DDM: DDM file
              Create a DDM file using SNA
              Create a DDM file using TCP/IP
              Create a DDM file using RDB directory entry information
                Effect of job description on ASP group selection
              Example: Use the basic concepts of DDM in an APPC network
              Example: Use the basic concepts of DDM in an APPN network
          Additional DDM concepts
            iSeries server as the source server for DDM
              Integrated Language Environment and DDM
              Source server actions dependent on type of target server
            iSeries server as the target server for DDM
            DDM-related jobs and DDM conversations
          Examples: Access multiple remote files with DDM
            Example: Access files on multiple servers with DDM
            Example: Process multiple requests for remote files with DDM
        Use language, utility, and application support for DDM
          Programming language considerations for DDM
            DDM considerations for all languages
              HLL program input and output operations with i5/OS DDM
            Commitment control support for DDM
              Use DDM files with commitment control
            ILE RPG considerations for DDM
            ILE COBOL considerations for DDM
              Direct file support with ILE COBOL
            BASIC considerations for DDM
            PL/I considerations for DDM
            CL command considerations for DDM
            ILE C considerations for DDM
          Utility considerations for DDM
            System/38-compatible database tools
              System/38-compatible data file utility (DFU/38)
              System/38-compatible query utility (Query/38)
              Non-iSeries or non-System/38 Query/38 example
              Query/38 output considerations for DDM
              Query/38 command considerations for DDM
              Query/38 optimization for DDM
              Existing Query/38 application considerations for DDM
            Data file utility for iSeries server
            i5/OS database query
              Multiple remote files
            Sort utility
          iSeries Access Family considerations for DDM
            iSeries Access Family transfer function considerations
            iSeries Access Family copy command considerations
          Hierarchical file system API support for DDM
        Prepare to use DDM
          Communications requirements for DDM in an APPC network
          Configure a communications network in a TCP/IP network
          Security requirements for DDM
          DDM file requirements
          Program modification requirements for DDM
            DDM architecture-related restrictions
            iSeries source and target restrictions and considerations for DDM
            Non-iSeries target restrictions and considerations for DDM
        Security
          Elements of distributed relational database security
            Elements of security in an APPC network
              APPN configuration lists
              Conversation level security
              DRDA application server security in an APPC network
            Elements of security in a TCP/IP network
              Application requester security in a TCP/IP network
              Application server security in a TCP/IP network
              Connection security protocols for DDM or DRDA
              Secure Sockets Layer for DDM and DRDA
                Required programs
                iSeries server requirements
              Internet Protocol Security Protocol for DDM/DRDA
              Considerations for certain passwords being passed as clear text
              Ports and port restrictions for DDM/DRDA
          DDM server access control exit program for additional security
            User exit program requirement
            User exit program parameter list for DDM
            User exit program example for DDM
            Parameter list example for DDM
            DRDA server access control exit programs with example
            User exit program considerations for DDM
        Use CL and DDS with DDM
          DDM-specific CL commands
            CHGDDMF (Change DDM File) command
              Example: CHGDDMF command
            CRTDDMF (Create DDM File) command
              Examples: CRTDDMF command
            DSPDDMF (Display DDM Files) command
            RCLDDMCNV (Reclaim DDM Conversations) command
            SBMRMTCMD (Submit Remote Command) command
              iSeries and System/38 target systems on the SBMRMTCMD command
              Restrictions for the SBMRMTCMD command
              Examples: SBMRMTCMD command
              Additional considerations: SBMRMTCMD command
            WRKDDMF (Work with DDM Files) command
          DDM-related CL command considerations
            File management handling of DDM files
            ALCOBJ (Allocate Object) command
              Member names and iSeries target servers on the ALCOBJ command
              Lock multiple DDM files with the ALCOBJ command
              ALCOBJ command completion time with DDM
            CHGJOB (Change Job) command
            CHGLF (Change Logical File) command
            CHGPF (Change Physical File) command
            CHGSRCPF (Change Source Physical File) command
            CLRPFM (Clear Physical File Member) command
            Copy commands with DDM
            CRTDTAARA (Create Data Area) command
            CRTDTAQ (Create Data Queue) command
            CRTLF (Create Logical File) command
            CRTPF (Create Physical File) command
            CRTSRCPF (Create Source Physical File) command
            DLCOBJ (Deallocate Object) command
              Member names and iSeries target servers on the DLCOBJ command
              Unlock multiple DDM files on the DLCOBJ command
            DLTF (Delete File) command
            DSPFD (Display File Description) command
            DSPFFD (Display File Field Description) command
            OPNQRYF (Open Query File) command
            OVRDBF (Override with Database File) command
            RCLRSC (Reclaim Resources) command
            RNMOBJ (Rename Object) command
            WRKJOB (Work with Job) command
            WRKOBJLCK (Work with Object Lock) command
          DDM-related CL parameter considerations
            DDMACC parameter considerations
            DDMCNV parameter considerations
            OUTFILE parameter considerations for DDM
          DDM-related CL command lists
            Object-oriented commands with DDM
            Target iSeries-required file management commands
            Member-related commands with DDM
            Commands not supporting DDM
            Source file commands
            DDM-related CL command summary charts
          Data description specifications considerations for DDM
            iSeries target considerations for DDM
            Non-iSeries target considerations for DDM
            DDM-related DDS keywords and information
          DDM user profile authority
        Operating considerations for DDM
          Access files with DDM
            Types of files supported by i5/OS DDM
            Existence of DDM file and remote file
            Rules for specifying target server file names for DDM
              Target iSeries file names for DDM
              Target non-iSeries file names for DDM
              Use location-specific file names for commonly named files for DDM
            Examples: Access iSeries DDM remote files (iSeries-to-iSeries)
            Example: Access System/36 DDM remote files (iSeries-to-System/36)
          Access members with DDM
            Example: Access DDM remote members (iSeries server only)
            Example: DDM file that opens a specific member
          Work with access methods for DDM
            Access intents
            Key field updates
            Deleted records
            Blocked record processing
            Variable-length records
          Other DDM-related functions involving remote files
            Perform file management functions on remote servers
            Lock files and members for DDM
              Allocate Object (ALCOBJ) and Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ) commands
              Work with Job (WRKJOB) and Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) commands
            Control DDM conversations
              Display DDMCNV values (WRKJOB command)
              Change DDMCNV values (CHGJOB) command
              Reclaim DDM resources (RCLRSC and RCLDDMCNV commands)
            Display DDM remote file information
            Display DDM remote file records
            Coded character set identifier with DDM
            Use of object distribution
            Use of object distribution with DDM
          Manage the TCP/IP server
            DDM terminology
            TCP/IP communication support concepts for DDM
              Establish a DRDA or DDM connection over TCP/IP
              DDM listener program
              Start TCP/IP Server (STRTCPSVR) CL command
              End TCP/IP Server (ENDTCPSVR) CL command
              Start DDM listener in iSeries Navigator
            DDM server jobs
              Subsystem descriptions and prestart job entries with DDM
              DDM prestart jobs
                Monitor prestart jobs
                Manage prestart jobs
                Remove prestart job entries
                Routing entries
            Configure the DDM server job subsystem
            Identify server jobs
              iSeries job names
              Display server jobs
              Display the history log
          Cancel distributed data management work
            End Job (ENDJOB) command
            End Request (ENDRQS) command
          Performance considerations for DDM
            Batch file processing with DDM
            Interactive file processing with DDM
            DDM conversation length considerations
          DDM problem analysis on the remote server
            Handle connection request failures for TCP/IP
              DDM server is not started or the port ID is not valid
              DDM connection authorization failure
              DDM server not available
              Not enough prestart jobs at server
          System/36 source and target considerations for DDM
            DDM-related differences between iSeries and System/36 files
            System/36 source to iSeries target considerations for DDM
            iSeries source to System/36 target considerations for DDM
            Override considerations to System/36 for DDM
          Personal computer source to iSeries target considerations for DDM
        Examples: Code DDM-related tasks
          Communications setup for DDM examples and tasks
          DDM example 1: Simple inquiry application
          DDM example 2: ORDERENT application
            DDM example 2: Central server ORDERENT files
            DDM example 2: Description of ORDERENT program
            DDM example 2: Remote server ORDERENT files
            DDM example 2: Transfer a program to a target server
              DDM example 2: Pass-through method
              DDM example 2: SBMRMTCMD command method
            DDM example 2: Copy a file
          DDM example 3: Access multiple iSeries files
          DDM example 4: Access a file on System/36
        DDM architecture code point attributes
        DDM commands and parameters
          Subsets of DDM architecture supported by i5/OS DDM
            Supported DDM file models
              Alternate Index File (ALTINDF)
              Direct file (DIRFIL)
              Directory file (DIRECTORY)
              Keyed file (KEYFIL)
              Sequential file (SEQFIL)
              Stream file (STRFIL)
            Supported DDM access methods
          DDM commands and objects
            CHGCD (Change Current Directory) Level 2.0
            CHGEOF (Change End of File) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
            CHGFAT (Change File Attribute) Level 2.0
            CLOSE (Close File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            CLRFIL (Clear File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            CLSDRC (Close Directory) Level 2.0
            CPYFIL (Copy File) Level 2.0
            CRTAIF (Create Alternate Index File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            CRTDIRF (Create Direct File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            CRTDRC (Create Directory) Level 2.0
            CRTKEYF (Create Keyed File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            CRTSEQF (Create Sequential File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            CRTSTRF (Create Stream File) Level 2.0
            DCLFIL (Declare File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            DELDCL (Delete Declared Name) Level 1.0
            DELDRC (Delete Directory) Level 2.0
            DELFIL (Delete File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            DELREC (Delete Record) Level 1.0
            EXCSAT (Exchange Server Attributes) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            FILAL and FILATTRL (File Attribute List) Level 1.0, Level 2.0, and Level 3.0
            FRCBFF (Force Buffer) Level 2.0
            GETDRCEN (Get Directory Entries) Level 2.0
            GETREC (Get Record at Cursor) Level 1.0
            GETSTR (Get Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
            INSRECEF (Insert at EOF) Level 1.0
            INSRECKY (Insert Record by Key Value) Level 1.0
            INSRECNB (Insert Record at Number) Level 1.0
            LCKFIL (Lock File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            LCKSTR (Lock Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
            LODRECF (Load Record File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            LODSTRF (Load Stream File) Level 2.0
            LSTFAT (List File Attributes) Level 1.0, Level 2.0, and Level 3.0
            MODREC (Modify Record with Update Intent) Level 1.0
            OPEN (Open File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            OPNDRC (Open Directory) Level 2.0
            PUTSTR (Put Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
            QRYCD (Query Current Directory) Level 2.0
            QRYSPC (Query Space) Level 2.0
            RNMDRC (Rename Directory) Level 2.0
            RNMFIL (Rename File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            SBMSYSCMD (Submit server Command) Level 4.0
            SETBOF (Set Cursor to Beginning of File) Level 1.0
            SETEOF (Set Cursor to End of File) Level 1.0
            SETFRS (Set Cursor to First Record) Level 1.0
            SETKEY (Set Cursor by Key) Level 1.0
            SETKEYFR (Set Cursor to First Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
            SETKEYLM (Set Key Limits) Level 1.0
            SETKEYLS (Set Cursor to Last Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
            SETKEYNX (Set Cursor to Next Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
            SETKEYPR (Set Cursor to Previous Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
            SETLST (Set Cursor to Last Record) Level 1.0
            SETMNS (Set Cursor Minus) Level 1.0
            SETNBR (Set Cursor to Record Number) Level 1.0
            SETNXT (Set Cursor to Next Number) Level 1.0
            SETNXTKE (Set Cursor to Next Record in Key Sequence with a Key Equal to Value Specified) Level 1.0
            SETPLS (Set Cursor Plus) Level 1.0
            SETPRV (Set Cursor to Previous Record) Level 1.0
            SETUPDKY (Set Update Intent by Key Value) Level 1.0
            SETUPDNB (Set Update Intent by Record Number) Level 1.0
            ULDRECF (Unload Record File) Level 1.0
            ULDSTRF (Unload Stream File) Level 2.0
            UNLFIL (Unlock File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
            UNLIMPLK (Unlock Implicit Record Lock) Level 1.0
            UNLSTR (Unlock Substreams) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
          User profile authority
        iSeries server-to-CICS considerations with DDM
          iSeries languages, utilities, and licensed programs
            CRTDDMF (Create DDM File) considerations
            iSeries CL considerations
              ALCOBJ (Allocate Object)
              CLRPFM (Clear Physical File Member)
              CPYF (Copy File)
              CPYTOTAP, CPYFRMTAP and CPYSPLF commands
              DLCOBJ (Deallocate Object)
              DSPFD and DSPFFD commands
              DSPPFM (Display Physical File Member)
              OPNDBF (Open Database File)
              OVRDBF (Override with Database File)
              RCVNETF (Receive Network File)
          Language considerations for iSeries server and CICS
            PL/I considerations
              PL/I open file requests
              PL/I input/output requests
            ILE COBOL considerations
              ILE COBOL SELECT clause
              ILE COBOL statements
            ILE C considerations
            ILE RPG considerations
              File description specifications
              ILE RPG input/output operations
        Use DDM on the iSeries server versus other IBM systems
          iSeries server and System/36 DDM differences
          iSeries server and System/38 DDM differences
        Related information
      SQL call level interface
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Getting started with DB2 UDB CLI
          Differences between DB2 UDB CLI and embedded SQL
          Advantages of using DB2 UDB CLI instead of embedded SQL
          Deciding between DB2 UDB CLI, dynamic SQL, and static SQL
        Writing a DB2 UDB CLI application
          Initialization and termination tasks in a DB2 UDB CLI application
            Example: Initialization and connection in a DB2 UDB CLI application
          Transaction processing task in a DB2 UDB CLI application
            Allocating statement handles in a DB2 UDB CLI application
            Preparing and processing tasks in a DB2 UDB CLI application
            Processing results in a DB2 UDB CLI application
              Processing SELECT statements in a DB2 UDB CLI application
              Processing UPDATE, DELETE, and INSERT statements in a DB2 UDB CLI application
              Processing other SQL statements in a DB2 UDB CLI application
            Freeing statement handles in a DB2 UDB CLI application
            Committing or rolling back in a DB2 UDB CLI application
              When to call SQLTransact() in a DB2 UDB CLI application
              Effects of calling SQLTransact() in a DB2 UDB CLI application
          Diagnostics in a DB2 UDB CLI application
            Return codes from a DB2 UDB CLI application
            DB2 UDB CLI SQLSTATE values
          Data types and data conversion in DB2 UDB CLI functions
            Other C data types in DB2 UDB CLI functions
            Data conversion in DB2 UDB CLI functions
          Working with string arguments in DB2 UDB CLI functions
            Length of string arguments in DB2 UDB CLI functions
            String truncation in DB2 UDB CLI functions
            Interpretation of strings in DB2 UDB CLI functions
        DB2 UDB CLI functions
          Categories of DB2 UDB CLIs
          SQLAllocConnect - Allocate connection handle
          SQLAllocEnv - Allocate environment handle
          SQLAllocHandle - Allocate handle
          SQLAllocStmt - Allocate a statement handle
          SQLBindCol - Bind a column to an application variable
          SQLBindFileToCol - Bind LOB file reference to LOB column
          SQLBindFileToParam - Bind LOB file reference to LOB parameter
          SQLBindParam - Bind a buffer to a parameter marker
          SQLBindParameter - Bind a parameter marker to a buffer
          SQLCancel - Cancel statement
          SQLCloseCursor - Close cursor statement
          SQLColAttributes - Obtain column attributes
          SQLColumnPrivileges - Get privileges associated with the columns of a table
          SQLColumns - Get column information for a table
          SQLConnect - Connect to a data source
          SQLCopyDesc - Copy description statement
          SQLDataSources - Get list of data sources
          SQLDescribeCol - Describe column attributes
          SQLDescribeParam - Return description of a parameter marker
          SQLDisconnect - Disconnect from a data source
          SQLDriverConnect - (Expanded) Connect to a data source
          SQLEndTran - Commit or roll back a transaction
          SQLError - Retrieve error information
          SQLExecDirect - Execute a statement directly
          SQLExecute - Execute a statement
          SQLExtendedFetch - Fetch array of rows
          SQLFetch - Fetch next row
          SQLFetchScroll - Fetch from a scrollable cursor
          SQLForeignKeys - Get the list of foreign key columns
          SQLFreeConnect - Free connection handle
          SQLFreeEnv - Free environment handle
          SQLFreeHandle - Free a handle
          SQLFreeStmt - Free (or reset) a statement handle
          SQLGetCol - Retrieve one column of a row of the result set
          SQLGetConnectAttr - Get the value of a connection attribute
          SQLGetConnectOption - Return current setting of a connect option
          SQLGetCursorName - Get cursor name
          SQLGetData - Get data from a column
          SQLGetDescField - Get descriptor field
          SQLGetDescRec - Get descriptor record
          SQLGetDiagField - Return diagnostic information (extensible)
          SQLGetDiagRec - Return diagnostic information (concise)
          SQLGetEnvAttr - Return current setting of an environment attribute
          SQLGetFunctions - Get functions
          SQLGetInfo - Get general information
          SQLGetLength - Retrieve length of a string value
          SQLGetPosition - Return starting position of string
          SQLGetStmtAttr - Get the value of a statement attribute
          SQLGetStmtOption - Return current setting of a statement option
          SQLGetSubString - Retrieve portion of a string value
          SQLGetTypeInfo - Get data type information
          SQLLanguages - Get SQL dialect or conformance information
          SQLMoreResults - Determine whether there are more result sets
          SQLNativeSql - Get native SQL text
          SQLNextResult - Process the next result set
          SQLNumParams - Get number of parameters in an SQL statement
          SQLNumResultCols - Get number of result columns
          SQLParamData - Get next parameter for which a data value is needed
          SQLParamOptions - Specify an input array for a parameter
          SQLPrepare - Prepare a statement
          SQLPrimaryKeys - Get primary key columns of a table
          SQLProcedureColumns - Get input/output parameter information for a procedure
          SQLProcedures - Get list of procedure names
          SQLPutData - Pass data value for a parameter
          SQLReleaseEnv - Release all environment resources
          SQLRowCount - Get row count
          SQLSetConnectAttr - Set a connection attribute
          SQLSetConnectOption - Set connection option
          SQLSetCursorName - Set cursor name
          SQLSetDescField - Set a descriptor field
          SQLSetDescRec - Set a descriptor record
          SQLSetEnvAttr - Set environment attribute
          SQLSetParam - Set parameter
          SQLSetStmtAttr - Set a statement attribute
          SQLSetStmtOption - Set statement option
          SQLSpecialColumns - Get special (row identifier) columns
          SQLStatistics - Get index and statistics information for a base table
          SQLTablePrivileges - Get privileges associated with a table
          SQLTables - Get table information
          SQLTransact - Commit or roll back transaction
        DB2 UDB CLI include file
        Running DB2 UDB CLI in server mode
          Starting DB2 UDB CLI in SQL server mode
          Restrictions for running DB2 UDB CLI in server mode
        Examples: DB2 UDB CLI applications
          Example: Embedded SQL and the equivalent DB2 UDB CLI function calls
          Example: Using the CLI XA transaction connection attributes
          Example: Interactive SQL and the equivalent DB2 UDB CLI function calls
      SQL messages and codes
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        SQLCODE and SQLSTATE concepts
        Listing of SQLSTATE class codes
        Listing of SQLSTATE values
        SQL message concepts
        Listing of SQL messages
        SQL message finder
      SQL Reference
        About DB2 for i5/OS SQL Reference
          Standard compliance
          Who should read the SQL Reference
          How to use this book
          Printable PDFs
          What's new for V5R4
        Concepts
          Relational database
          Structured Query Language
          Schemas
          Tables
          Views
          User-defined types
          Aliases
          Packages and access plans
          Routines
          Sequences
          Authorization, privileges and object ownership
          Catalog
          Application processes, concurrency, and recovery
          Threads
          Isolation level
          Storage structures
          Character conversion
          Sort sequence
          Distributed relational database
        Language elements
          Characters
          Tokens
          Identifiers
          Naming conventions
          Aliases
          Authorization IDs and authorization names
          Data types
          Promotion of data types
          Casting between data types
          Assignments and comparisons
          Rules for result data types
          Conversion rules for operators
          Constants
          Special registers
          Column names
          References to variables
          Functions
          Expressions
          Datetime arithmatic
          Predicates
          Search conditions
        Built-in functions
          Aggregate functions
          Scalar functions
        Queries
          Authorization
          subselect
          fullselect
          select-statement
        Statements
          How SQL statements are invoked
          SQL return codes
          SQL comments
          ALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR
          ALTER PROCEDURE (External)
          ALTER PROCEDURE (SQL)
          ALTER SEQUENCE
          ALTER TABLE
          BEGIN DECLARE SECTION
          CALL
          CLOSE
          COMMENT
          COMMIT
          CONNECT (Type 1)
          CONNECT (Type 2)
          CREATE ALIAS
          CREATE DISTINCT TYPE
          CREATE FUNCTION
          CREATE FUNCTION (External Scalar)
          CREATE FUNCTION (External Table)
          CREATE FUNCTION (Sourced)
          CREATE FUNCTION (SQL Scalar)
          CREATE FUNCTION (SQL Table)
          CREATE INDEX
          CREATE PROCEDURE
          CREATE PROCEDURE (External)
          CREATE PROCEDURE (SQL)
          CREATE SCHEMA
          CREATE SEQUENCE
          CREATE TABLE
          CREATE TRIGGER
          CREATE VIEW
          DEALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR
          DECLARE CURSOR
          DECLARE GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE
          DECLARE PROCEDURE
          DECLARE STATEMENT
          DECLARE VARIABLE
          DELETE
          DESCRIBE
          DESCRIBE INPUT
          DESCRIBE TABLE
          DISCONNECT
          DROP
          END DECLARE SECTION
          EXECUTE
          EXECUTE IMMEDIATE
          FETCH
          FREE LOCATOR
          GET DESCRIPTOR
          GET DIAGNOSTICS
          GRANT (Distinct Type privileges)
          GRANT (Function or Procedure privileges)
          GRANT (Package privileges)
          GRANT (Sequence privileges)
          GRANT (Table or View privileges)
          HOLD LOCATOR
          INCLUDE
          INSERT
          LABEL
          LOCK TABLE
          OPEN
          PREPARE
          REFRESH TABLE
          RELEASE (Connection)
          RELEASE SAVEPOINT
          RENAME
          REVOKE (Distinct type privileges)
          REVOKE (Function or Procedure privileges)
          REVOKE (Package privileges)
          REVOKE (Sequences privileges)
          REVOKE (Table or View privileges)
          ROLLBACK
          SAVEPOINT
          SELECT
          SELECT INTO
          SET CONNECTION
          SET CURRENT DEBUG MODE
          SET CURRENT DEGREE
          SET DESCRIPTOR
          SET ENCRYPTION PASSWORD
          SET OPTION
          SET PATH
          SET RESULT SETS
          SET SCHEMA
          SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION
          SET TRANSACTION
          SET transition-variable
          SET variable
          SIGNAL
          UPDATE
          VALUES
          VALUES INTO
          WHENEVER
        SQL control statements
          References to SQL parameters and SQL variables
          References to SQL condition names
          References to SQL cursor names
          Summary of 'name' scoping in nested compound statements
          SQL- procedure-statement
          assignment- statement
          CALL statement
          CASE statement
          compound-statement
          FOR statement
          GET DIAGNOSTICS statement
          GOTO statement
          IF statement
          ITERATE statement
          LEAVE statement
          LOOP statement
          REPEAT statement
          RESIGNAL statement
          RETURN statement
          SIGNAL statement
          WHILE statement
        SQL limits
        Characteristics of SQL statements
          Actions allowed on SQL statements
          SQL statement data access indication in routines
          Considerations for using distributed relational database
        SQLCA (SQL communication area)
          Field descriptions
          INCLUDE SQLCA declarations
        SQLDA (SQL descriptor area)
          Field descriptions in an SQLDA header
          Field description in an occurrence of SQLVAR
          SQLTYPE and SQLLEN
          CCSID values in SQLDATA or SQLNAME
          Unrecognized and unsupported SQLTYPES
          INCLUDE SQLDA declarations
        CCSID values
        DB2 for i5/OS catalog views
          Notes about catalog views
          i5/OS catalog tables and views
          ODBC and JDBC catalog views
          ANS and ISO catalog views
        Terminology differences
        Reserved schema names and reserved words
          Reserved schema names
          Reserved words
        Related information
    Troubleshooting
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Before you call service
      System i database FAQ
      Monitoring database file errors
    Related information
  e-business and Web serving
    Application servers
      WebSphere Application Server
      WebSphere Application Server - Express V5.1
        Print this topic
        Overview
          What is WebSphere Application Server - Express?
          Overview of the architecture
          What's new in Version 5.1
          WebSphere Application Server - Express and other WebSphere Application Server products
          Get support for WebSphere Application Server - Express
          Other resources
        Installation
          Overview
          Step 1: Plan the installation and initial configuration
            Time considerations
            Prerequisites
            Obtain the WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries and current fixes
              Verify that the correct cumulative PTF package is installed
          Step 2: Install WebSphere Application Server
            Determine whether or not WebSphere Application Server - Express is preinstalled
            Install the correct cumulative PTF package
            Install the WebSphere Express product
            Install PTFs
          Step 3: Create an initial configuration
            Configure software license information
            Configure TCP/IP
          Step 4: Verify the installation
          What's next?
          Troubleshoot the installation and initial configuration
          Uninstall WebSphere Application Server
            Clean up product UserData files
        Migration
          Overview
            The WASPreUpgrade script
            The WASPostUpgrade script
          Step 1: Plan your migration
            Deprecated Version 5.1 items
            Migration prerequisites
            API and Specifications for version 3.5.x
          Step 2: Migrate your applications
            Application assembly in WebSphere Application Server - Express
            Migrate Web applications
            Migrate HTTP sessions
            Migrate from wscp to wsadmin
            Migrate applications to use Java keystores
            Migrate Web services
              Migrate Apache SOAP Web services to Web services for J2EE
              Migrate applications developed with Version 5 technology preview
            Migrate applications that use the XML parser for Java
          Step 3: Migrate your server instances
            Migrate from a WebSphere Application Server Version 3.5.6 (or later) instance
            Migrate from a WebSphere Application Server - Express Version 5.0.x instance
          Step 4: Complete the migration
        Administration
          Administrative considerations for preloaded systems
          Create an application server instance
            Delete an application server instance
            Use the crtwasinst script
            Use the dltwasinst script
            Display instance properties
            Enable a user profile to run an application server
            List existing instances
            Update the host name of an instance
            Configure an HTTP server instance
            Configure a Domino Web server instance
          Start and test your application server
            Use the startServer script
            Use a CL command
            Verify that the application server has started
            Use the stopServer script
            Use the serverStatus script
          Configure the application server to run your application
            Configure classloaders
            Administer HTTP transports
              Set custom properties for an HTTP transport
              Configure logging for internal Web server HTTP transport
              Configure access logging for internal Web server HTTP transport
            Administer session tracking
            Manage substitution variables
              Use wsadmin to manage variables
            Administer virtual hosts
              Virtual hosts
              Use the administrative console to administer virtual hosts
              Use wsadmin to administer virtual hosts
            Configure database access
              Administer JDBC providers
                The IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC driver
              Administer data sources
              Administer JDBC providers and data sources with the console
              Use wsadmin to configure a JDBC provider
              Use wsadmin to configure a data source
              Configure connection pooling
            Administer mail resources
            Regenerate the Web server plug-in configuration
              Use the console and wsadmin to update the configuration
              Regenerate the plug-in configuration for remote HTTP
            Configure remote HTTP
              Configure the application server machine for remote HTTP
            Configure security settings for your application server
              Grant authority to an application server
              Revoke authority to an application server
              Encode password data
              Encode passwords in properties files
            Advanced application server settings
              Change application server ports
              Change application server ports with the console and wsadmin
              Manage thread pool settings
              Administer Java virtual machine settings
              Configure name space bindings
              Administer shared libraries
              Administer resource adapters
              Configure Web server plug-ins
                Manually edit the plug-in configuration
                The plugin-cfg.xml file
                Sample plugin-cfg.xml file
              Configure the server for other language environments
              Set JVM custom properties
          Deploy and start an application
            Manage installed applications
            Install and uninstall applications with the adminstrative console
            Install and uninstall applications with wsadmin
            Start and stop applications with the administrative console
            Start and stop applications with wsadmin
            Advanced application configuration
              Administer session tracking
              Map virtual hosts for Web modules
              Configure session tracking for Web modules
              Update applications
              Use hot deployment and dynamic reloading
                Change or add application files
                Change or add WAR files
                Change the HTTP plug-in configuration
              Use the EARExpander script
          Tune performance
            Performance overview
              Performance guidelines
              Performance resources
            Access PMI data with the JMX interface
              Example: JMX administrative client that retrieves PMI data
            Performance tuning guidelines
              Application server tuning parameters
              Queuing network
                Queue configuration tips
              Web services tuning tips
              Performance tips for wsadmin
              Hardware capacity and configuration
              Java virtual machine tuning parameters
                Java memory tuning tips
              Web server tuning parameters
              Database tuning
              TCP/IP buffer sizes
              Application assembly performance checklist
          Backup and recovery
            Backup and recovery of adminstrative configuration
            Backup and recovery of servlets
            Backup and recovery of JSP files
            Backup and recovery of security configuration
            Use the backupConfig script
            Use the restoreConfig script
          Reference
            Administrative tools
            The WebSphere administrative console
              Enable the administrative console
              Start the WebSphere administrative console
              Save configuration changes
              WebSphere administrative console features
              WebSphere administrative console topology reference
              Administer console users and groups
            Qshell scripts
              Configure Qshell to run the scripts
              Qshell environment variables
              Security and Qshell scripts
              Set explicit authorites for startServer and stopServer
            The wsadmin tool
              Run wsadmin
              Syntax and parameters
              Use wsadmin in a secure environment
              Scripting objects
                The AdminControl object
                The AdminConfig object
                The AdminApp object
                The Help object
              Java properties of wsadmin
              Sample wsadmin commands
              Supported scripting languages
            The ws_ant script
              Start ws_ant
              Syntax and parameters
              Ant tasks
            Java Management Extensions
              Customize with JMX
              Customize with JMX MBeans
              J2EE security permissions example
            Product library, directories, and subsystem
            Administrative repository
            Properties files
            Port usage
            User profiles
            Set the time zone
              Supported user.timezone values
            Restricted characters in object names
        Samples and applications
        Application development
          Step 1: Plan
            Application development tools
          Step 2: Design your application
          Step 3: Develop your application
            Classloaders
              Classloader hierarchy
                Java Virtual Machine classloaders
                Java cache for user classloaders
                WebSphere extensions classloader
                Java execution modes
              Class preloading
              Classloaders in applications
              Administer classloaders using the WebSphere administrative console
              Migrate the classloader Module Visibility Mode setting
              Classloader policies
            Servlets
              Servlet lifecycle
              Create a servlet
                ServletSample
                Step 1: Write the servlet
                  Enter the servlet import statements
                  Extend the HTTPServlet class
                  Write the required servlet methods
                  Get the HTTP request information, if any
                  Create the HTTP response
                Step 2: Compile the servlet
                Step 4: Test the servlet
              Application lifecycle listeners and events
              Servlet filtering
              Page lists
                client_types.xml
                Example: Extending PageListServlet
              Automatic request and response encoding
              Enhanced error reporting
              Internal servlets
              Servlet resources
            JavaServer Pages
              What are JavaServer Pages (JSP) files?
              JSP processor
              JSP tag extensions support
              IBM extensions to JSP tags
                tsx:dbconnect
                tsx:userid and tsx:passwd
                tsx:dbquery
                  JSP10employeeRepeatResults.jsp example
                tsx:dbmodify
                tsx:repeat
                tsx:getProperty
              Pre-touch tool for compiling and loading JSP files
              JSP batch compilation
              Disable JSP run-time compilation
              Reduce JSP compile time
            Data access
              Data access overview
                Connection management architecture
                  Connection life cycle
                  Unshareable and shareable connections
                  Connection handles
                  Connections and transactions
                Connection pooling
              Develop data access applications
                Data access development model
                  Looking up data sources with resource references for relational access
                  Isolation level and resource reference
                IBM extensions to the data access API
                Access data with J2EE Connector Architecture connectors
                  Example: Connection factory lookup
                Access connection pools from your components
                IBM data access JavaBeans
                  Data access JavaBeans overview
                  Example: Using WebSphere Application Server Version 4.0 data access beans
                  Example: Using WebSphere Application Server - Express data access beans
                Data access exceptions
                  Connection Wait Timeout Exception
                  Stale Connection Exception
              Assemble data access applications
                Configuring the isolation level on a resource reference
              Configure WebSphere Application Server - Express to access databases
                Configure JDBC data access
                  Create a JDBC provider and data source
                    Available JDBC providers
                  Test the connection
                    Testing a connection with the administrative console
                    Testing a connection using wsadmin
                    Example: Test a connection using testConnection(ConfigID)
                    Example: Test a connection using country and language (properties)
                    Example: Test a connection to a data source
                  Example: Creating a JDBC provider and data source using Java Management Extensions API and the scripting tool
                Configure JCA data access
                  Configuring Java 2 Connector connection factories
                  Installing Java 2 Connector resource adapters
              Deploy data access applications
                Security of lookups
                  Pass user and password on the getConnection call
                  Disable lookup security
            Java Naming and Directory Interface (JNDI)
              JNDI basic concepts
                Naming
                Name space logical view
                Initial context support
                Differences between JNDI and CORBA
                  Example: Set the syntax used to parse name strings
              JNDI implementation
                JNDI caching
                  JNDI cache behavior
                  JNDI cache properties
                  JNDI coding examples
                JNDI helpers and utilities
                  Helper class
                  Namespace dump utility
                  Example: Output from the namespace dump utility
                  Invoke the NameServer MBean to dump namespaces
              Use JNDI
                Obtain the initial JNDI context for the component
                Use JNDI to look up Java components
            JavaMail
              Overview of JavaMail APIs
              Configure JavaMail
                Set up and configure e-mail services
                Configure a JavaMail session using the administrative console
              Write JavaMail applications
                Example: JavaMail code
              Debug JavaMail
            Sessions
              Deciding between session tracking approaches
              Session security
              Best practices for session programming
              Session programming model and environment
                Example: SessionSample.java
              Configure session management
                Configure session tracking for Wireless Application Protocol devices
              Assemble applications to share session data
              Tune session management
                Maximum in-memory session count
                Configure scheduled invalidation
            Bean Scripting Framework
              Example: Convert JavaScript source to the Bean Scripting Framework
              Scenario: Create a Bean Scripting Framework application
            Internationalization
              Overview of internationalization
              Internationalize your application
                Identify localizable text
                Create message catalogs
                Assemble your application code
              Internationalization resources
            Add logging and tracing to your application
              Programming model summary
              Overview of JRas
              Program with the JRas framework
                JRas extensions
                Create JRas resource bundles and message files
                  Develop JRas resource bundles
                Create JRas manager and logger instances
                  Set up for integrated JRas operation
                  Set up for combined JRas operation
                  Set up for standalone JRas operation
              Extending the JRas framework
                Writing User Extensions
                Example: user written handler
                Example: user written formatter
              JRas messages and trace event types
          Step 4: Assemble your application
          Step 5: Deploy your application
        Web services
          Overview
            WSDL
              WSDL architecture
            SOAP with Attachments API for Java (SAAJ)
            Web services architecture
            Web services operations
          Develop
            Develop a J2EE Web service based on an existing application
              Develop a service endpoint interface
              Develop a Web Services Description Language (WSDL) file
              Develop Web service deployment descriptor templates from the WSDL file
              Configure the webservices.xml deployment descriptor
              Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
            Develop a J2EE Web service based on an existing WSDL file
              Develop implementation templates, deployment descriptor templates, and bindings from a WSDL file
              Complete the Java bean or enterprise bean implementation
              Configure the webservices.xml deployment descriptor
              Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
            Develop a Web services client
              Set up a Web services client development environment
              Develop templates and bindings from a WSDL file.
              Configure the webservicesclient.xml deployment descriptor
              Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
            Use HTTP to transport Web services requests
              Configure the endpoint URL information for HTTP bindings
            Web services development artifacts
            Map between Java, WSDL, and XML
            Develop and manage UDDI4J
            Web Services Invocation Framework (WSIF)
              Goals of WSIF
              An overview of WSIF
                WSIF and WSDL
                WSIF architecture
                Using WSIF with Web services that offer multiple bindings
                WSIF usage scenarios
                Dynamic call
              Use WSIF to call Web services
                Pass SOAP messages with attachments using WSIF
                  Writing the WSDL extensions
                  Passing attachments to WSIF
                  Types and type mappings
                Use the WSIF providers
                  Use the Java provider
                  Use the SOAP provider
                Develop a WSIF service
                Use complex types
                Use JNDI
                Interact with the J2EE container
              WSIF system management and administration
              WSIF API
              Troubleshoot WSIF
                Known restrictions
                  WSIF SOAP provider: working with legacy applications
                    Change the default WSIF SOAP provider
                    Modifying Web services to use the IBM Web Service SOAP provider
          Assemble
            Web services assembly properties
            Assemble a WAR file for your Web services application
            Assemble a Web services client
          Deploy
          Configure
            Web services tools
              Web services scripts
                The Java2WSDL script
                The WSDL2Java script
                The wsdeploy script
                The setupWebServiceClientEnv script
              Publish Web Services Description Language files
                With the administrative console
                With wsadmin
                Through a URL
                Multipart Web Services Description Language file best practices
            Configure Web services security
              Overview
                Web services security and WebSphere Application Server
                Architecture
                  Request sender
                  Request receiver
                  Response sender
                  Response receiver
                Web services security and J2EE role-based security
                Securing Web services based on WS-Security
                Token type overview
                  User name tokens
                  Binary security tokens
                  XML tokens
                Sample Web services security configurations
                Default bindings
              Configure authentication
                Overview
                Configure your Web services application
                Configure basic authentication
                  Basic authentication
                  Nonce
                  Configure nonce settings
                  For the client
                  For the server
                Configure identity assertion authentication
                  Identity assertion
                  Identity assertion authentication method
                  Trusted ID evaluator
                  For the client
                  For the server
                Configure digital signature authentication
                  XML digital signature
                  Digital signature authentication method
                  For the client
                  For the server
                Configure LTPA authentication
                  LTPA method
                  Configure the client
                  Configure the server
                  Configure a pluggable token
                    Pluggable token support
                    Generating a pluggable token
                    Validating a pluggable token
              Configure digital signing
                Configure a key locator
                  Key locators
                  Key locator default implementation
                  Develop a key locator
                Configure a collection certificate store
                  Collection certificate store
                Configure trust anchors
                  Trust anchors
                Configure the client for request signing
                Configure the client for response digital signature verification
                Configure the server for request digital signature verification
                Configure the server for response signing
              Configure XML encryption and decryption
                XML encryption
                Configure the client for request encryption
                Configure the client for response decryption
                Configure the server for request decryption
                Configure the server for response encryption
              Configure HTTP basic authentication
                Configure client-side SSL
              Troubleshoot Web services security
                Troubleshooting tips: Web services security
            Configure Web services client bindings
            Configure the scope of a Web service port
          Troubleshoot
            Web services client run time
            Serialization and deserialization
          Resources
        Security
          iSeries security resources
          Securing Web resources with IBM HTTP Server for iSeries
            Using getRemoteUser() and getAuthType() methods
          Securing Web resources with WebSphere security
            Overview
            Developing secured applications
              Develop secure Web applications
                Example: Secure Web application code
              Develop servlet filters for form login processing
                Example: Servlet filters
              Develop form login pages
                Example: Form login
              Develop with JAAS to log in programmatically
                Example: JAAS programmatic login
                Customize a JAAS authentication and login configuration
                Find the root cause login exception
              Develop your own J2C security mapping module
              Develop custom user registries
                Custom user registries
                UserRegistry interface methods
                Example: UserRegistry.java file
                Example: FileRegistrySample.java file
                Example: Groups.props file
                Example: Users.props file
                Example: Results.java file
                Create a classes subdirectory
            Assemble secured applications
              Edit the web.xml file to add security settings
              Add the was.policy file to applications for Java 2 Security
            Deploy secured applications
              Assign users and groups to roles
            Configure WebSphere security
              Configure global security
                Global security
                Configure a user registry
                  Configure the local operating system user registry
                  Configure the LDAP user registry
                    LDAP
                    Supported directory services
                    Using specific directory servers as the LDAP server
                    Using nested groups in user registries
                    Adding users to the LDAP user registry
                    Locating a user's group memberships in LDAP
                    Configure LDAP search filters
                    Dynamic and nested group support
                    Configure dynamic and nested group support for IBM Directory Server
                    Configure dynamic and nested group support for Sun ONE or iPlanet directory server
                  Configure the custom user registry
                Configure the authentication mechanism
                  Authentication mechanism
                  SWAM
                  LTPA
                  Configure LTPA keys
                Configure single signon
                  Prerequisites and conditions
                  Configure single signon and LTPA for WebSphere Application Server - Express
                  Configure single signon for Lotus Domino
                  Verify single signon between WebSphere Application Server and Domino
                  Troubleshooting single signon configurations
                Change the default SSL keystore and truststore files
                Enable global security
              Role-based authorization
              Assign users to administrative roles
              Assign users to naming roles
              Configure trusted mode for the internal HTTP transport
              Configure SSL
                Configure SSL for the browser
                Configure SSL for Web servers
                Configuring IBM HTTP Server for iSeries for SSL client authentication
                Configure SSL for WebSphere Application Server - Express
                  Start the Digital Certificate Manager
                  Create a local certificate authority
                  SSL configuration repertoires
                  The iKeyman utility
                  Configure HTTPS transport for your application server's Web container
                Configure SSL for WebSphere applications
                  Using Java keystore files
                    Configure SSL for java.net.URL HTTPS protocol
                      Example: HTTPS servlet
                    Example: JSSE client servlet
                    Example: JSSE server servlet
                Configure SSL connections to an LDAP server
              Configure Java 2 security
                Java 2 security
                Configure Java 2 policy files
                  Syntax of policy files
                    Create and edit policy files with the policy tool
                  The app.policy file
                  The was.policy file
                  The spi.policy file
                  The library.policy file
                  The filter.policy file
                  The java.policy file
                  The server.policy file
                  Access Control Exception
              Configure JAAS login
              Configure J2C authentication data entries
            Tune security configuration
              General security tuning tips
                Security cache properties
              Tune CSIv2
              Tune LDAP authentication
              Tune Web authentication
              Tune authorization
              SSL performance tips
                Example: Setting custom properties for an HTTP transport
          Run application servers under specific user profiles
            Use iSeries Navigator to enable the user profile to run the application server
          Securing iSeries objects and files
          Password encoding
        Troubleshooting
          Troubleshoot by topic
            Application server startup
            Administration and administrative console
            Enterprise applications
            HTTP plug-in component
            HTTP sessions
            Installation
            Naming service
            Security
              Enabling security
            Starting applications
            Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration (UDDI)
            Web resources
          Detect hung threads
            Adjust the hang detection policy
            Configure the hang detection policy
          Resources for monitoring Application Server
            Monitor with iSeries commands
            Monitor with a message queue
            Verify product prerequisites
              The checkprereqs script
              The prerequisite validator tool
            Check for port conflicts
              The port validator tool
            The servicetools script
            Product history report scripts
            Product version report scripts
          WebSphere Application Server log files
            Java Virtual Machine log files
              Configure the Java Virtual Machine log files
              View the Java Virtual Machine log files
              Interpret the contents for the Java Virtual Machine log files
            Process log files
              Configure the process log files
              View the process log files
            IBM Service log files
              Configure the IBM Service log files
              Collect data for IBM Service
              The showlog script
          Use the WebSphere Application Server trace service
            Enable and disable the trace service
            Interpret the contents of a trace file
            Use wsadmin to configure a trace
            Use wsadmin to turn traces on and off
      WebSphere Application Server - Express V5
        Print this topic
        Overview
          What is WebSphere Application Server - Express?
          Overview of the architecture
          WebSphere Application Server - Express and other WebSphere Application Server products
          Get support for WebSphere Application Server - Express
          Other resources
        Installation
          Overview
          Step 1: Plan the installation and initial configuration
            Time considerations
            Prerequisites
            Obtain the WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries and current fixes
              Verify that the correct cumulative PTF package is installed
          Step 2: Install WebSphere Application Server
            Determine whether or not WebSphere Application Server - Express is preloaded
            Install the WebSphere Express product
            Install the correct cumulative PTF package
            Install PTFs
          Step 3: Create an initial configuration
            Configure software license information
            Configure TCP/IP
          Step 4: Verify the installation
          What's next?
          Troubleshoot the installation and initial configuration
          Uninstall WebSphere Application Server
            Clean up product UserData files
        Migration
          Overview
            The WASPreUpgrade script
            The WASPostUpgrade script
          Step 1: Plan your migration
            Migration prerequisites
            API and Specifications for version 3.5.x
          Step 2: Migrate your applications
            Application assembly in WebSphere Application Server - Express
            Migrate Web applications
            Migrate HTTP sessions
            Migrate from wscp to wsadmin
          Step 3: Migrate your server instances
            Migrate to a new WebSphere Application Server - Express instance
          Step 4: Complete the migration
        Administration
          Administrative considerations for preloaded systems
          Create an application server instance
            Delete an application server instance
            Use the crtwasinst script
            Use the dltwasinst script
            Display instance properties
            Configure an HTTP server instance
            Configure a Domino Web server instance
          Start and test your application server
            Use the startServer script
            Use a CL command
            Verify that the application server has started
            Use the stopServer script
            Use the serverStatus script
          Configure the application server to run your application
            Configure classloaders
            Administer HTTP transports
              Set custom properties for an HTTP transport
              Configure logging for internal Web server HTTP transport
              Configure access logging for internal Web server HTTP transport
            Administer session tracking
            Manage substitution variables
              Use wsadmin to manage variables
            Administer virtual hosts
              Virtual hosts
              Use the administrative console to administer virtual hosts
              Use wsadmin to administer virtual hosts
            Configure database access
              Manage JDBC providers
                The IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC driver
              Manage data sources
              Administer JDBC providers and data sources with the console
              Use wsadmin to configure a JDBC provider
              Use wsadmin to configure a data source
              Configure connection pooling
            Administer mail resources
            Regenerate the Web server plugin configuration
              Use the console and wsadmin to update the configuration
            Configure remote HTTP
            Configure security settings for your application server
              Grant authority to an instance
              Revoke authority to an instance
              Encode password data
              Encode passwords in properties files
            Advanced application server settings
              Change application server ports with the chgwassvr script
              Change application server ports with the console and wsadmin
              Manage thread pool settings
              Administer Java virtual machine settings
              Configure name space bindings
              Administer shared libraries
              Administer resource adapters
              Configure the server for other language environments
          Deploy and start an application
            Manage installed applications
            Install and uninstall applications with the adminstrative console
            Install and uninstall applications with wsadmin
            Start and stop applications with the administrative console
            Start and stop applications with wsadmin
            Advanced application settings
              Administer session tracking
              Map virtual hosts for Web modules
              Configure session tracking for Web modules
              Use the EARExpander script
          Tune performance
            Performance overview
              Performance guidelines
              Performance resources
            Performance tuning guidelines
              Application server tuning parameters
              Queuing network
                Queue configuration tips
              Web services tuning tips
              Performance tips for wsadmin
              Hardware capacity and configuration
              Java virtual machine tuning parameters
                Java memory tuning tips
              Web server tuning parameters
              Database tuning
              TCP/IP buffer sizes
              Application assembly performance checklist
          Backup and recovery
            Backup and recovery of adminstrative configuration
            Backup and recovery of servlets
            Backup and recovery of JSP files
            Backup and recovery of security configuration
            Use the backupConfig script
            Use the restoreConfig script
          Reference
            Administrative tools
            The WebSphere administrative console
              Start the WebSphere administrative console
              Save configuration changes
              WebSphere administrative console features
              WebSphere administrative console topology reference
              Administer console users and groups
            Qshell scripts
              Configure Qshell to run the scripts
              Qshell environment variables
              Security and Qshell scripts
              Set explicit authorites for startServer and stopServer
            The wsadmin tool
              Run wsadmin
              Syntax and parameters
              Use wsadmin in a secure environment
              Scripting objects
                The AdminControl object
                The AdminConfig object
                The AdminApp object
                The Help object
              Java properties of wsadmin
              Sample wsadmin commands
              The Jacl scripting language
            The ws_ant script
              Start ws_ant
              Syntax and parameters
              Ant tasks
            Java Management Extensions
              Customize with JMX
              Customize with JMX MBeans
              J2EE security permissions example
            Product library, directories, and subsystem
            Administrative repository
            Properties files
            Port usage
            User profiles and authorities
            Set the time zone
              Supported user.timezone values
        Samples and applications
        Application development
          Step 1: Plan
            Application development tools
          Step 2: Design your application
          Step 3: Develop your application
            Classloaders
              Classloader hierarchy
                Java Virtual Machine classloaders
                Java cache for user classloaders
                WebSphere extensions classloader
                Java execution modes
              Classloaders in applications
              Administer classloaders using the WebSphere administrative console
              Classloader policies
            Servlets
              Servlet lifecycle
              Create a servlet
                ServletSample
                Step 1: Write the servlet
                  Enter the servlet import statements
                  Extend the HTTPServlet class
                  Write the required servlet methods
                  Get the HTTP request information, if any
                  Create the HTTP response
                Step 2: Compile the servlet
                Step 4: Test the servlet
              Application lifecycle listeners and events
              Servlet filtering
              Page lists
                client_types.xml
                Example: Extending PageListServlet
              Automatic request and response encoding
              Enhanced error reporting
              Internal servlets
              Servlet resources
            JavaServer Pages
              What are JavaServer Pages (JSP) files?
              JSP processor
              JSP tag extensions support
              IBM extensions to JSP tags
                tsx:dbconnect
                tsx:userid and tsx:passwd
                tsx:dbquery
                  JSP10employeeRepeatResults.jsp example
                tsx:dbmodify
                tsx:repeat
                tsx:getProperty
              Pre-touch tool for compiling and loading JSP files
              JSP batch compilation
              Disable JSP run-time compilation
              Reduce JSP compile time
            Data access
              Data access overview
                Connection management architecture
                  Connection life cycle
                  Unshareable and shareable connections
                  Connection handles
                  Connections and transactions
                Connection pooling
              Develop data access applications
                Data access development model
                  Looking up data sources with resource references for relational access
                    Isolation level and resource reference
                IBM extensions to the data access API
                Access data with J2EE Connector Architecture connectors
                  Example: Connection factory lookup
                Access connection pools from your components
                IBM data access JavaBeans
                  Data access JavaBeans overview
                  Example: Using WebSphere Application Server Version 4.0 data access beans
                  Example: Using WebSphere Application Server - Express data access beans
                Data access exceptions
                  Connection Wait Timeout Exception
                  Stale Connection Exception
              Assemble data access applications
                Configuring the isolation level on a resource reference
              Configure WebSphere Application Server - Express to access databases
                Configure JDBC data access
                  Create a JDBC provider and data source
                    Available JDBC providers
                  Test the connection
                    Testing a connection with the administrative console
                    Testing a connection using wsadmin
                    Example: Test a connection using testConnection(ConfigID)
                    Example: Test a connection using country and language (properties)
                    Example: Test a connection to a data source
                  Example: Creating a JDBC provider and data source using Java Management Extensions API and the scripting tool
                Configure JCA data access
                  Configuring Java 2 Connector connection factories
                  Installing Java 2 Connector resource adapters
              Deploy data access applications
                Security of lookups
                  Pass user and password on the getConnection call
                  Disable lookup security
            Java Naming and Directory Interface (JNDI)
              JNDI basic concepts
                Naming
                Name space logical view
                Initial context support
                Differences between JNDI and CORBA
                  Example: Set the syntax used to parse name strings
              JNDI implementation
                JNDI caching
                  JNDI cache behavior
                  JNDI cache properties
                  JNDI coding examples
                JNDI helpers and utilities
                  Helper class
                  Namespace dump utility
                  Example: Output from the namespace dump utility
              Use JNDI
                Obtain the initial JNDI context for the component
                Use JNDI to look up Java components
            JavaMail
              Overview of JavaMail APIs
              Configure JavaMail
                Set up and configure e-mail services
                Configure a JavaMail session using the administrative console
              Write JavaMail applications
              Debug JavaMail
            Sessions
              Deciding between session tracking approaches
              Session security
              Best practices for session programming
              Session programming model and environment
                Example: SessionSample.java
              Configure session management
                Configure session tracking for Wireless Application Protocol devices
              Tune session management
                Maximum in-memory session count
            Bean Scripting Framework
              Example: Convert JavaScript source to the Bean Scripting Framework
              Scenario: Create a Bean Scripting Framework application
            Internationalization
              Overview of internationalization
              Internationalize your application
                Identify localizable text
                Create message catalogs
                Assemble your application code
              Internationalization resources
            Add logging and tracing to your application
              Programming model summary
              Overview of JRas
              Program with the JRas framework
                JRas extensions
                Create JRas resource bundles and message files
                  Develop JRas resource bundles
                Create JRas manager and logger instances
                  Set up for integrated JRas operation
                  Set up for combined JRas operation
                  Set up for standalone JRas operation
              Extending the JRas framework
                Writing User Extensions
                Example: user written handler
                Example: user written formatter
              JRas messages and trace event types
          Step 4: Assemble your application
          Step 5: Deploy your application
        Web services
          Overview
            Web services architecture
            Web services operations
          Migrate Web services
            Migrate Apache SOAP Web services to Web services for J2EE
            Migrate applications developed with Version 5 Web services technology preview
          Develop
            Develop a J2EE Web service based on an existing application
              Develop a service endpoint interface
              Develop a Web Services Description Language (WSDL) file
              Develop Web service deployment descriptor templates from the WSDL file
              Configure the webservices.xml deployment descriptor
              Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
            Develop a J2EE Web service based on an existing WSDL file
              Develop implementation templates, deployment descriptor templates, and bindings from a WSDL file
              Complete the Java bean or enterprise bean implementation
              Configure the webservices.xml deployment descriptor
              Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
            Develop a Web services client
              Set up a Web services client development environment
              Develop templates and bindings from a WSDL file.
              Configure the webservicesclient.xml deployment descriptor
              Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
            Web services development artifacts
            Map between Java, WSDL, and XML
            Develop and manage Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP)
              Build a SOAP client
                Envelope editor
              Deploy programming components as SOAP services
              SOAP examples
              SOAP tools
                SoapEarEnabler tool
                XML-SOAP Admin tool
              Apache SOAP deployment descriptors
              Secure SOAP services
                HTTP authentication
                SOAP signature components
                  Signature Header Handler
                  Verification Header Handler
                SOAP security files reference
            Develop and manage UDDI4J
            Enable Web services to use the Web Services Invocation Framework (WSIF)
              Goals of WSIF
              An overview of WSIF
                WSIF and WSDL
                WSIF architecture
                Using WSIF with Web services that offer multiple bindings
                WSIF usage scenarios
                Dynamic invocation
              Use WSIF to invoke Web services
                Pass SOAP messages with attachments using WSIF
                Use the WSIF providers
                  Use the Java provider
                  Use the SOAP provider
                Develop a WSIF service
                Use complex types
                Use JNDI
                Interact with the J2EE container
              WSIF system management and administration
              WSIF API
          Assemble
            Web services assembly properties
            Assemble a WAR file for your Web services application
            Assemble a Web services client
          Deploy
          Configure
            Web services tools
              Web services scripts
                The Java2WSDL script
                The WSDL2Java script
                The wsdeploy script
                The setupWebServiceClientEnv script
              Publish Web Services Description Language files
                With the administrative console
                With wsadmin
                Through a URL
                Multipart Web Services Description Language file best practices
            Configure Web services security
              Overview
                Web services security and WebSphere Application Server
                Architecture
                Web services security and J2EE role-based security
                Token type overview
                  User name tokens
                  Binary security tokens
                  XML tokens
                Sample Web services security configurations
                Default bindings
              Configure authentication
                Overview
                Configure your Web services application
                Configure basic authentication
                  Basic authentication
                  For the client
                  For the server
                Configure identity assertion authentication
                  Identity assertion
                  Identity assertion authentication method
                  Trusted ID evaluator
                  For the client
                  For the server
                Configure digital signature authentication
                  XML digital signature
                  Digital signature authentication method
                  For the client
                  For the server
                Configure LTPA authentication
                  LTPA method
                  Configure the client
                  Configure the server
                  Configure a pluggable token
                    Pluggable token support
                    Generating a pluggable token
                    Validating a pluggable token
                Configure HTTP basic authentication
                  Edit the HTTP basic authentication and SSL configuration
              Configure digital signing
                Configure a key locator
                  Key locators
                  Key locator default implementation
                  Develop a key locator
                Configure a collection certificate store
                  Collection certificate store
                Configure trust anchors
                  Trust anchors
                Configure the client for request signing
                Configure the client for response digital signature verification
                Configure the server for request digital signature verification
                Configure the srever for response signing
              Configure encryption and decryption
                XML encryption
                Configure the client for request encryption
                Configure the client for response decryption
                Configure the server for request decryption
                Configure the server for response encryption
              Configure client-side SSL
          Resources
        Security
          iSeries security resources
          Securing Web resources with IBM HTTP Server for iSeries
            Using getRemoteUser() and getAuthType() methods
          Securing Web resources with WebSphere security
            Overview
            Developing secured applications
              Develop secure Web applications
                Example: Secure Web application code
              Develop servlet filters for form login processing
                Example: Servlet filters
              Develop form login pages
                Example: Form login
              Develop with JAAS to log in programmatically
                Example: JAAS programmatic login
              Develop your own J2C security mapping module
              Develop custom user registries
                Custom user registries
                UserRegistry interface methods
                Example: UserRegistry.java file
                Example: FileRegistrySample.java file (5.0 and 5.0.1)
                Example: FileRegistrySample.java file (5.0.2 and later)
                Example: Groups.props file
                Example: Users.props file
                Example: Results.java file
              Develop a custom interceptor for trust associations
                Example: Trust association interceptor
            Assemble secured applications
              Edit the web.xml file to add security settings
              Add the was.policy file to applications for Java 2 Security
            Deploy secured applications
              Assign users and groups to roles
            Configure WebSphere security
              Configure global security
                Global security
                Configure a user registry
                  Configure the local operating system user registry
                  Configure the LDAP user registry
                    LDAP
                    Supported directory services
                    Using specific directory servers as the LDAP server
                      Using nested groups in user registries
                    Adding users to the LDAP user registry
                    Configure LDAP search filters
                  Configure the custom user registry
                Configure the authentication mechanism
                  Authentication mechanism
                  SWAM
                  LTPA
                  Configure LTPA keys
                Configure single sign-on
                  Prerequisites and conditions
                  Configure SSO and LTPA for WebSphere Application Server - Express
                  Configure SSO for Lotus Domino
                  Verify SSO between WebSphere Application Server and Domino
                  Troubleshooting single signon configurations
                Configure a trust association interceptor
                  Trust associations
                Change the default SSL keystore and truststore files
                Enable global security
              Assign users to administrative roles
              Assign users to naming roles
              Configure SSL
                Configure SSL for the browser
                Configure SSL for Web servers
                Configuring IBM HTTP Server for iSeries for SSL client authentication
                Configure SSL for WebSphere Application Server - Express
                  Start the Digital Certificate Manager
                  Create a local certificate authority
                  SSL configuration repertoires
                  The iKeyman utility
                  Configure HTTPS transport for your application server's Web container
                Configure SSL for WebSphere applications
                  Using Java keystore files
                    Configure SSL for java.net.URL HTTPS protocol
                      Example: HTTPS servlet
                    Example: JSSE client servlet
                    Example: JSSE server servlet
                  Migrate applications to use Java keystores
                Configure SSL connections to an LDAP server
              Configure Java 2 security
                Java 2 security
                Configure Java 2 policy files
                  Syntax of policy files
                    Create and edit policy files with the policy tool
                  The app.policy file
                  The was.policy file
                  The spi.policy file
                  The library.policy file
                  The filter.policy file
                  The java.policy file
                  The server.policy file
                  Access Control Exception
              Configure JAAS login
              Configure J2C authentication data entries
            Tune security configuration
              General security tuning tips
                Security cache properties
              Tune CSIv2
              Tune LDAP authentication
              Tune Web authentication
              Tune authorization
              SSL performance tips
                Example: Setting custom properties for an HTTP transport
          Run application servers under specific user profiles
            Use iSeries Navigator to enable the user profile to run the application server
          Securing iSeries objects and files
          Password encoding
        Troubleshooting
          Troubleshoot by topic
            Install
            Application Server startup
            Administration and administrative console
            Security
            Naming service
            Access Web resources
            Enterprise applications
            Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration (UDDI)
          Resources for monitoring Application Server
            Monitor with iSeries commands
            Monitor with a message queue
            Verify product prerequisites
              The checkprereqs script
              The prerequisite validator tool
            Check for port conflicts
              The port validator tool
            The servicetools script
            Product history report scripts
            Product version report scripts
          WebSphere Application Server log files
            Java Virtual Machine log files
              Configure the Java Virtual Machine log files
              View the Java Virtual Machine log files
              Interpret the contents for the Java Virtual Machine log files
            Process log files
              Configure the process log files
              View the process log files
            IBM Service log files
              Configure the IBM Service log files
              Collect data for IBM Service
              The showlog script
          Use the WebSphere Application Server
            Enable and disable the trace service
            Interpret the contents of a trace file
            Use wsadmin to configure a trace
            Use wsadmin to turn traces on and off
      Domino
    Business solutions
      IBM Welcome Page V1.1
        What's new for Version 1.1
        Printable PDF
        Overview of IBM Welcome Page V1.1
          Interaction with WebSphere Application Server
          Interaction with HTTP Server for i5/OS
          Interaction with iSeries Directory Server (LDAP)
          Interaction with LDAP on Domino 6.0 for iSeries
          Interaction with a Lotus Sametime server
          Interaction with an Enterprise Identity Mapping server
        Install IBM Business Solutions
          Verify the prerequisites
          Install the applications
          Configure and deploy the applications
            Configure and deploy into a new application server
            Configure and deploy into an existing application server
            Manually configure and deploy into WebSphere Application Server, Network Deployment (ND)
          Verify installation and setup
        Administer IBM Welcome Page V1.1
          Manage server properties
          Manage user entry properties
          Manage group entry properties
          Manage administrator properties
          Manage client certificates
          Manage CA certificates
          Manage EIM server properties
          Manage EIM domain properties
          Manage Sametime server properties
          Manage STLinks properties
        Use IBM Welcome Page V1.1
        Troubleshoot IBM Welcome Page V1.1
      IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
        What's new for Version 5.2
        Printable PDFs
        Overview of IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
          Interaction with WebSphere Application Server
          Interaction with HTTP Server for i5/OS
          Interaction with iSeries Directory Server (LDAP)
          Interaction with LDAP on Domino 6.0 for iSeries
          Interaction with a Lotus Sametime server
          Interaction with an Enterprise Identity Mapping server
          Using the same directory for IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 and Lotus Sametime
        Install IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
        Administer IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
          Add an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
          Add multiple entries from an i5/OS system registry
          Add multiple entries using an .ldif file
          Update an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
          Delete an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
          Change password of an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
          Modify directory access
          Modify enrollment properties of the application
          Allow users to update and delete entries
          Modify maximum search size of entries
          Modify maximum search time
          Modify maximum photo size
          Set up EIM registration and identity mapping
          Set up Sametime chat links (STLinks) support
          Set up Sametime presence list support
        Use IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
          Search for an entry
            Using the wildcard character (*)
            More on searching by name
            Advanced search
            Viewing the results
          Add an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
            How to enter new entry information
            How to enter listing information
          Update an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
          Delete an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
          Change your password using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
          Add an entry to your Sametime presence list
          Start a Sametime chat with an entry
          Manage your EIM registries
          Work with additional functions
        Troubleshoot IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
        Notices and limitations
      IBM Survey Creator V1.0
        What's new for Version V1.0
        Printable PDF
        Overview of IBM Survey Creator V1.0
          Interaction with WebSphere Application Server
          Interaction with HTTP Server for i5/OS
          Interaction with iSeries Directory Server (LDAP)
          Interaction with LDAP on Domino 6.0 for iSeries
          Interaction with a DB2 UDB for iSeries
          Survey authentication process
          Survey authorization process
        Install IBM Survey Creator V1.0
        IBM Survey Creator administrator pages
          Add survey owners
          Remove survey owners
        IBM Survey Creator V1.0 owner pages
          Create a survey
          Types of survey questions
            Add a question
            Update a question
            Remove a question
          Preview a survey
          Update a survey
          Survey results
          Remove a survey
          Define which users can or can not take a survey
          Survey URL usage for survey takers
        Take a survey using IBM Survey Creator V1.0
        Troubleshoot IBM Survey Creator V1.0
    B2B and B2C
      WebSphere Commerce Business Edition
      WebSphere Commerce Suite, Pro Edition
      WebSphere Commerce Payments
    Business process integration
      WebSphere Business Integration Adapters
      WebSphere Business Integration Message Broker
    Collaboration
      Domino
      QuickPlace
      Sametime
      WebSphere Personalization
      WebSphere Portal
    Connecting to the Internet
    Development tools
      iSeries Access for Web
      WebSphere Development Studio
      WebSphere Development Studio Client
      WebSphere Host Publisher
      WebSphere Studio Site Developer
    e-business enablers
      Content Manager OnDemand
      DB2 XML Extender Administration and Programming
      Lotus Workflow
      Lotus Enterprise Integrator
      WebSphere Host Integration Solution
      WebSphere MQ
    Pervasive computing
      WebSphere MQ Everyplace
      WebSphere Transcoding Publisher
    Programming
      Easy400
      Java
      Net.Data
      XML Toolkit for IBM System i5
        What's new in XML Toolkit for System i5
        Printable PDF
        XML introduction
          Advantages of XML
          Uses of XML
          XML standards and extensions
        XSL introduction
          Uses of XSL
        XML Scripting for IBM System i5 introduction
        XML Toolkit introduction
          Available XML Toolkit components
          Installation
          API documentation
          Samples
        Getting support
        Related information for XML Toolkit for IBM System i5
    Security and Directory Server
      IBM Directory Server for iSeries (LDAP)
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Directory Server concepts
          Directories
          Distinguished names (DNs)
          Suffix (naming context)
          Schema
            IBM Directory Server schema
            Common schema support
            Object classes
            Attributes
              Common subschema elements
              The objectclass attribute
              The attributetypes attribute
              The IBMAttributeTypes attribute
              Matching rules
              Indexing rules
                Indexing rules specifications for attributes
              Attribute syntax
            Object identifier (OID)
            The subschema entries
            The IBMsubschema object class
            Schema queries
            Dynamic schema
            Disallowed schema changes
            Schema checking
            iPlanet compatibility
            Generalized and UTC time
          Recommended practices for directory structure
          Publishing
          Replication
            Replication overview
            Replication terminology
            Replication agreements
            How replication information is stored in the server
            Security considerations for replication information
            Replication in a high availability environment
          Realms and user templates
          Search parameters
          National language support (NLS) considerations
          Language tags
          LDAP directory referrals
          Transactions
          Directory Server security
            Auditing
            Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) with the Directory Server
            Kerberos authentication with the Directory Server
            Groups and roles
              Static groups
              Dynamic groups
              Nested groups
              Hybrid groups
              Determining group membership
              Group object classes for nested and dynamic groups
              Group attribute types
              Roles
            Administrative access
            Proxy authorization
            Access control lists
              Filtered access control lists
              The access control attribute syntax
              EntryOwner
              Propagation
              Access evaluation
              Subtree replication considerations
              Example of defining the ACIs and entry owners
              Example of changing the ACI and entry owner values
              Example of deleting the ACI and entry owner values
              Example of retrieving the ACI and entry owner values
            Ownership of LDAP directory objects
            Password policy
            Password policy tips
            Authentication
            Denial of service
          Operating system projected backend
            User projected directory information tree
            LDAP operations
            Administrator and replica bind DNs
            User projected schema
            Read access to projected users
          Directory Server and i5/OS journaling support
          Unique attributes
          Operational attributes
          Server caches
            Attribute cache
            Filter cache
            Entry cache
            ACL cache
          Controls and extended operations
          Save and restore considerations
        Getting started with Directory Server
          Migration considerations
            Migrating to V5R4 from V5R3 or V5R2
            Migrating data from V4R4 ,V4R5, or V5R1 to V5R4
              Upgrading from V4R4, V4R5, or V5R1 to an interim release
              Saving the database library and installing V5R4
            Migrating a network of replicating servers
            Kerberos service name change
          Planning your Directory Server
          Configuring the Directory Server
          Populating the directory
          Web administration
            Set up Web administration for the first time
            Web administration tool
        Scenarios
          Scenario: Setting up a Directory Server
          Scenario: Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
        Administering Directory Server
          General administration tasks
            Starting the Directory Server
            Stopping the Directory Server
            Checking the status of the Directory Server
            Checking jobs on the Directory Server
            Managing server connections
            Managing connection properties
            Enabling event notification
            Specifying transaction settings
            Changing the port or IP address
            Specifying a server for directory referrals
            Adding and removing Directory Server suffixes
            Granting administrator access to projected users
            Enabling language tags
            Tracking access and changes to the LDAP directory
            Enabling object auditing for the Directory Server
            Adjusting search settings
            Enabling or disabling read access to projected users
            Publishing information to the Directory Server
            Importing an LDIF file
            Exporting an LDIF file
            Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
          Administrative group tasks
            Enabling the administrative group
            Adding, editing, and removing administrative group members
          Search limit group tasks
            Creating a search limit group
            Changing a search limit group
            Copying a search limit group
            Removing a search limit group
          Proxy authorization group tasks
            Creating a proxy authorization group
            Changing a proxy authorization group
            Copying a proxy authorization group
            Removing a proxy authorization group
          Unique attribute tasks
            Determining if an attribute can be specified as unique
            Creating a unique attributes list
            Removing an entry from the unique attributes list
          Performance tasks
            Setting database connections and cache settings
            Configuring attribute cache
            Configuring transaction settings
          Replication tasks
            Creating a master-replica topology
            Creating a master-forwarder-replica topology
            Creating a master server (replicated subtree)
            Creating a new replica server
            Creating replication credentials
            Creating a replica server
            Coping data to the replica
            Adding supplier information to the new replica
            Creating a complex replication topology
            Creating a complex topology with peer replication
            Promoting a server to be a peer
            Setting up a gateway topology
            Changing replication properties
            Adding supplier information
            Editing supplier information
            Removing supplier information
            Creating replication schedules
            Creating a daily replication schedule
            Managing replication queues
            Setting up replication over a secure connection
          Topology tasks
            Viewing the topology
            Adding a replica
            Editing an agreement
            Moving or promoting a server
            Demoting a master
            Replicating a subtree
            Editing a subtree
            Removing a subtree
            Quiescing the subtree
            Editing access control lists
          Security property tasks
            Password tasks
              Setting password policy properties
              Setting password lockout properties
              Setting password validation properties
              Viewing password policy attributes
              Overriding password policy attributes
            Enabling SSL and Transport Layer Security on the Directory Server
            Enabling Kerberos authentication on the Directory Server
            Configuring DIGEST-MD5 authentication on the Directory Server
          Schema tasks
            Viewing object classes
            Adding an object class
            Editing an object class
            Copying an object class
            Deleting an object class
            Viewing attributes
            Adding an attribute
            Editing an attribute
            Copying an attribute
            Deleting an attribute
            Copying the schema to other servers
          Directory entry tasks
            Browsing the directory tree
            Adding an entry
            Adding an entry containing attributes with language tags
            Deleteing an entry
            Editing an entry
            Copying an entry
            Editing access control lists
            Adding an auxiliary object class
            Deleting an auxiliary class
            Changing group membership
            Searching the directory entries
            Changing binary attributes
          User and group tasks
            User tasks
              Adding users
              Finding users within the realm
              Editing a user's information
              Copying a user
              Removing a user
            Group tasks
              Adding groups
              Finding groups within the realm
              Editing a group's information
              Copying a group
              Removing a group
          Realm and user template tasks
            Creating a realm
            Creating a realm administrator
            Creating a template
            Adding the template to a realm
            Creating groups
            Adding a user to the realm
            Realm tasks
              Adding a realm
              Editing a realm
              Removing a realm
              Editing ACLs on the realm
            Template tasks
              Adding a user template
              Editing a template
              Removing a template
              Editing ACLs on the template
          Access control list (ACL) tasks
            Viewing access rights for a specific effective ACL
            Viewing effective owners
            Adding , editing. and removing nonfiltered ACLs
            Adding , editing. and removing filtered ACLs
            Adding or removing owners
        Reference
          Command line utilities
            ldapmodify and ldapadd
            ldapdelete
            ldapexop
            ldapmodrdn
            ldapsearch
            ldapchangepwd
            ldapdiff
            Using SSL with the LDAP command line utilities
          LDAP data interchange format (LDIF)
            Example: LDIF
            Version 1 LDIF support
            Examples: Version 1 LDIF
          Directory Server configuration schema
            Directory information tree
            Attributes
          Object identifiers (OIDs)
          IBM Tivoli Directory Server equivalence
          Default configuration for Directory Server
        Troubleshooting Directory Server
          Monitoring errors and access with the Directory Server job log
          Using TRCTCPAPP to help find problems
          Using the LDAP_OPT_DEBUG option to trace errors
          GLEnnnn message identifiers
          Common LDAP client errors
            ldap_search: Timelimit exceeded
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Operations error
            ldap_bind: No such object
            ldap_bind: Inappropriate authentication
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Insufficient access
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Cannot contact LDAP server
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Failed to connect to SSL server
          Password policy-related errors
          Troubleshooting the QGLDCPYVL API
        Related information
      Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Enterprise Identity Mapping overview
        Enterprise Identity Mapping concepts
          EIM domain controller
          EIM domain
          EIM identifier
          EIM registry definitions
            System registry definitions
            Application registry definitions
            Group registry definitions
          EIM associations
            Lookup information
            Identifier associations
            Policy associations
              Default domain policy associations
              Default registry policy associations
              Certificate filter policy associations
                Certificate filters
          EIM lookup operations
            Lookup operation examples: Example 1
            Lookup operation examples: Example 2
            Lookup operation examples: Example 3
            Lookup operation examples: Example 4
            Lookup operation examples: Example 5
          EIM mapping policy support and enablement
          EIM access control
            EIM access control group: API authority
            EIM access control group: EIM task authority
          LDAP concepts for EIM
            Distinguished name
            Parent distinguished name
            LDAP schema and other considerations for EIM
          Enterprise Identity Mapping concepts
            i5/OS user profile considerations for EIM
            i5/OS auditing for EIM
            EIM enabled applications for i5/OS
        Enterprise Identity Mapping scenarios
        Planning for Enterprise Identity Mapping
          Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for eServer
            Enterprise Identity Mapping setup requirements for eServer
            Identifying needed skills and roles
            Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain
            Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain controller
            Developing an Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definition naming plan
            Developing an identity mapping plan
              Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping associations
              Developing an EIM identifier naming plan
            Enterprise Identity Mapping implementation planning worksheets
            Planning for Enterprise Identity mapping application development
          Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for i5/OS
            EIM installation prerequisites for System i
            Installing required iSeries Navigator options
            Backup and recovery considerations for EIM
        Configuring Enterprise Identity Mapping
          Creating and joining a new local domain
          Creating and joining a new remote domain
          Joining an existing domain
          Configuring a secure connection to the EIM domain controller
        Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping
          Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping domains
            Adding an EIM domain to the Domain Management folder
            Connecting to an EIM domain
            Enabling policy associations for a domain
            Testing EIM mappings
            Removing an EIM domain from the Domain Management folder
            Deleting an EIM domain and all configuration objects
          Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definitions
            Adding a system registry definition
            Adding an application registry definition
            Adding a group registry definition
            Adding an alias to a registry definition
            Defining a private user registry type in EIM
            Enabling mapping lookup support and the use of policy associations for a target registry
            Deleting a registry definition
            Removing an alias from a registry definition
            Adding a member to a group registry definition
          Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping identifiers
            Creating an EIM identifier
            Adding an alias to an EIM identifier
            Removing an alias from an EIM identifier
            Deleting an EIM identifier
            Customizing the EIM identifiers view
          Managing EIM associations
            Creating EIM associations
              Creating EIM identifier association
              Creating a policy association
                Creating a default domain policy association
                Creating a default registry policy association
                Creating a certificate filter policy association
            Adding lookup information to a target user identity
            Removing lookup information from a target user identity
            Displaying all identifier associations for an EIM identifier
            Displaying all policy associations for a domain
            Displaying all policy associations for a registry definition
            Deleting an identifier association
            Deleting a policy association
          Managing EIM user access control
          Managing EIM configuration properties
        Troubleshooting Enterprise Identity Mapping
          Troubleshooting domain controller connection problems
          Troubleshooting general EIM configuration and domain problems
          Troubleshooting EIM mapping problems
        Enterprise Identity Mapping APIs
        Related information for Enterprise Identity Mapping
    HTTP Server
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Concepts
        Web Administration
        Context, directives, and the server area
        Content negotiation
        Virtual hosts
        Proxy server types
        Log formats
        Security tips
        Validation lists
        Kerberos
        User profiles and required authorities
        File compression
        Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
        Web Publishing with the PUT Method
        WebDAV
        Real time server statistics
        Highly available Web server cluster
        Web crawling
        Webserver search engine
        Triggered cache manager (TCM)
        Trigger messages
        ASF Jakarta Tomcat server
        WebSphere Application Server
      Scenarios
        Setting up HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
        Adding a new directory
        Adding user directories
        Adding cookie tracking
        Adding virtual hosts
        Adding password protection
        Adding dynamic content with server-side includes
        Adding Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protection
        Enabling single signon for HTTP Server
        Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process JSP file
        Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process Java servlet
        Setting up ASF Tomcat in-process War file
        Monitoring Web server activity with logs
      Tasks
        Getting started
        Installing and testing
        HTTP Server tasks
          Setting up additional MIME types
          Setting up content and language negotiation
          Setting up customized error messages
          Setting up directory indexing and directory listing
          Setting up environment variables
          Setting up highly available Web server cluster
          Setting up a cluster with CL commands
          Setting up welcome or index page
          Manually editing HTTP Server
          Managing HTTP Servers
          Managing addresses and ports
          Managing backup files
          Managing directories
          Managing a highly available server
          Managing ports for ADMIN server
          Managing server performance
        Compression tasks
          Setting up input decompression
          Setting up output compression
        FRCA tasks
          Setting up Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
        Log tasks
          Setting up logs
        Proxy tasks
          Setting up forward proxy
          Setting up reverse proxy
          Set up proxy chaining
        Search tasks
          Managing document lists
          Setting up thesaurus dictionary
          Managing thesaurus dictionary
          Managing search indexes
          Setting up document list
          Setting up options objects
          Managing Web crawlers
          Setting up URL mapping rules file
          Setting up URL object
          Setting up Webserver search engine
          Setting up validation lists
        Security tasks
          Setting up password protection
          Setting up SSL for ADMIN server
          Setting up to secure against denial of service
        Tomcat tasks
          Managin ASF Tomcat servers
          Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process JSP files
          Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process Java servlets
          Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process WAR files
        Triggered cache manager tasks
          Setting up triggered cache manager (TCM)
        WebDAV tasks
          Setting up WebDAV
        Web tasks
          Managing WebSphere Application Server
          Web Performance Monitor
          Web Performance Advisor
          Configure SSL for ADMIN wizard
          WebSphere Portal
        Virtual host tasks
          Setting up virtual hosts
      Programming
        API
          HTTP Server APIs
        Directives
        CGI
          Overview of CGI
          Environment variables
          Overview of High Availability CGI
          Guidelines for writing high availability CGIs
          Overview of Persistent CGI
          Common gateway interface (CGI)
          The CGI Process
          CGI Program Interface
          CGI Programs and Activation Groups
          Setting up CGI programs
          CGI in PASE
          How to enable the server to run CGI programs
          Troubleshooting your CGI programs
        Apache APR and APIs
        Regular expression notation
        Setting up third party modules
        Handlers
        Net.Data programs
        Java servlets and JSPs
      Troubleshooting
      Reference
        CL commands
        Environment variables
        Lotus Domino plug-in
        Server-side include commands
        Supported i5/OS file systems for Web content
        Time formats
      Related information
      Legal
  Files and file systems
    Database file management
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Overview of database file management
        File types
      Working with database files
        File resources allocation
          File resource allocation: Overview
          File resources that must be allocated
          How the system allocates resources
        Copying files
          Copying files: Overview
            Copying files: Commands
            Copying files: Supported functions
            Copying files: Basic functions
              File types and copying
              Record sequence and copying
              Resending copy file completion message
              Monitoring for copy errors
              Monitoring for zero records in the from-file
              Creating a duplicate to-file member
              CPYFRMQRYF command support for CCSIDs
              CPYSRCF command support for CCSIDs
              Copy commands support for null values
          Copying physical or logical files
          Creating the to-file (CRTFILE parameter)
            Specifying CRTFILE(*YES) on either the CPYF or CPYFRMQRYF command
            Authorities, user profiles, and file capabilities of the to-file
          Adding, replacing, and updating records (MBROPT parameter)
            Specifying *REPLACE when copying files
            Specifying *ADD when copying files
            Specifying *UPDADD when copying files
            Copying records into files that use trigger programs
          Selecting the records to copy
            Selecting records using a specified record format name (RCDFMT parameter)
            Selecting records by relative record numbers (FROMRCD and TORCD parameters)
            Selecting records by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY parameters)
              Key string comparisons made by the copy operation
              Example: build-key function
              Example: using FROMKEY and TOKEY
              Variable-length fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
              Date, time, and timestamp fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
              Null-capable fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
              Different CCSIDs used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
              DBCS-graphic fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
            Selecting a specified number of records (NBRRCDS parameter)
            Selecting records based on character content (INCCHAR parameter)
              Variable-length fields used by the INCCHAR parameter
              Null-capable fields used by the INCCHAR parameter
              Different CCSIDs used by the INCCHAR parameter
              DBCS-graphic fields used by the INCCHAR parameter
            Selecting records based on field value (INCREL parameter)
              Variable-length fields used by the INCREL parameter
              Date, time, and timestamp fields used by the INCREL parameter
              Null-capable fields used by the INCREL parameter
              Different CCSIDs used by the INCREL parameter
              DBCS-graphic fields used by the INCREL parameter
            Copying deleted records (COMPRESS parameter)
              Requirements of COMPRESS(*NO) parameter and the CPYF command
              Restrictions of the COMPRESS(*NO) parameter and the CPYF command
              Details of the COMPRESS(*NO) parameter and the CPYF command
          Printing records (PRINT, OUTFMT, and TOFILE(*PRINT) parameters)
            Creating an unformatted print listing
          Selecting members to copy
            Copying file members: Overview
            Allowed copy operations and parameters
            Copying all members within a file
            Copying only certain members within a file
            Specifying the member name for the copy operation
            Special considerations for the Override Database File (OVRDBF) and Override Tape File (OVRTAPF) commands
            How the copy function adds members to the to-file
          Copying between different database record formats (FMTOPT parameter)
            Specifying data for different field types and attributes
              Mapping variable-length fields to fixed-length fields
              Map fixed-length fields to variable-length fields
              Date, time, and timestamp fields using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
              Null-capable fields using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
              CCSIDs using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
              DBCS-graphic fields using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
            Converting universal coded character set (UCS-2) graphic fields
              UCS-2 graphic fields restrictions
            Converting universal coded character set transformation format (UTF-8 character and UTF-16 graphic)
            Converting System/370 floating-point and null fields
              Errors in converting System/370 floating-point and null fields
            Conversion rules for copying files
          Adding or changing source file sequence number and date fields (SRCOPT and SRCSEQ parameters)
            Copying device source files to database source files
            Copying database source files to device source files
            Copying database source files to database source files
          Copying complex objects
            Copying files that contain user-defined functions
            Copying files that contain user-defined types
            Copying files that contain datalinks
            Copying files that contain large objects
            Copying files that contain identity columns or ROWID attributes
          Copying between different systems
            Using the Copy From Import File (CPYFRMIMPF) command to copy between different systems
              Notes on the CPYFRMIMPF command
              Restrictions on the CPYFRMIMPF command
              Importing data to the System i platform when the from-file is a database file or DDM file
              Importing data to the System i platform when the import file is a stream file
              Parallel data loader support to use with the CPYFRMIMPF command
              Handling data from the import file
              Notes on the delimited import file (CPYFRMIMPF command)
              Fixed formatted import file
              Improving the performance of the CPYFRMIMPF command
            Using the Copy To Import File (CPYTOIMPF) command to copy between different systems
              Notes on the CPYTOIMPF command
              Restrictions for the CPYTOIMPF command
              Notes on the delimited import file (CPYTOIMPF command)
              Copying data to the import file in a fixed format (CPYTOIMPF command)
        Opened files
          Scope of opened files
          Opening files using temporary file descriptions
          Open considerations when using *LIBL with a DDM file
          Detection of file description changes
          Displaying information about open files
          Monitoring file status with the open and I/O feedback area
        Shared files
          Open considerations for files shared in a job
          I/O considerations for files shared in a job
          Close considerations for files shared in a job
        Overrides
          Overview: Overrides
            Benefits of using overrides
            Summary of the override commands
            Effect of overrides on some commands
            Usage of overrides in multithreaded jobs
          Application of overrides
            Override of file attributes
            Override of file names
            Override of file names and file attributes
            Override of the scope of an open file
            How the system processes overrides
              Process priority of overrides
              How the system processes overrides: scenario
              Process overrides: General principles
            Scenario: Effect of exits on overrides
            Scenario: Effect of TFRCTL on overrides
            Scenario: Overrides to the same file at the same call level
            CL program overrides
            Securing files against overrides
            Usage of a generic override for printer files
              Example: Apply OVRPRTF with *PRTF
              Example: Applying OVRPRTF with *PRTF from multiple call levels
            Application of overrides when compiling a program
          Deletion of overrides
          Display of overrides
            Example: Displaying all overrides for a specific activation group
            Example: Displaying merged file overrides for one file
            Example: Displaying all file overrides for one file
            Example: Displaying merged file overrides for all files
            Example: Displaying overrides with WRKJOB
            Example: Displaying overrides
            Tips about displaying overrides
          File redirection
            Plans for redirecting files
            Tips about redirecting files
            Default actions for redirected files
      Performance
        Avoiding keyed sequence access paths
        Specifying fewer parameters
        Checking record format level identifiers
        Preventing errors when copying files
          Limitation of recoverable errors during copy
          Prevention of date, time, and timestamp errors when copying files
            Mapping considerations using the Copy command
          Prevention of position errors when copying files
          Prevention of allocation errors when copying files
            Reasons for allocation errors when copying files
          Prevention of copy errors that result from constraint relationships
          Copy operation on files not in check-pending status
          Copy operation on files in check-pending status
          Prevention of copy errors related to your authority to files
      Security
        Object authority
          Object operational authority
          Object existence authority
          Object management authority
          Object reference authority
          Object alter authority
        Data authorities
        Authorities required for file operations
        Limitation of access to files and data when creating files
      Troubleshooting database file management
        File error detection and handling by the system
        Messages and message monitors in files by the system
        Major and minor return codes in files by the system
        Recovery from file system errors
          Normal completion of errors by the system
          Completion with exceptions of errors by the system
          Permanent system or file error
          Permanent device or session error on I/O operation
          Device or session error on open or acquire operation
          Recoverable device or session errors on I/O operation
      Reference
        Double-byte character set support
          Double-byte character set fundamentals
            DBCS code scheme
            Shift-control double-byte characters
            Invalid double-byte code and undefined double-byte code
            Usage of double-byte data
              Where you can use double-byte data
              Where you cannot use double-byte data
            Double-byte character size
          Process of double-byte characters
            Basic double-byte characters
            Extended double-byte characters
            What happens when extended double-byte characters are not processed
          DBCS device file support
            What a DBCS file is
            When to indicate a DBCS file
            How to indicate a DBCS file
            Improperly indicated DBCS files
              Making printer files capable of DBCS
          DBCS display support
            Inserting shift-control double-byte characters
            Number of displayed extended double-byte characters
            Number of DBCS input fields on a display
            Effects of displaying double-byte data at alphanumeric workstations
          Copy operation of DBCS files
            Copy operation of spooled DBCS files
            Copy operation of nonspooled DBCS files
          Application program considerations for DBCS
            Design of application programs that process double-byte data
            Changing alphanumeric application programs to DBCS application programs
          DBCS font tables
            Commands for DBCS font tables
            Finding out if a DBCS font table exists
            Copying a DBCS font table onto tape or diskette
              When to copy a DBCS table onto tape or diskette
              How to copy a DBCS table onto tape or diskette
            Copying a DBCS font table from tape or diskette
              How to copy a DBCS table from a tape or diskette
            Deleting a DBCS font table
              When to delete a DBCS font table
              How to delete a DBCS font table
            Starting the character generator utility for DBCS font tables
            Copying user-defined double-byte characters
          DBCS font files
          DBCS sort tables
            Commands for DBCS sort tables
            Using DBCS sort tables on the system
            Finding out if a DBCS sort table exists
            Saving a DBCS sort table onto tape or diskette
            Restoring a DBCS sort table from tape or diskette
            Copying a Japanese DBCS master sort table to a data file
              When to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table to a data file
              How to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table to a data file
            Copying a Japanese DBCS master sort table from a data file
              When to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table from a data file
              How to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table from a data file
            Deleting a DBCS sort table
              When to delete a DBCS sort table
              How to delete a DBCS sort table
          DBCS conversion dictionaries
            System-supplied dictionary (for Japanese use only) for DBCS
            User-created dictionary for DBCS
            Commands for DBCS conversion dictionaries
              Creating a DBCS conversion dictionary
              Editing a DBCS conversion dictionary
                Requirements for a DBCS conversion dictionary
                DBCS conversion dictionary operations
                Displays used for editing a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Working with DBCS conversion dictionary display
                  Edit Related Words display for a DBCS conversion dictionary
                Examples of editing operations for a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Beginning to edit a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Adding the first entries in a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Moving a related word in a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Deleting an entry in a DBCS conversion dictionary
                  Ending the editing process in a DBCS conversion dictionary
                Suggestions for editing a DBCS conversion dictionary
            Displaying and printing the DBCS conversion dictionary
            Deleting a DBCS conversion dictionary
          DBCS conversion (for Japanese use only)
            Where you can use DBCS conversion
            How DBCS conversion works
            Usage of DBCS conversion
            Performing DBCS conversion
              Examples of DBCS Conversion
                Converting one alphanumeric entry to a double-byte entry
                Converting many alphanumeric entries at one time to DBCS
                Converting alphanumeric blanks to DBCS blanks
                Changing alphanumeric entries or conversion code to DBCS
                Using DBCS conversion to enter words in the DBCS conversion dictionary
              Considerations for using DBCS conversion
        Feedback area layouts
          Open feedback area
            Device definition list
            Volume label fields
          I/O feedback area
            Common I/O feedback area
            I/O feedback area for ICF and display files
            I/O feedback area for printer files
            I/O feedback area for database files
            Get attributes feedback area
      Related information for database file management
    Integrated file system
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Overview of the integrated file system
        What the integrated file system is
        Why use the integrated file system
      Integrated file system concepts
        Directory
          Current directory
          Home directory
          Provided directories
          *TYPE2 directories
        Link
          Hard link
          Symbolic link
        Path name
        Stream file
        Name continuity
        Extended attributes
        Scanning support
          Examples: Scanning for viruses and files being opened
          Related system values
          Scanning occurrences
            Object change
            Signature change
            Different CCSID
            During save operation
            Object integrity check
      File systems
        File system comparison
        "root" (/) file system
          Case-sensitivity in the "root" (/) file system
          Path names in the "root" (/) file system
          Links in the "root" (/) file system
          Integrated file system commands in the "root" (/) file system
          Integrated file system APIs in the "root" (/) file system
          Object changes journaling in the "root" (/) file system
          UDP and TCP devices in the "root" (/) file system
        Open systems file system (QOpenSys)
          Case-sensitivity in the QOpenSys file system
          Path names in the QOpenSys file system
          Links in the QOpenSys file system
          Integrated file system commands and displays in the QOpenSys file system
          Integrated file system APIs in the QOpenSys file system
          Object changes journaling in the QOpenSys file system
        User-defined file systems (UDFSs)
          Case-sensitivity in an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Path names in an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Links in an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Integrated file system commands in a user-defined file system
          Integrated file system APIs in a user-defined file system
          Graphical user interface for a user-defined file system
          Creating an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Deleting an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Displaying an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Mounting an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Unmounting an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Saving and restoring an integrated file system user-defined file system
          Object changes journaling in a user-defined file system
          User-defined file system and independent auxiliary storage pools
        Library file system (QSYS.LIB)
          QPWFSERVER authorization list in the QSYS.LIB file system
          File-handling restrictions in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Support for user spaces in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Support for save files in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Case-sensitivity in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Path names in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Links in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Integrated file system commands and displays in the QSYS.LIB file system
          Integrated file system APIs in the QSYS.LIB file system
        Independent ASP QSYS.LIB
          QPWFSERVER authorization list in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          File handling restrictions in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Support for user spaces in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Support for save files in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Case-sensitivity in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Path names in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Links in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Integrated file system commands and displays in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
          Integrated file system APIs in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
        Document library services file system (QDLS)
          Integrated file system and HFS in the QDLS file system
          User enrollment in the QDLS file system
          Case-sensitivity in the QDLS file system
          Path names in the QDLS file system
          Links in the QDLS file system
          Integrated file system commands and displays in the QDLS file system
          Integrated file system APIs in the QDLS file system
        Optical file system (QOPT)
          Integrated file system and HFS in the QOPT file system
          Case-sensitivity in the QOPT file system
          Path names in the QOPT file system
          Links in the QOPT file system
          Integrated file system commands and displays in the QOPT file system
          Integrated file system APIs in the QOPT file system
        NetWare file system (QNetWare)
          Authorities and ownership in the QNetWare file system
          Audition in the QNetWare file system
          Files and directories in the QNetWare file system
          NetWare Directory Services objects in the QNetWare file system
          Links in the QNetWare file system
          Integrated file system commands and displays in the QNetWare file system
          Integrated file system APIs in the QNetWare file system
        iSeries NetClient file system (QNTC)
          Authorities and ownership in the QNTC file system
          Case-sensitivity in the QNTC file system
          Path names in the QNTC file system
          Links in the QNTC file system
          Integrated file system commands and displays in the QNTC file system
          QNTC environment variables
          Creating directories in the QNTC file system
          Integrated file system APIs in the QNTC file system
          Enabling QNTC file system for Network Authentication Service
        i5/OS file server file system (QFileSvr.400)
          Case-sensitivity in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Path names in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Communications in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Security and object authority in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Links in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Integrated file system commands and displays in the QFileSvr.400 file system
          Integrated file system APIs in the QFileSvr.400 file system
        Network File System (NFS)
          Characteristics of the Network File System
          Variations of servers and clients in the Network File System
          Links in the Network File System
          Integrated file system commands in the Network File System
          Integrated file system APIs in the Network File System
      Accessing the integrated file system
        Accessing using menus and displays
        Accessing using CL commands
          Path name rules for CL commands and displays
          Working with output of the RTVDIRINF and PRTDIRINF commands
            Accessing the data of RTVDIRINF
            Using the data of RTVDIRINF
        Accessing using APIs
        Accessing using iSeries Navigator
        Accessing using iSeries NetServer
        Accessing using File Transfer Protocol
        Accessing using a PC
      Converting directories from *TYPE1 to *TYPE2
        Overview of *TYPE1 to *TYPE2 conversion
        Conversion considerations
          Conversion status determination
          User profiles creation
          Objects renamed
            Combined characters
            Surrogate characters
          User profile considerations
            Changing maximum storage for a user profile
            Changing the owner of a directory
          Auxiliary storage requirements
          Tips: Symbolic link
          Tips: Independent ASP
          Tips: Saving and restoring
          Tips: Reclaiming integrated file system objects
          Integrated file system scanning
      Journaling objects
        Journaling overview
          Journal management
          Objects you should journal
          Journaled integrated file system objects
          Journaled operations
          Special considerations for journal entries
          Considerations for multiple hard links and journaling
        Starting journaling
        Changing journaling
        Ending journaling
      Reclaim operation of the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and user-defined file systems
        Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) and Reclaim Storage (RCLSTG) commands comparison
        Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) command
        Re-creation of integrated file system provided objects
        Examples: Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) command
          Example: Correcting problems for an object
          Example: Correcting problems that exist in a directory subtree
          Example: Finding all damaged objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
          Example: Deleting all damaged objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
          Example: Running multiple RCLLNK commands to quickly reclaim all objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
      Programming support
        Copying data between stream files and database files
          Copying data using CL commands
          Copying data using APIs
          Copying data using data-transfer functions
            Transferring data from a database file to a stream file
            Transferring data from a stream file to a database file
            Transferring data into a newly created database file definition and file
            Creating a format description file
        Copying data between stream files and save files
        Performing operations using APIs
          ILE C functions
          Large file support
          Path name rules for APIs
          File descriptor
          Security
        Socket support
        Naming and international support
        Data conversion
        Example: Integrated file system C functions
      Working with files and folders using iSeries Navigator
        Checking in a file
        Checking out a file
        Creating a folder
        Removing a folder
        Moving files or folders to another file system
        Setting permissions
        Setting up file text conversion
        Sending a file or folder to another system
        Changing options for a package definition
        Scheduling a date and time to send your file or folder
        Creating a file share
        Changing a file share
        Creating a new user-defined file system
        Mounting a user-defined file system
        Unmounting a user-defined file system
        Setting whether objects should be scanned or not
      Transport-independent remote procedure call
        Network selection APIs
        Name-to-address translation APIs
        eXternal Data Representation (XDR) APIs
        Authentication APIs
        Transport-independent RPC (TI-RPC) APIs
          TI-RPC simplified APIs
          TI-RPC top-level APIs
          TI-RPC intermediate-level APIs
          TI-RPC expert-level APIs
          Other TI-RPC APIs
      Related information for integrated file system
    Spooled files
      Printable PDF
      Output spooling
      Output queues and spooled files
      Default server output queues
      Spooling writers
      Summary of spooling writer commands
      Input spooling
      Summary of job input commands
      Using an inline data file
      Considerations for opening inline data files
    Tape files
      Printable PDF
      Overview of tape files
      Concepts
        Tape data files
        Tape device files
        Records, blocks, and formats
        Tape labeling
      Using tape files
        Initializing tapes
        Storing data in files on tape
          Extending files on tape
        Accessing data from a tape device
          Setting up a device description
          Setting up a device description for each media library device
          Setting up a tape device file
            Creating tape device file
            Specifying tape device file parameters
      Tape device files in high-level language programs
        Open processing for tape device files
        Input/output processing for tape
          Read and write considerations
          Read considerations
          Force-end-of-data considerations
          Force-end-of-volume considerations
        Close processing for tape
        User label processing
          Parameter 1
          Parameter 2
          Parameter 3
      Using overrides
        Overriding file attributes
        Overriding file names in high-level language programs
        Displaying overrides
        Deleting overrides
        File redirection
          Overriding files with the same file types
          Overriding files with different file types
          Recognizing commands that ignore or restrict overrides
      Record formats
        Example: Record format *D
        Example: Record format *DB
        Example: Record format *F
        Example: Record format *FB
        Example: Record format *V
        Example: Record format *VB
        Example: Record format *VS
        Example: Record format *VBS
        Example: Record format *U
      Reference
        Tape file CL commands
          Tape configuration description commands
          Tape device file commands
          Tape support commands
        Feedback area layouts
          Open feedback area
            Device definition list
            Volume label fields
              IBM standard volume label (VOL1)
              IBM standard data set label 1 (HDR1/EOV1/EOF1)
              IBM standard data set label 2 (HDR2/EOV2/EOF2)
              IBM standard user labels (UHL1-UHL8 or UTL1-UTL8)
              Other IBM standard labels
              ISO/ANSI standard volume label (VOL1)
              ISO/ANSI standard data set label 1 (HDR1/EOV1/EOF1)
              ISO/ANSI standard data set label 2 (HDR2/EOV2/EOF2)
              ISO/ANSI standard user labels (UHL and UTL)
              Other ISO/ANSI labels
          I/O feedback area
            Common I/O feedback area
      Troubleshooting tape files
      Related information for tape files
  Hardware installation and use
    Planning for your physical environment
    Cabling your server
    Installing System i features
    Control panel
      Printable PDFs
      Control panel concepts
        Types of control panels
          Physical control panel
          Remote control panel
          Virtual control panel
        Control panel functions
        Control panel buttons, lights, and indicators
      Setting up your control panel
      Accessing control panel functions
      Instructions and descriptions for control panel functions
        Normal control panel functions
        Extended control panel functions
        Low-level debug panel functions 57 through 70
      Using remote control panel APIs
        System power and test APIs
          Turning on the system
          Performing panel lamp test
          Clearing panel lamp test
          Powering off the system
        IPL-related APIs
          Setting IPL mode to Manual
          Setting IPL mode to Normal
          Setting IPL mode to Auto
          Setting IPL mode to Secure
          Setting IPL type to A
          Setting IPL type to B
          Setting IPL type to C
          Setting IPL type to D
          Starting an IPL
          Setting IPL speed to Fast
          Setting IPL speed to Slow
          Setting IPL speed to system default
        Other system function APIs
          Starting dedicated service tools on the primary or alternate console
          Starting a main storage dump
          Disabling continuously powered main storage
        APIs that check the system status
          Is CPM present?
          Is CPM enabled?
          Is the key inserted?
          Is the system turned on?
          Is the attention light lit?
          Is SPCN present?
          Getting the IPL mode
          Getting the IPL type
          Getting the IPL speed
          Getting type and model information
          Getting the SPCN system reference code
          Getting all system reference codes 1 - 9
    Start and stop the server
    System configuration list
  i5/OS and related software
    Installing, upgrading, or deleting i5/OS and related software
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Fastpath for software installation, upgrade, and deletion tasks
      Concepts for software installation
        Software installation process
        Types of software installation devices
        Contents of a software order
          Software licensing documents
          Media distribution set
          Individual product documentation
        Skipping a release
        Performance data collection
        Mixed-release environment
        Software upgrade or replacement
          Supported releases and nonsupported models for i5/OS (OS/400) upgrades
          Installation and IBM-supplied objects
          Compressed objects and storage space
          Files that the system deletes during installation
        Globalization and i5/OS software installation
          Considerations for changing a primary language
          Considerations for installing additional secondary languages
        Object conversions
      Checklist: i5/OS software upgrade or replacement readiness
      Upgrading or replacing i5/OS and related software
        Preparing to upgrade or replace i5/OS software
          Verifying the contents of your software order
            Identifying and reviewing information resources
            Verifying the correct optical distribution media
            Verifying license keys for keyed products
          Preparing the system for i5/OS software upgrade or replacement
            Reviewing software PTF (fix) requirements
              Finding the latest PSP information
              Analyzing fixes you currently have on your system
              Required: Installing the Prepare for Install PTFs for V5R2 and V5R3
              Installing optional i5/OS PTF to choose disk configuration
              Permanently applying program temporary fixes (PTFs)
              Adding fix support for currently installed licensed programs
            Working with critical system values before you install software
              Recording and printing all system values before you install software
              Changing certain system values (QSYSLIBL, QUSRLIBL, QALWOBJRST, or QVFYOBJRST)
              Optionally changing the scan control system value
              Creating a data area to specify the system time zone
            Verifying the integrity of user-modified system objects
              Verifying user profiles and checking cross-reference files
              Checking the QSECOFR user profile
              Ensuring that the IBM-supplied product libraries are in the system ASP
            Ensuring two-phase commit integrity
            Minimizing software installation time
            Gathering performance data for benchmark
              Gathering performance data with Collection Services
              Analyzing performance data
          Performing initial upgrade or replacement tasks
            Choosing a software installation method and device
            Preparing for globalization
            Preparing the upgrade device and media
              Preparing to upgrade or replace software using an image catalog
                Determining storage requirements for image catalog installation
                Freeing up space on the load-source disk unit for an image catalog
                Scenario: Preparing to upgrade or replace software using an image catalog
            Required: Creating a custom list of software to install
              Preselecting the licensed programs to install
              Adding additional licensed programs to the installation list
            Required: Accepting software agreements
            Ensuring the system meets disk storage requirements for upgrades
              Determining storage space required
              Cleaning up disk storage space
                Deleting licensed programs during cleanup
                Cleaning up user profiles
            Required: Allocating additional space for Licensed Internal Code
            Choosing disk configuration
            Estimating upgrade or replacement time
            Preparing your console for software installation
            Stopping the integrated server and other application servers
          Saving the system
        Upgrading or replacing software using automatic installation
          Before you begin automatic installation
          Replacing software using the automatic installation method
          Verifying completion of automatic installation
        Upgrading or replacing software using manual installation
          Before you begin manual installation
          Replacing the Licensed Internal Code
          Replacing the i5/OS operating system
          Replacing the licensed programs
          Verifying completion of manual installation
        Checklist: Completing the i5/OS upgrade or replacement
      Replacing Licensed Internal Code and i5/OS of the same version and release
        Checklist: i5/OS software replacement
        Obtaining a record of PTFs applied
        Permanently applying PTFs for a replacement of the same release
        Determining storage space required for a replacement of the same release
        Replacing software of the same release using manual installation
        Installing PTFs for the Licensed Internal Code and the operating system
        Checklist: Completing the replacement of the same i5/OS release
      Checklist: i5/OS software installation readiness
      Installing i5/OS and related software on a new system or logical partition
        Preparing to install the i5/OS release
          Verifying the contents of your software order
            Identifying and reviewing information resources
            Verifying the correct optical distribution media
            Verifying license keys for keyed products
          Performing initial installation tasks
            Ensuring you have the latest information
            Determining disk storage space required for a new installation
            Estimating installation time
            Preparing your console for software installation
            Preparing the installation device and media
        Installing the i5/OS release
          Installing Licensed Internal Code on a new logical partition
            Before you begin to install Licensed Internal Code on a logical partition
            Installing Licensed Internal Code on the new logical partition
          Installing software on a new system or logical partition (without i5/OS installed)
            Before you begin to install software on a new system or logical partition
            Installing i5/OS on a new system or logical partition
          Installing software on a new system (with i5/OS installed)
            Before you begin to install software on a new system
            Performing the initial program load (IPL)
        Installing additional licensed programs
          Before you begin to install additional licensed programs
          Using the Work with Licensed Programs menu to install IBM licensed programs
          Using the Restore Licensed Programs command to install IBM or non-IBM licensed programs
        Installing a secondary language
          Before you begin to install a secondary language
          Installing secondary languages for IBM licensed programs
          Installing secondary languages for non-IBM licensed programs
        Checklist: Completing the i5/OS installation
      Changing the primary language of your system or logical partition
        Before you begin to change the primary language
        Changing the primary language
        Installing the licensed programs after changing the primary language
      Deleting software related to i5/OS
        Determining what unused parts of products to delete
        Considerations for deleting licensed programs
        Deleting licensed programs
      Troubleshooting software installation problems
        Where to begin recovery
        Image catalog recovery
        Operations Console recovery
        Starting point for automatic installation recovery
        Licensed Internal Code recovery
        Operating system recovery
        Licensed programs, PTFs, and secondary language recovery
        Starting the automatic installation process again
        Starting the manual installation process again
        Initialize System (INZSYS) recovery
        Disk configuration warning and error messages
        Starting from a power-off condition
        Reference codes for i5/OS software installation
          Common reference codes for i5/OS software installation
          i5/OS installation recovery after using reference codes
      i5/OS software reference
        Licensed program releases and sizes
        Estimates for i5/OS software installation time
          Common methods of estimating i5/OS installation time
          Conditions that affect i5/OS installation time
          i5/OS installation processes
          Checklist: Estimating i5/OS installation time
            Times for installing licensed programs
            Times for conversions
              Integrated file system conversions
              Conversion of objects that contain SQL statements
              Database file conversions
              IBM Backup Recovery and Media Services for i5/OS conversions
            Data protection mechanisms
        Installation devices and media
          Optical media
          Image catalog for a virtual optical device
          Tape or tape libraries
          Non-IBM tape device
          Alternate installation device
            Overview: Alternate installation device
            Setting up an alternate installation device
            Disabling an alternate installation device
            Verifying and selecting an alternate installation device during a manual installation
        i5/OS release interoperability
        Installation notes about the i5/OS release
        Media labels and their contents
          Standard set products
          Keyed set products
        Feature codes for national language version
        Blank displays
        Using D-mode IPL to refresh the vital product data
        System password
        Installed status values
        Options on the Prepare for Install menu
        Options on Work with Licensed Programs menu
          Manual installation Option 1. Install all
          Automatic installation options
          Options for displaying, installing, deleting, and saving from a list
            Option 10. Display installed licensed programs
            Option 11. Install licensed programs
            Option 12. Delete licensed programs
            Option 13. Save licensed programs
          Options for secondary languages
            Option 20. Display secondary languages
            Option 21. Install secondary languages
            Option 22. Delete secondary languages
          Completion status
          Commands related to the Work with Licensed Programs menu
      Related information for software installation
    Distributing software
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Planning to distribute software
      Distributing software using iSeries Navigator
        Sending IBM software products using iSeries Navigator
        Packaging and sending your own software products using iSeries Navigator
      Distributing software using central site distribution
        Central site distribution concepts
          Central site distribution terminology
          Overview of tasks to distribute software using central site distribution
          Central site distribution of software license information
          Types of distribution media for central site distribution
          Installation profiles for central site distribution
          Benefits of using automatic installation and installation profiles to install distribution media
          Installation methods for the target systems
          Licensed program compression and decompression for central site distribution
          Central site distribution of primary and secondary language files
          Central site distribution of program temporary fixes (PTFs)
        Checklist: Preparing to distribute software using central site distribution
          Preparing software license information for central site distribution
          Distributing software license information using iSeries Navigator or paper
          Optional: Writing a user-defined installation program for the target systems
          Optional: Preparing the central system for virtual images
        Checklist: Creating central site distribution media
          Duplicating and distributing tape or DVD distribution media
          Optional: Duplicating virtual images to physical media
          Optional: Duplicating DVD media to virtual images
          Optional: Distributing virtual images
        Checklist: Installing central site distribution media on the target system
          Optional: Preparing the target system for virtual images
          Installation tasks for the target systems
          Optional tasks to complete after installation
      Distributing software reference
        Central site distribution media contents
        Licensed programs that do not support secondary languages
        Cover sheet for central site distribution media
      Troubleshooting software distribution
      Related information for Distributing software
    Maintaining and managing i5/OS and related software
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Using software fixes
        Fixes concepts and terms
          Types of fixes
            Single fixes
            Cumulative PTF packages
            Groups
            Service packs
          Cover letters
            Sample fix cover letter and description of fields
          Save files
          Status information
            Status descriptions using iSeries Navigator
            Status descriptions using the command interface
            Order status
          Where to find information about fixes
            Summary lists
            Cross-reference summary lists
            Preventive service planning information
              Obtaining preventive service planning information
              Contents of PSP information
            Authorized program analysis reports
        Planning your fix management strategy
        Determining which interface to use
        Ordering fixes
          Ordering fixes using the Internet
          Ordering fixes using the SNDPTFORD command
        Installing fixes
          Step 1: Reviewing fix cover letters prior to fix installation
          Step 2: Preparing the system to install fixes
            Determining the storage area before installing fixes
          Step 3: Choosing your fix installation scenario
            Installing cumulative PTF packages
            Installing fixes received as save files
            Installing fixes from media
            Distributing fixes to multiple systems with iSeries Navigator
              Sending and installing fixes
                Copying fixes from media
                Adding fix support for a software product
              Comparing and updating fixes
            Installing fixes on systems with logical partitions
            Installing fixes on systems managed by Hardware Management Console
            Installing i5/OS fixes from an image catalog
          Step 4: Verifying fix installation
          Advanced procedures for fix installation
            Building a custom fix package
            Building virtual image fix packages
            Loading fixes
            Applying fixes
              Canceling the application of fixes
              Applying fixes during an unattended IPL
              Applying fixes during attended IPL
              Applying fixes without an IPL
              Applying fixes at the next unattended IPL
              Applying Licensed Internal Code fixes without an IPL
        Displaying fixes information on your system
          Displaying fix status with iSeries Navigator
          Displaying PTF information with the character-based interface
          Displaying properties of a fix or fix group
          Displaying an inventory of fixes on your system with Management Central
          Displaying level of fixes
        Working with fix cover letters
          Ordering fix cover letters
          Copying fix cover letters from media
          Displaying and printing fix cover letters
        Cleaning up fixes
        Removing software fixes
          Removing licensed program fixes
          Removing IBM i5/OS fixes
          Removing Licensed Internal Code fixes
      Working with software agreements and licenses
        i5/OS Application Server licensing
        i5/OS licensing on IBM System i models that offer user entitlements
        Software agreements and licensing concepts
          Software agreements
          Software license keys
        Planning for software licensing
          Determining the usage limit for products not in the keyed set
          Determining the usage limit for products priced by processor
        Managing software agreements and license keys
          Accepting software agreements
          Displaying or printing your software agreements
          Preparing software agreements for transfer of ownership
          Displaying and changing software license information
            Adding license key information
            Setting the usage limit
          Distributing software license keys
      Managing software inventory
      Building and managing your own software products
        Packaging and sending your own software products
        Generating fixes for installed products using Management Central
        Generating software agreements for your own products
        Generating license keys for your own products
      Fixes and software inventory related information
  Integrated operating environments
    AIX on System i
    Domino
    Linux
      Linux on an integrated xSeries solution
        What's New for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        x86 Linux on iSeries
        Planning the installation
          Integrated Linux server overview
          Linux operating systems tested
          Hardware support
          Reviewing the planning documentation
          Understanding virtual devices
        Installing the hardware
          iSCSI Host Bus Adapter
            iSCSI HBA Installation Overview
          Integrated xSeries Adapter
            IXA Installation Overview
            xSeries hardware and firmware
            Updating the xSeries BIOS for your integrated Linux server
            RSA I or RSA II adapter and firmware
            Advanced System Management software
            Video card
            Integrated xSeries Adapter card
            HSL loop and SPCN network
          Integrated xSeries Server
            IXS Installation overview
            Verifying that an IXS is operational
            Locating an Integrated xSeries Server (IXS)
            Determining which Integrated xSeries Servers are in use
        Completing the preinstallation tasks
          Install the required iSeries licensed program for Linux integration
          Installing the PTFs required for Linux integration support
          Completing the iSCSI preinstallation tasks
          Creating the driver diskette for Linux installs on the IXS and IXA
          Connecting a USB diskette drive to the IXS
          Connecting the integrated server into the Ethernet LAN
        Starting the installation from i5/OS
          INSLNXSVR command parameter descriptions
          Examples: Running the Install Linux Server (INSLNXSVR) command
        Completing the installation from the Linux console
          Completing the installation of RHEL 3 on the IXS or IXA
          Completing the installation of RHEL 4 on the IXA
          Completing the installation of SLES 8 on the IXA
          Completing the installation of SLES 9 on the IXA
          Completing a SLES 9 SP3 or later installation on an iSCSI attached BladeCenter or xSeries
        Completing the postinstallation tasks
          Run the ixssetup.sh script
          Run the ixsupdt utility
        Maintaining the Linux integration code
        i5/OS operations for integrated Linux servers
          Overview
          Setting up your operational interface
          Managing your integrated Linux server with iSeries Navigator
          Managing your integrated Linux server with the i5/OS command line
          Using iSeries Navigator to work with integrated Linux server NWSDs
          Using the i5/OS command line to work with integrated Linux server NWSDs
          Starting integrated Linux servers
          Shutting down integrated Linux servers
        Networking integrated servers
          Configure virtual Ethernet networks
        Managing Linux drives
          iSeries storage management overview
          Introducing network server storage spaces
          Understanding storage space linking
          Manage Linux drives
          Creating Linux drives
          Linking Linux drives
          Unlinking Linux drives
          Deleting Linux drives
          Sharing iSeries tape and optical drives with Linux
          Restricting iSeries tape and optical drives
          Deleting Linux servers
          Viewing messages for a Linux server
        Linux-centric backup and recovery
          Linux backup and recovery overview
          Linux recovery options
          Choosing a tape drive for use by your Linux backup application
          Restricting iSeries tape drives that can be used by Linux
          Setting up an iSeries tape drive for use by Linux
          Formatting tape media for use by Linux
          Transferring control of a tape drive from i5/OS to Linux
          Transferring control of a tape drive from Linux to i5/OS
          Backing up files using Linux utilities and applications
        Troubleshooting integrated Linux servers
        Related information
      Linux in a logical partition
        What's new
        Printable PDF
        Plan to run Linux in a partition
          Server support
          Hosted and nonhosted partitions
          Virtual I/O
          Directly attached I/O
          Supported I/O adapters
          SCSI support
            Device parity protection
          Obtain Linux
          Order or upgrade a server
        Create a logical partition
          Configure a logical partition
          Assign I/O adapters
          Create a network server description and a network server storage space
          Configure the LAN console
          Connect the virtual console
          Install Linux
          Install Linux from CD-ROM images
          Start and stop the NWSD
          Start device parity protection
        Managing Linux
          Logical partition authority
          Display and change hardware configuration
            Display console log
            Display the operating environment
            Display reference code history
            Change host information
          Connect to LAN
            Directly attached LAN adapters
            Virtual Ethernet
              Use virtual Ethernet
              Enable virtual Ethernet
              Create an Ethernet line description
              Virtual Ethernet connectivity methods
                Proxy ARP
                Network Address Translation (NAT)
                TCP/IP Routing
          Print server configuration
          Dynamic movement of shared processor units
          Dynamically adding disks
          Network server description
            Link NWSSTG among multiple NWSDs
            Delete NWSDs
            Delete disk drives
            Network server description parameters
          Application support
            Access iSeries data using the Linux ODBC driver
            i5/OS NetServer support for Samba
            How to use SAMBA and NFS
          Back up and recover
            Backup options
            Use the shared, read-only storage space
            Sharing access to disks
            Clone Linux servers
            Save and restore hosted Linux files
            Save configuration data
            Back up the NWSD and disk drives
            Build a rescue image
            Use a rescue image
            Back up NWSDs
            Restore NWSDs
            Unlink disk drives
            Objects to save on i5/OS
          Start a logical partition
            IPL type for Linux
            Boot from an IPL source
            Recovering directly attached disks
        Troubleshoot
          Debug NWSD error messages
          Debug multitasking error
          System reference codes
          Recover network failure
        Related information
    i5/OS PASE
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      i5/OS PASE overview
        i5/OS PASE concepts
        i5/OS PASE as a useful option for application development
      Installing i5/OS PASE
      Planning for i5/OS PASE
      Preparing programs to run in i5/OS PASE
        Analyzing your program's compatibility with i5/OS PASE
        Compiling your AIX source
          Installing AIX compilers on i5/OS PASE
            Installing the AIX compilers
            PTF update instructions
        Copying the i5/OS PASE program to your system
          Case sensitivity
          Line-terminating characters in integrated file system files
          Transferring files
        Customizing i5/OS PASE programs to use i5/OS functions
          Copying header files
          Copying export files
          i5/OS PASE APIs for accessing i5/OS functions
      Using i5/OS PASE programs in the i5/OS environment
        Running i5/OS PASE programs and procedures
          Running an i5/OS PASE program with QP2SHELL()
          Running an i5/OS PASE program with QP2TERM()
          Running an i5/OS PASE program from within i5/OS programs
            Examples: Running an i5/OS PASE program from within i5/OS programs
          Calling an i5/OS PASE procedure from within i5/OS programs
            Example 1: Calling an i5/OS PASE procedure from within i5/OS programs
            Example 2: An i5/OS ILE program that uses pointer arguments in a call to an i5/OS PASE procedure
          Using i5/OS PASE native methods from Java
          Working with environment variables
        Calling i5/OS programs and procedures from your i5/OS PASE programs
          Calling ILE procedures
            Examples: Calling ILE procedures
          Calling i5/OS programs from i5/OS PASE
            Example: Calling i5/OS programs from i5/OS PASE
          Running i5/OS commands from i5/OS PASE
            Example: Running i5/OS commands from i5/OS PASE
        How i5/OS PASE programs interact with i5/OS
          Communications
          Database
            Example: Calling DB2 UDB for iSeries CLI functions in an i5/OS PASE program
          Data encoding
          File systems
          Globalization
          Message services
          Printing output from i5/OS PASE applications
          Pseudo-terminal (PTY)
          Security
          Work management
      Debugging your i5/OS PASE programs
      Optimizing performance
      Examples: i5/OS PASE
      Related information
    Windows environment on iSeries
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Concepts
        Integrated server overview
        Advantages
        Terminology
        Hardware
          IXS and IXA attached servers
          iSCSI attached servers
            iSCSI attached server overview
            Basic single server support
            Multiple server support
            Advanced iSCSI support
            Diskless booting over iSCSI
            Remote server and service processor discovery
          Windows console
        Considerations
        Performance
          iSeries storage spaces versus dedicated disks
          Storage space balancing
          iSCSI attached server performance
          Virtual Ethernet
        Networking
          Service Processor Connection
          iSCSI network
          Point to point virtual Ethernet
          Virtual Ethernet networks
          External networks
        Software
          Integrated xSeries Server (IXS) and Integrated xSeries Adapter (IXA) attached xSeries servers
          iSCSI attached xSeries and BladeCenter servers
          iSCSI attached xSeries and BladeCenter servers with security
        High availability
        Security
          IXSs and IXA attached systems
          iSCSI attached systems
        User and group
          Types of user configurations
          User enrollment templates
          Password considerations
      Install and configure
        Hardware requirements
        Software requirements
        Prepare for the installation of integrated Windows servers
          Memory requirements
          Time synchronization
          Configure i5/OS TCP/IP
          iSeries Access
          Enable iSeries NetServer
          Create a guest user profile for iSeries NetServer
        Install IBM i5/OS Integrated Server Support
        Plan for the installation of Windows server
          Plan for iSCSI hardware installation
            Plan the boot mode for your hosted system iSCSI HBA
            Create a Service processor configuration and Remote system configuration
            Plan your service processor connection
            Configure the service processor discovery method on your iSeries server
          Network server descriptions
          Installation worksheet for OS/400 parameters
          Compare FAT, FAT32, and NTFS file systems
          Tip: Find resource names when you have multiple integrated servers
          Supported language versions
        Install Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003
          Prepare iSCSI hardware for Windows installation
            Initialize service processor security
            Create and start a network server host adapter
          Start the installation from the i5/OS console
          Continue the installation from the integrated Windows server console
          Complete the server installation
          Upgrade the IBM iSeries Integration for Windows Server licensed program
          Upgrade the integrated Windows server side of the IBM iSeries Integration licensed program
          Migrate to 2890 Integrated xSeries Server hardware
          Migrate to iSCSI attached servers
          Windows Cluster Service
            Install Windows Cluster service
              Install Windows Cluster service on a new Windows server
              Install Windows Cluster service on an existing server
            Prepare Windows before installing Windows Cluster service
            Install Windows Cluster service on Windows
              Install Windows Cluster service on Windows 2000
              Install Windows Cluster service on Windows 2003
          Enabling Kerberos with a Windows Server 2003 Active Directory Server
          Install the ATI Radeon 7000M video device drivers for Windows 2000 on the 2892-002 Integrated xSeries Server
          Adjust hardware acceleration for Windows Server 2003 on the 2892-002 or 4812-001 Integrated xSeries Server
          Respond to error messages during installation
        Set an integrated Windows server to automatically vary on with TCP/IP
        Code fixes
          Types of code fixes
          Synchronize software level using Windows server console
          Synchronize software level using iSeries Navigator
          Synchronize software level using a remote command
      Manage virtual Ethernet and external networks
        Configure IP address, gateway and MTU values
        Configure virtual Ethernet networks
        Configure inter-partition virtual Ethernet networks
        Explore point-to-point virtual Ethernet networks
        External networks
          Install network adapter drivers and add adapter address information to Windows server
        Remove network adapters
      Administer connections to iSCSI attached servers
        Work with iSCSI configuration objects
          Manage network server host adapters
            Create a network server host adapter object
            Create a network server host adapter object based on another one
            Display network server host adapter properties
            Change network server host adapter properties
            Start a network server host adapter
            Stop a network server host adapter
            Delete a network server host adapter
          Manage remote system network server configurations
            Create a remote system configuration object
            Create a remote system configuration object based on another one
            Display remote system configuration properties
            Change remote system configuration properties
            Display remote system status
            Delete a remote system configuration object
          Manage service processor network server configurations
            Create a service processor configuration object
            Create a service processor configuration object based on another one
            Display service processor configuration properties
            Change service processor configuration properties
            Initialize a service processor
            Delete a service processor configuration object
          Manage connection security network server configurations
            Create a connection security configuration object
            Create a connection security configuration object based on another one
            Display connection security configuration properties
            Change connection security configuration properties
            Delete a connection security object
        Configure security between i5/OS and hosted systems
          Configure CHAP
          Configure IPSec
          Configure service processor SSL
            Automatic SSL initialization
            Manual SSL initialization
          Service processor password
          Configure a firewall
        Manage iSCSI host bus adapters
          Hot spare between iSCSI local host adapters
          Manage iSCSI HBA usage
            Share an iSCSI HBA among multiple hosted servers
            Spreading workload over multiple iSCSI HBAs
            Using multiple iSCSI HBAs for redundancy
            Manage iSCSI HBA allocation at the Windows side of the iSCSI network
            Use the qvnimap command to view iSCSI HBA allocation
            Display information about virtual Ethernet adapters
          Configuring multipath I/O
            Configuring the Windows operating system for multipath I/O
            Configuring integrated servers for multipath I/O
          Maximum transmission unit (MTU) considerations
            Configuring virtual Ethernet for maximum performance on iSCSI networks that support frames larger than 1500 bytes
            Configuring virtual Ethernet for iSCSI networks that have a maximum frame size that is less than 1500 bytes
            Configuring virtual Ethernet to support unusual non-TCP applications that do not negotiate MTU
          Integrated DHCP server
        Remote server discovery and management
          Verify that IBM Director Server is installed and running
          Configure remote server and service processor discovery
            Service processor discovery configuration
            Dynamic IP addressing (DHCP)
            Service processor discovery methods
              Service Location Protocol (SLP) using multicast addressing
              Discovery by IP address
              Discovery by host name
          Use the MM or RSA II web interface
      Administer integrated Windows servers
        Start and stop an integrated server
          Start and stop using iSeries Navigator
          Start and stop using the character-based interface
          Shutdown from the Windows server console
          How to safely shutdown your iSeries when integrated Windows servers are present
        Connect to the 4812 IXS virtual serial console
        View or change configuration information
        Message logging
        Run integrated Windows server commands remotely
          Guidelines for submitting remote commands
          SBMNWSCMD and file level backup support for Kerberos v5 and EIM
        Hot spare between server hardware
      Manage storage
        i5/OS storage management
          Disk drives for integrated Windows servers
          Predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
        Administer integrated Windows server disk drives from OS/400
          Access the i5/OS integrated file system from an integrated server
          Obtain information about integrated server disk drives
          Add disk drives to integrated Windows servers
            Create an integrated server disk drive
            Link a disk drive to an integrated server
            Format integrated server disk drives
          Copy a disk drive
          Expand a disk drive
          Expand a system drive
          Unlink integrated Windows server disk drives
          Delete integrated Windows server disk drives
        Use Windows disk management programs with integrated Windows servers
      Share devices
        Determine the device description and hardware resource names for iSeries devices
        Use iSeries optical drives with integrated Windows servers
        Use iSeries tape drives with integrated Windows servers
          Install tape device drivers
          Format a tape on i5/OS for use with integrated Windows servers
          Allocate the iSeries tape drive to an integrated Windows server
          Return control of a tape drive from an integrated Windows server to the iSeries
          Supported iSeries tape drives
          Identify iSeries tape devices for applications
        Transfer control of the iSeries tape and optical drives between integrated Windows servers
        Print from an integrated Windows server to iSeries printers
      Administer Windows server users from i5/OS
        Enroll a single user using iSeries Navigator
        Enroll an i5/OS group using iSeries Navigator
        Enroll users using the character-based interface
        Create user templates
        Specify a home directory in a template
        Changing the LCLPWDMGT user profile attribute
        Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
        End user enrollment
        End group enrollment
        The QAS400NT user
        Preventing enrollment and propagation to an integrated Windows server
      Back up and recover
        Back up of the NWSD and disk drives associated with an integrated Windows server
          Back up the NWSD of an integrated Windows server
          Back up the NWSH of an iSCSI attached integrated Windows server
          Back up iSCSI NWSCFGs and validation lists
          Back up predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers created on V4R5 and later OS/400 systems
          Back up user-defined disk drives for an integrated Windows server
          Save and restore user enrollment information
          What objects to save and their location on OS/400
        Back up individual integrated Windows server files and directories
          File-level backup restrictions
          Preliminary administrator setup tasks
            Create shares on integrated Windows servers
            Adding members to QAZLCSAVL
            Ensure iSeries NetServer and the integrated Windows server are in same domain
          Save your files
            Example: How to address parts of an integrated Windows server
          Windows Backup utility
        Restore an integrated server's NWSD and disk drives
          Restore predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
          Restore user-defined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
          Restore integrated Windows server NWSDs
        Restore integrated Windows server NWSHs for iSCSI attached servers
        Restore integrated Windows server NWSCFGs for iSCSI attached servers
        Recover integrated Windows server files
      Uninstall
        Delete an integrated Windows server's NWSD
        Delete an integrated Windows server's line descriptions
        Delete TCP/IP interfaces associated with an integrated Windows server
        Delete controller descriptions associated with an integrated Windows server
        Delete device descriptions associated with an integrated Windows server
        Delete network server configurations associated with an iSCSI integrated Windows server
        Delete the IBM iSeries Integrated Server Support licensed program
      Troubleshoot
        Check message and job logs
          Monitor Job
          Additional logs and messages for iSCSI-attached servers
        Problems with integrated Windows servers
          Blue screen errors
          A full integrated server system drive
          Optical device problems
            Locked optical device for a failed server
          Tape problems
            Verify that the tape drive device driver is loaded
          Problems starting an integrated Windows server
            Problems hot sparing between servers
          Problems sharing hosted system hardware
            Multiple NWSDs defined to use the same hosted system hardware
            Special considerations for iSCSI attached systems
          NWSD configuration file errors
            Repair the NWSD configuration file
            Reset the NWSD configuration file parameter
            Use a previous version of the integrated server file
          DASD in IXA or iSCSI attached servers
          Failures enrolling users and groups
          User enrollment authorization problems
          Password problems
          IBM iSeries Integration for Windows Server snap-in program
          Problems with iSCSI attached servers
            Boot and storage path network analysis
            Managing path certificates
            IBM Director Troubleshooting
              Discovery problems
              Problems with SSL connections
            Virtual Ethernet problems on iSCSI attached servers
          Virtual Ethernet problems with IXS and IXA attached servers
            Both line description and icon are present
            Line description is present and icon is missing
            Line description is missing and icon is present
            Both line description and icon are missing
          General problems with external networks
          Manually update LAN drivers on the integrated Windows server
            Begin the LAN driver installation or update
            Select the adapter to install or update
            Complete the LAN driver installation or update
          Point to point LAN IP address conflicts
            Assign point to point virtual Ethernet IP addresses
          Problems with TCP/IP over virtual Ethernet
          Problems accessing Windows Server 2003 shares using the QNTC file system
          IFS access problems
          Problems with saving integrated Windows server files
          Unreadable messages in the server message queue
          Problems getting a Windows system memory dump
        Reinstall an integrated Windows server
        Collect integrated Windows server service data
          Create an integrated Windows server memory dump on OS/400
          Use the network server description (NWSD) dump tool on OS/400
      Network server description configuration files
        NWSD configuration file format
        Create an NWSD configuration file
        Example: NWSD configuration file
        Remove lines from an existing integrated Windows server file
          TARGETDIR
          TARGETFILE
        Change an integrated Windows server file with ADDCONFIG
          VAR
          ADDSTR
          ADDWHEN
            ADDWHEN and DELETEWHEN expression operators
          DELETEWHEN
          LINECOMMENT
          LOCATION
          LINESEARCHPOS
          LINESEARCHSTR
          LINELOCATION
          FILESEARCHPOS
          FILESEARCHSTR
          FILESEARCHSTROCC
          REPLACEOCC
          TARGETDIR
          TARGETFILE
          UNIQUE
          VAROCC
          VARVALUE
        Change an integrated Windows server file with UPDATECONFIG
          FILESEARCHPOS
          FILESEARCHSTR
          FILESEARCHSTROCC
        Set configuration defaults
          ADDWHEN
          DELETEWHEN
          FILESEARCHPOS
          FILESEARCHSTR
          TARGETDIR
          TARGETFILE
        Use substitution variables for keyword values
      Related information
  Linux
    Linux on an integrated xSeries solution
      What's New for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      x86 Linux on iSeries
      Planning the installation
        Integrated Linux server overview
        Linux operating systems tested
        Hardware support
        Reviewing the planning documentation
        Understanding virtual devices
      Installing the hardware
        iSCSI Host Bus Adapter
          iSCSI HBA Installation Overview
        Integrated xSeries Adapter
          IXA Installation Overview
          xSeries hardware and firmware
          Updating the xSeries BIOS for your integrated Linux server
          RSA I or RSA II adapter and firmware
          Advanced System Management software
          Video card
          Integrated xSeries Adapter card
          HSL loop and SPCN network
        Integrated xSeries Server
          IXS Installation overview
          Verifying that an IXS is operational
          Locating an Integrated xSeries Server (IXS)
          Determining which Integrated xSeries Servers are in use
      Completing the preinstallation tasks
        Install the required iSeries licensed program for Linux integration
        Installing the PTFs required for Linux integration support
        Completing the iSCSI preinstallation tasks
        Creating the driver diskette for Linux installs on the IXS and IXA
        Connecting a USB diskette drive to the IXS
        Connecting the integrated server into the Ethernet LAN
      Starting the installation from i5/OS
        INSLNXSVR command parameter descriptions
        Examples: Running the Install Linux Server (INSLNXSVR) command
      Completing the installation from the Linux console
        Completing the installation of RHEL 3 on the IXS or IXA
        Completing the installation of RHEL 4 on the IXA
        Completing the installation of SLES 8 on the IXA
        Completing the installation of SLES 9 on the IXA
        Completing a SLES 9 SP3 or later installation on an iSCSI attached BladeCenter or xSeries
      Completing the postinstallation tasks
        Run the ixssetup.sh script
        Run the ixsupdt utility
      Maintaining the Linux integration code
      i5/OS operations for integrated Linux servers
        Overview
        Setting up your operational interface
        Managing your integrated Linux server with iSeries Navigator
        Managing your integrated Linux server with the i5/OS command line
        Using iSeries Navigator to work with integrated Linux server NWSDs
        Using the i5/OS command line to work with integrated Linux server NWSDs
        Starting integrated Linux servers
        Shutting down integrated Linux servers
      Networking integrated servers
        Configure virtual Ethernet networks
      Managing Linux drives
        iSeries storage management overview
        Introducing network server storage spaces
        Understanding storage space linking
        Manage Linux drives
        Creating Linux drives
        Linking Linux drives
        Unlinking Linux drives
        Deleting Linux drives
        Sharing iSeries tape and optical drives with Linux
        Restricting iSeries tape and optical drives
        Deleting Linux servers
        Viewing messages for a Linux server
      Linux-centric backup and recovery
        Linux backup and recovery overview
        Linux recovery options
        Choosing a tape drive for use by your Linux backup application
        Restricting iSeries tape drives that can be used by Linux
        Setting up an iSeries tape drive for use by Linux
        Formatting tape media for use by Linux
        Transferring control of a tape drive from i5/OS to Linux
        Transferring control of a tape drive from Linux to i5/OS
        Backing up files using Linux utilities and applications
      Troubleshooting integrated Linux servers
      Related information
    Linux in a logical partition
      What's new
      Printable PDF
      Plan to run Linux in a partition
        Server support
        Hosted and nonhosted partitions
        Virtual I/O
        Directly attached I/O
        Supported I/O adapters
        SCSI support
          Device parity protection
        Obtain Linux
        Order or upgrade a server
      Create a logical partition
        Configure a logical partition
        Assign I/O adapters
        Create a network server description and a network server storage space
        Configure the LAN console
        Connect the virtual console
        Install Linux
        Install Linux from CD-ROM images
        Start and stop the NWSD
        Start device parity protection
      Managing Linux
        Logical partition authority
        Display and change hardware configuration
          Display console log
          Display the operating environment
          Display reference code history
          Change host information
        Connect to LAN
          Directly attached LAN adapters
          Virtual Ethernet
            Use virtual Ethernet
            Enable virtual Ethernet
            Create an Ethernet line description
            Virtual Ethernet connectivity methods
              Proxy ARP
              Network Address Translation (NAT)
              TCP/IP Routing
        Print server configuration
        Dynamic movement of shared processor units
        Dynamically adding disks
        Network server description
          Link NWSSTG among multiple NWSDs
          Delete NWSDs
          Delete disk drives
          Network server description parameters
        Application support
          Access iSeries data using the Linux ODBC driver
          i5/OS NetServer support for Samba
          How to use SAMBA and NFS
        Back up and recover
          Backup options
          Use the shared, read-only storage space
          Sharing access to disks
          Clone Linux servers
          Save and restore hosted Linux files
          Save configuration data
          Back up the NWSD and disk drives
          Build a rescue image
          Use a rescue image
          Back up NWSDs
          Restore NWSDs
          Unlink disk drives
          Objects to save on i5/OS
        Start a logical partition
          IPL type for Linux
          Boot from an IPL source
          Recovering directly attached disks
      Troubleshoot
        Debug NWSD error messages
        Debug multitasking error
        System reference codes
        Recover network failure
      Related information
  Lotus software for i5/OS
    Lotus Domino for i5/OS
    Lotus Domino Document Manager for i5/OS
    Lotus Workflow
    IBM Integrated Domino Fax
    Lotus Enterprise Integrator
    Lotus QuickPlace
    Lotus Sametime
  Migration
    Upgrading your iSeries server
      Printable PDF
      iSeries upgrade concepts
        Upgrade terminology
        Upgrade process
        Partitioned-server upgrades
        Upgrade paths
      Upgrade planning
      Performing the upgrade on your iSeries
        Customizing your upgrade checklist
        Performing all upgrade tasks
          Adding or replacing a hardware feature
            Preparing to change the hardware feature
            Preparing to change the hardware feature for a partitioned server
            Performing the hardware feature change
            Performing resource management
            Performing resource management for a partitioned server
          Activating all standby processors
          Upgrading to i5/OS Version 5 Release 4
          Converting expansion units for a partitioned server
            Planning to convert the expansion unit
              SPD cabling
            Preparing to convert the expansion unit
              Resequencing SPCN addressing
              Documenting and preparing the server
                Printing disk configuration status
                Printing parity set configuration and status
                Displaying, verifying, and printing hardware resource information
                Assigning all unassigned I/O resources
                Removing failed or nonreporting resources
                Clearing nonreporting logical partitioning resources
                Changing the system value settings
            Performing the expansion unit conversion
            Performing resource management
              Resolving LPAR configuration error
              Reassigning buses and IOPs
              Cleaning up the server
              Renaming resources for each partition
          Upgrading the server
            Preparing to upgrade the server
            Preparing to upgrade the partitioned server
            Completing the server upgrade
              Performing the server upgrade
              Preparing the server for production
                System reference code (SRC) A900 2000 recovery
                Fixing hardware resource names after an upgrade
              Preparing the partitioned server for production
      Troubleshooting an iSeries upgrade
      Related information for iSeries upgrades
    Data migrations
      Printable PDF
      i5/OS data migration concepts
        Migration terminology
      Planning the i5/OS data migration
      Performing the migration
        Preparing for the migration
        Completing the migration
        Preparing for the migration from an iSeries system that does not support V5R4
        Completing the migration from an iSeries system that does not support V5R4
      Scenarios: Data migration
      Troubleshooting the data migration
      Related information for i5/OS data migration
  Networking
    HTTP Server
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Concepts
        Web Administration
        Context, directives, and the server area
        Content negotiation
        Virtual hosts
        Proxy server types
        Log formats
        Security tips
        Validation lists
        Kerberos
        User profiles and required authorities
        File compression
        Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
        Web Publishing with the PUT Method
        WebDAV
        Real time server statistics
        Highly available Web server cluster
        Web crawling
        Webserver search engine
        Triggered cache manager (TCM)
        Trigger messages
        ASF Jakarta Tomcat server
        WebSphere Application Server
      Scenarios
        Setting up HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
        Adding a new directory
        Adding user directories
        Adding cookie tracking
        Adding virtual hosts
        Adding password protection
        Adding dynamic content with server-side includes
        Adding Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protection
        Enabling single signon for HTTP Server
        Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process JSP file
        Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process Java servlet
        Setting up ASF Tomcat in-process War file
        Monitoring Web server activity with logs
      Tasks
        Getting started
        Installing and testing
        HTTP Server tasks
          Setting up additional MIME types
          Setting up content and language negotiation
          Setting up customized error messages
          Setting up directory indexing and directory listing
          Setting up environment variables
          Setting up highly available Web server cluster
          Setting up a cluster with CL commands
          Setting up welcome or index page
          Manually editing HTTP Server
          Managing HTTP Servers
          Managing addresses and ports
          Managing backup files
          Managing directories
          Managing a highly available server
          Managing ports for ADMIN server
          Managing server performance
        Compression tasks
          Setting up input decompression
          Setting up output compression
        FRCA tasks
          Setting up Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
        Log tasks
          Setting up logs
        Proxy tasks
          Setting up forward proxy
          Setting up reverse proxy
          Set up proxy chaining
        Search tasks
          Managing document lists
          Setting up thesaurus dictionary
          Managing thesaurus dictionary
          Managing search indexes
          Setting up document list
          Setting up options objects
          Managing Web crawlers
          Setting up URL mapping rules file
          Setting up URL object
          Setting up Webserver search engine
          Setting up validation lists
        Security tasks
          Setting up password protection
          Setting up SSL for ADMIN server
          Setting up to secure against denial of service
        Tomcat tasks
          Managin ASF Tomcat servers
          Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process JSP files
          Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process Java servlets
          Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process WAR files
        Triggered cache manager tasks
          Setting up triggered cache manager (TCM)
        WebDAV tasks
          Setting up WebDAV
        Web tasks
          Managing WebSphere Application Server
          Web Performance Monitor
          Web Performance Advisor
          Configure SSL for ADMIN wizard
          WebSphere Portal
        Virtual host tasks
          Setting up virtual hosts
      Programming
        API
          HTTP Server APIs
        Directives
        CGI
          Overview of CGI
          Environment variables
          Overview of High Availability CGI
          Guidelines for writing high availability CGIs
          Overview of Persistent CGI
          Common gateway interface (CGI)
          The CGI Process
          CGI Program Interface
          CGI Programs and Activation Groups
          Setting up CGI programs
          CGI in PASE
          How to enable the server to run CGI programs
          Troubleshooting your CGI programs
        Apache APR and APIs
        Regular expression notation
        Setting up third party modules
        Handlers
        Net.Data programs
        Java servlets and JSPs
      Troubleshooting
      Reference
        CL commands
        Environment variables
        Lotus Domino plug-in
        Server-side include commands
        Supported i5/OS file systems for Web content
        Time formats
      Related information
      Legal
    Network scenarios
      Printable PDFs
      Network planning worksheet
      Scenario: Setting up System i to communicate with LAN
        Reviewing planning worksheet
        Installing the TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities for i5/OS licensed program
        Configuring TCP/IP
        Testing TCP/IP
        Installing and configuring iSeries Access for Windows on your workstation
        Configuring printers on the LAN
        Testing network connections
        Securing your system
        Implementing system security recommendations
        Exploring TCP/IP services, applications, and protocols
      Scenario: Enabling remote connections
        Setting up certificate authority with Digital Certificate Manager
          Completing planning worksheets for DCM
          Starting IBM HTTP Server for i5/OS on System A
          Configuring System A as a certificate authority
          Creating digital certificate for System B
          Renaming .KDB and .RDB files on System B
          Changing certificate store password on System B
          Defining CA trust for i5/OS VPN key manager on System B
        Configuring VPN connection between the branch sales office and the corporate office
          Completing planning worksheets for VPN connection from the branch office to remote sales employees
          Configuring VPN on System A
          Configuring VPN on System B
          Activating filter rules on both systems
          Starting the VPN connection
          Testing VPN connection between endpoints
        Configuring VPN connection to remote users
          Completing planning worksheets for VPN connection from the branch office to remote sales people
          Configuring L2TP terminator profile for System A
          Starting receiver connection profile
          Configuring a VPN connection on System A for remote clients
          Updating VPN policies for remote connections from Windows XP and Windows 2000 clients
          Activating filter rules
          Configuring VPN on Windows XP client
          Testing VPN connection between endpoints
      Scenario: Creating a virtual Ethernet for interpartition communications
        Enabling the logical partitions to participate in a virtual Ethernet
        Creating the Ethernet line descriptions
        Turning on IP datagram forwarding
        Creating the interface to enable proxy ARP
        Creating the virtual Ethernet interface on partition A
        Creating the virtual Ethernet interface on partition B
        Creating the virtual Ethernet interface on partition C
        Creating the virtual Ethernet interface on partition D
        Creating the routes
        Verifying network communications
      Scenario: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
        Scenario details: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
          Step 1: Configuring the L2TP terminator profile for any interface on the partition that owns the modems
          Step 2: Configuring an L2TP originator profile on 10.1.1.74
          Step 3: Configuring an L2TP remote dial profile for 192.168.1.2
          Step 4: Testing the connection
    Network communications
      Get started with communications
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Networking concepts
          Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
          Advanced program-to-program communications
          Dependent LU requester support
          High-performance routing
          Systems Network Architecture
          TCP/IP
        Configure
          Create a network interface description
          Create a network server description
          Create a line description
        Optimize
          Improve wide area network performance
            Adjust WAN protocols for optimum iSeries server performance
            Adjust the WAN line speed for optimum iSeries server performance
            WAN configuration considerations for IOPs
          Improve local area network performance
            Adjust LANs for optimum communications performance
            Adjust LAN lines for optimum communications performance
            LAN line speed considerations for IOPs
          Improve data path performance
            Considerations for subsystem configuration for error recovery performance
            Communications performance considerations for interactive jobs
            Communications performance considerations for batch jobs
            Mix interactive and batch jobs on a WAN line
            AnyNet communications for the iSeries system
            Set up the AnyNet environment
            Performance considerations for AnyNet communications
            Enterprise Extender communications
            Migration from AnyNet to Enterprise Extender
            Subsystems
        Applications
          User written APPC applications
          Distributed data management (DDM)
          Application program interface (API) performance considerations
            Performance considerations for intersystem communications function
            Performance considerations for Common Programming Interface Communications
        Communicate with host systems
          Match iSeries system parameters for a host system
            Match iSeries system line description parameters for a host system
            Match iSeries system controller description parameters for a host system
            Match iSeries system device description parameters for a host system
            Match iSeries system mode and class-of-service description parameters for a host system
          Configure dependent LU requester (DLUR)
            Configure the host controller description
            Configure the device descriptions
        Communicate with a remote iSeries system
          Match iSeries system line description parameters for a remote iSeries system
          Match iSeries system controller description parameters for a remote iSeries system
          Match iSeries system device description parameters for a remote iSeries system
          Connect one iSeries server to another iSeries server
        Communicate with remote workstation controllers
          Match iSeries system parameters for 5494 controllers
            Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by token-ring
            Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by Ethernet
            Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by frame relay
            Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by SDLC
            Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by X.21
            Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by X.25
          Match iSeries system parameters for 3x74 controller
            Match iSeries system parameters for a 3174 controller
            Match iSeries system parameters for a 3274 controller
          Match iSeries system parameters for finance controllers
            Match iSeries system parameters for 470x finance controllers
            Match iSeries system parameters for FBSS finance controllers
          Match iSeries system parameters for retail controllers
            Match iSeries system parameters for 3651 retail controllers
            Match iSeries system parameters for 3684 retail controllers
            Match iSeries system parameters for 4680/4690 LINE parameter
            Match iSeries system parameters for 4680/4690 LINK parameter
            Match iSeries system parameters for 4684 retail controllers
        Networking standards
          Local area network standards
            Distributed data interface network
            Ethernet networks
            Token-ring networks
            Wireless network
          Wide area network standards
            Asynchronous communications
            Binary synchronous communications
            Frame relay networks
            Synchronous data link control network
            X.25 network
            X.21 network
        Troubleshoot
          Display message queues to solve communication problems
          Display the Product Activity Log to solve communication problems
          Display the Print Error Log to solve communication problems
            Job logs and communication problems
          Solve communication problems using communications trace
            Communications trace and communication problems
            Trace Common Programming Interface (CPI) Communications (TRCCPIC) command
          Solve communication problems using the system problem log
          Solve communication problems using status information
          Considerations for system tuning during error recovery
          Use error messages to aid in error recovery
          Solve communication problems using reason codes
      APPC, APPN, and HPR
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Plan your APPN and HPR network
          Select your APPC networking protocol
          Design an APPN and HPR network to optimize communications performance
        Configure APPC, APPN, and HPR
          Automatic configuration on LANs
            Determine parameters during automatic configuration
            Automatic creation and vary on of the controller description
            Automatic vary off and deletion of controller descriptions
            Communication considerations using model controllers
            Control automatic configuration
          Manual configuration for APPN and HPR
            Change network attributes
            Create an APPC controller description
            Create device descriptions for APPC connections
            Create APPN location lists
            Create mode descriptions
            Create a class-of-service description
          Configure Branch Extender support
          Connection network support
            Requirements for an APPN connection network
            Connection network configuration considerations
          Configuration considerations used to optimize error recovery performance
            General configuration considerations for improved error recovery performance
            Considerations for communications-related system values
            Considerations for network attributes that can affect APPC error recovery
            Considerations for line configuration settings that can affect error recovery
            Considerations for controller configuration descriptions that can affect error recovery
            Considerations for modes that can affect error recovery
            Considerations for jobs that can affect error recovery
          Connect a PC to iSeries using Personal Communications
          Configure APPC with VTAM
        Examples: APPC, APPN, and HPR configurations
          APPN configuration examples
            Two iSeries servers as end nodes using APPN
            Two iSeries servers as network nodes using APPN
            Three iSeries servers using APPN
            Two APPN networks with different network IDs linked together
            Multiple iSeries servers using APPN
          HPR configuration examples
            Two iSeries servers as network nodes using HPR
            Three iSeries servers using HPR
        Optimize APPN and HPR communication performance
          Performance considerations for APPN and HPR
          Optimize communications using high-performance routing
          APPN virtual controllers and communications performance
          Fine-tune configuration parameters for APPC performance
            Maximum length request/response unit size (MAXLENRU) parameter
            Maximum frame size (MAXFRAME) parameter
            Pacing (INPACING, OUTPACING, MAXINPACING) parameters
            Transmission priority (TMSPTY) parameter
        APPC, APPN, and HPR security
          Session-level security for APPN and HPR
          Protect your system in an APPN and HPR environment
            APPN filtering support
            Create a session endpoint filter
            Class of service (COS) routing
        Troubleshooting APPN and HPR
          Solve remote communication problems using STRPASTHR
          Solve communication problems using DSPAPPNINF
          Solve communication problems using WRKAPPNSTS
          Solve communications problems using communications trace
          Solve communication problems using session activity
          Find Systems Network Architecture sense codes
          APPN error log data
            Standard APPN diagnostic data
            APPN session setup states
            Optional APPN diagnostic data
      Ethernet
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Ethernet support
          Ethernet terminology
          Ethernet capabilities
            Line speed
            Duplex mode
            Gigabit and 10 Gigabit Ethernet
            Auto-negotiation
            Auto-sensing
          Establishment of a physical connection to your network
          Hardware requirements for Ethernet
          LAN IOA addresses
          Ethernet frame format
          Types of Ethernet frames sent
          Maximum Ethernet frame sizes
          Maximum LAN frame sizes
          LAN device connection
            LAN device identification
            SNA exchange identifiers
            LAN device connection initiation
          SNA connections to LAN protocols
            SNA service access points
        Configuring Ethernet support
          Configuring TCP/IP over Ethernet
          Configuring SNA over Ethernet
            Selecting a LAN IOA and creating the Ethernet line description
            Creating the SNA controller description
            Creating the SNA device description
            Varying on configuration objects for SNA
        Managing Ethernet support
          Using existing line descriptions with iSeries Navigator
            Changing your line description
            Assigning your line description to a TCP/IP interface
          Enabling objects to accept connections
            Varying on configuration objects for SNA
            Starting the TCP/IP interface
          Viewing the LAN IOA address
          Configuration object commands
          Tuning Ethernet performance
            Adjusting your LAN-frame size
            Remote bridges dropping frames
            Improvement of Gigabit and 10 Gigabit Ethernet performance
            SNA over Ethernet timing parameters
              LANCNNTMR and LANCNNRTY
              LANRSPTMR and LANFRMRTY
              LANACKTMR and LANACKFRQ
              LANINACTMR
              LANMAXOUT
              LANWDWSTP
              LANACCPTY
              Changing timing parameters
        Troubleshooting Ethernet
          Viewing QSYSOPR or other message queues
          Troubleshooting LANs
          Physical network problems
          Connection failure and controller descriptions
          Remote system connection failure
        Related information for Ethernet
      Frame relay
        Printable PDF
        Network connections for frame relay
        Physical environment for frame relay
        Connections for frame relay
          SNA direct connections
          IP direct connections
          Bridged connections for frame relay
          System connection without a frame-relay network
        Configuration objects for frame relay
        Frame-relay addressing
          Data link connection identifiers
          Adapter addresses for frame relay
        Routing characteristics for frame relay
        Maximum frame-size parameter requirements for frame relay
          Additional MAXFRAME parameter considerations
        Tuning frame-relay performance
        Local management interface
          Parameters that control exchanges of information over local management interface
          Local management interface exchanges
        Scenarios: Frame-relay configuration
          Scenarios: SNA direct connection for frame relay
            Scenario: SNA direct connection of two System i models
              Scenario details: Configuration for the System i model in Minneapolis
              Scenario details: Configuration for the System i model in Madison
            Scenario: SNA direct connection using a modem eliminator
              Scenario details: Configuration for SYSTEM1
              Scenario details: Configuration for SYSTEM2
            Scenario: SNA direct connection to a host system
          Scenarios: Bridged configuration for frame relay
            Scenario: Bridged connections to remote token-ring networks
              Scenario details: Creating the frame-relay network interface description
              Scenario details: Configuring the System i connection to a remote token-ring network through the 6611 Network Processor
              Scenario details: Configuring the System i connection to a remote token-ring network through a RouteXpander/2
            Scenario: Bridged connection to an Ethernet network
        Related information for frame relay
      OptiConnect
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Concepts
          OptiConnect connectivity advantages
          OptiConnect and System i clustering
          OptiConnect software capabilities
          How OptiConnect works
          OptiConnect hardware
            HSL OptiConnect
            Virtual OptiConnect
            SPD OptiConnect
            Mixed technology environments
          OptiConnect software
            Application structure
            OptiConnect components
            QSOC subsystem
            OptiConnect job descriptions
        Installing OptiConnect
          Software requirements
          Hardware requirements
          Installing OptiConnect software
          Verifying OptiConnect software installation
          Activating logical partitions for OptiConnect
            Activating logical partitions for Virtual OptiConnect
            Activating logical partitions for HSL OptiConnect
        Configuring OptiConnect
          Configuring fast path routing
          Configuring extended function path routing
          Customizing OptiConnect
            Routing SNADS over OptiConnect
            Initial library list
            Changing QUSER access authority
            QYYCDTSU job description
            QYYCMGR job description
            OptiConnect performance factors
          Advanced OptiConnect customization
            Routing SQL over OptiConnect
            Routing remote journals over OptiConnect
            Using the mode table
            Reloading the mode table
            Journaling OptiConnect transactions
            Submitting remote jobs
          Configuring TCP/IP over OptiConnect
            Features
            Defining the OptiConnect TCP/IP interface
            Configuring the TCP/IP interfaces for OptiConnect
            OptiConnect and IP forwarding
            Proxy ARP with OptiConnect
            Starting the OptiConnect IP interface
            Ending the OptiConnect IP interface
        Managing OptiConnect
          Starting OptiConnect
          Ending OptiConnect
          Considerations for starting and ending OptiConnect
          Getting information about OptiConnect activity
            Working with active jobs (WRKACTJOB)
            Working with OptiConnect activity (WRKOPCACT)
            Displaying OptiConnect link status (DSPOPCLNK)
            Working with hardware resources (WRKHDWRSC)
            Displaying hardware resources (DSPHDWRSC)
        Troubleshooting
          Basic troubleshooting procedure
          Re-establishing system connections when OptiConnect is installed
          OptiConnect error messages
          OptiConnect cluster diagnostics
        Related information
      Token ring
        Printable PDF
        Token-ring overview
          Supported token-ring functions
          Connection establishment between LAN devices
            How LAN devices identify themselves
              SNA exchange identifiers
            Which LAN device initiates the connection
              Dial mode (SNA)
              Answer mode (SNA)
          SNA connections to LAN protocols
            Your SNA service access points
          Maximum frame size of token ring
        Planning for token-ring support
          Maximum LAN frame size
          LAN IOA addresses
        Configuring token-ring support
          Configuring TCP/IP over token ring
          Configuring SNA over token ring
            Creating the token-ring line description
              Token-ring IOAs
              Selecting a LAN IOA
            Creating the SNA controller description
            Creating the SNA device description
          Examples: Configuring SNA over token ring
            Example: Connecting a system to another system
            Example: Connecting the system to itself
            Example: Connecting a system to a 3745 host
              Example: Creating a host physical configuration
              Example: Creating a host logical configuration
            Example: Connecting a system to a 3174 Model 1L gateway
              Example: Creating the NCP generation for a 3174 gateway
              Example: Connecting a system to a 3174 subsystem control unit
            Example: Creating parallel connections to a host
              Example: Configuring the physical and logical parallel connections on the host system
        Managing token-ring support
          Changing the line descriptions to use token ring
          Assigning the token-ring line description to a TCP/IP interface
          Enabling objects to accept connections
          Viewing the address of your LAN IOA
          Configuration object commands
        Tuning token-ring performance
          Adjusting your LAN-frame size
            Viewing the QSYSOPR message queue or other message queues
            Bridges dropping frames
            Token-ring line description commands
          Timing
            Timing parameters
              The LANCNNTMR and LANCNNRTY parameters
              The LANRSPTMR and LANFRMRTY parameters
              The LANACKTMR and LANACKFRQ parameters
              The LANINACTMR parameter
              The LANMAXOUT parameter
              The LANWDWSTP parameter
              The LANACCPTY parameter
            Changing timing parameters
        Troubleshooting token ring
          Troubleshooting LANs
          Why some LAN connections fail
          Why PCs do not connect to your system
          Understanding the token-ring address format
      Related information
    Networking security
      Cryptography
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Cryptography concepts
        4764 and 4758 Cryptographic Coprocessors
          Cryptographic hardware concepts
          Features
          Cryptographic Coprocessor scenarios
            Scenario: Protecting private keys with cryptographic hardware
            Scenario: Writing an i5/OS application to use the Cryptographic Coprocessor
          Planning for the Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Requirements
            Secure access
              Object authorities that are required for SAPI
          Configuring the Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Creating a device description
            Naming files to key store file
            Creating and defining roles and profiles
              Example: ILE C program for creating roles and profiles for your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE C program for enabling all access control points in the default role for your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for creating roles or profiles for your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for enabling all access control points in the default role for your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE C program for changing an existing profile for your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for changing an existing profile for your Coprocessor
            Setting the environment ID and clock
              Example: ILE C program for setting the environment ID on your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for setting the environment ID on your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE C program for setting the clock on your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for setting the clock on your Coprocessor
            Loading a function control vector
              Example: ILE C program for loading a function control vector for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for loading a function control vector for your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE C program for clearing a function control vector from your Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for clearing a function control vector from your Coprocessor
            Loading and setting a master key
              Example: ILE C program for loading a master key into your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for loading a master key into your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE C program for re-encrypting keys for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Configuring the Cryptographic Coprocessor for use with DCM and SSL
            Configuring the Cryptographic Coprocessor for use with i5/OS applications
          Migrating to the Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Migrating key store files from the IBM CCA Services for OS/400 PRPQ
              Example: EXPORTing keys
              Example: IMPORTing keys
            Migrating Cryptographic Support for system cross-domain key files
              Migrating keys: Method 1 (recommended)
                Using IMPORTER key-encrypting keys
              Migrating keys: Method 2
          Managing the Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Logging on or off of the Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE C program for logging on to your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for logging on to your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE C program for logging off of your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for logging off of your Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Query status or request information
              Example: Querying the status of your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: Requesting information from your Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Initializing a key store file
              Example: ILE C program for initializing a key store for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for initializing a key store for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Creating DES and PKA keys
              Example: Creating a DES key with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: Creating a PKA key with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Encrypting or decrypting a file
              Example: Encrypting data with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Working with PINs
              Example: Working with PINs on your Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Generating and verifying a digital signature
              Example: Signing a file with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: Verifying a digital signature with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Managing multiple Cryptographic Coprocessors
              Example: ILE C program for allocating a Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for allocating a Coprocessor
              Example: ILE C program for deallocating a Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for deallocating a Coprocessor
            Cloning master keys
              Example: ILE C program for setting the min and max values for master key shares in your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE RPG program for setting the min and max values for master key shares in your Cryptographic Coprocessor
              Example: ILE C program for generating a retained key pair for cloning master keys
              Example: ILE RPG program for generating a retained key pair for cloning master keys
              Example: ILE C program for registering a public key hash
              Example: ILE RPG program for registering a public key hash
              Example: ILE C program for registering a public key certificate
              Example: ILE RPG program for registering a public key certificate
              Example: ILE C program for certifying a public key token
              Example: ILE RPG program for certifying a public key token
              Example: ILE C program for obtaining a master key share
              Example: ILE RPG program for obtaining a master key share
              Example: ILE C program for installing a master key share
              Example: ILE RPG program for installing a master key share
              Example: ILE C program for listing retained keys
              Example: ILE RPG program for listing retained keys
              Example: ILE C program for deleting retained keys
              Example: ILE RPG program for deleting retained keys
        Troubleshooting the Cryptographic Coprocessor
          Reinitializing the Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Example: ILE C program for reinitializing the Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Example: ILE RPG program for reinitializing your Cryptographic Coprocessor
          Using the Hardware Service Manager
        2058 Cryptographic Accelerator
          Features
          Scenario: Enhancing system SSL performance
          Planning for the 2058 Cryptographic Accelerator
          Configuring the 2058 Cryptographic Accelerator
        Related information for cryptographic hardware
      Digital Certificate Manager (DCM)
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        DCM concepts
          Certificate extensions
          Certificate renewal
          Distinguished name
          Digital signatures
          Public-private key pair
          Certificate Authority (CA)
          Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Locations
          Certificate stores
          Cryptography
          IBM Cryptographic Coprocessors for System i
          Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
          Application definitions
          Validation
        DCM scenarios
          Scenario: Using certificates for external authentication
            Completing planning work sheets
            Creating a server or client certificate request
            Configuring applications to use SSL
            Importing and assigning the signed public certificate
            Starting applications in SSL mode
            (Optional): Defining a CA trust list for an application that requires
          Scenario: Using certificates for internal authentication
            Completing planning work sheets
            Configuring the human resources HTTP Server to use SSL
            Creating and operating a local CA
            Configuring client authentication for human resources Web server
            Starting the human resources Web server in SSL mode
            Installing a copy of the local CA certificate in a browser
            Requesting a certificate from the local CA
        Planning for DCM
          DCM set up requirements
          Backup and recovery considerations for DCM data
          Types of digital certificates
          Public certificates versus private certificates
          Digital certificates for SSL secure communications
          Digital certificates for user authentication
          Digital certificates and Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
          Digital certificates for VPN connections
          Digital certificates for signing objects
          Digital certificates for verifying object signatures
        Configuring DCM
          Starting Digital Certificate Manager
          Setting up certificates for the first time
            Creating and operating a local CA
              Managing user certificates
                Creating a user certificate
                Assigning a user certificate
                Managing user certificates by expiration
              Using APIs to programmatically issue certificates to users other than System i users
              Obtaining a copy of the private CA certificate
            Managing certificates from a public Internet CA
              Managing public Internet certificates for SSL communications sessions
              Managing public Internet certificates for signing objects
              Managing certificates for verifying object signatures
          Renewing an existing certificate
            Renewing a certificate from the local CA
            Renewing a certificate from an Internet CA
          Importing a certificate
        Managing DCM
          Using a local CA to issue certificates for other System i models
            Using a private certificate for SSL
            Using a private certificate for signing objects on a target system
          Managing applications in DCM
            Creating an application definition
            Managing the certificate assignment for an application
            Defining a CA trust list for an application
          Managing certificates by expiration
          Validating certificates and applications
          Assigning a certificate to applications
          Managing CRL locations
          Storing certificate keys on an IBM Cryptographic Coprocessor
            Using the coprocessor master key to encrypt the certificate private key
          Managing the request location for a PKIX CA
          Managing LDAP location for user certificates
          Signing objects
          Verifying object signatures
        Troubleshooting DCM
          Troubleshooting passwords and general problems
          Troubleshooting certificate store and key database problems
          Troubleshooting browser problems
          Troubleshooting HTTP Server for System i problems
          Troubleshooting assigning a user certificate
        Related information for DCM
      Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Enterprise Identity Mapping overview
        Enterprise Identity Mapping concepts
          EIM domain controller
          EIM domain
          EIM identifier
          EIM registry definitions
            System registry definitions
            Application registry definitions
            Group registry definitions
          EIM associations
            Lookup information
            Identifier associations
            Policy associations
              Default domain policy associations
              Default registry policy associations
              Certificate filter policy associations
                Certificate filters
          EIM lookup operations
            Lookup operation examples: Example 1
            Lookup operation examples: Example 2
            Lookup operation examples: Example 3
            Lookup operation examples: Example 4
            Lookup operation examples: Example 5
          EIM mapping policy support and enablement
          EIM access control
            EIM access control group: API authority
            EIM access control group: EIM task authority
          LDAP concepts for EIM
            Distinguished name
            Parent distinguished name
            LDAP schema and other considerations for EIM
          Enterprise Identity Mapping concepts
            i5/OS user profile considerations for EIM
            i5/OS auditing for EIM
            EIM enabled applications for i5/OS
        Enterprise Identity Mapping scenarios
        Planning for Enterprise Identity Mapping
          Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for eServer
            Enterprise Identity Mapping setup requirements for eServer
            Identifying needed skills and roles
            Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain
            Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain controller
            Developing an Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definition naming plan
            Developing an identity mapping plan
              Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping associations
              Developing an EIM identifier naming plan
            Enterprise Identity Mapping implementation planning worksheets
            Planning for Enterprise Identity mapping application development
          Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for i5/OS
            EIM installation prerequisites for System i
            Installing required iSeries Navigator options
            Backup and recovery considerations for EIM
        Configuring Enterprise Identity Mapping
          Creating and joining a new local domain
          Creating and joining a new remote domain
          Joining an existing domain
          Configuring a secure connection to the EIM domain controller
        Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping
          Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping domains
            Adding an EIM domain to the Domain Management folder
            Connecting to an EIM domain
            Enabling policy associations for a domain
            Testing EIM mappings
            Removing an EIM domain from the Domain Management folder
            Deleting an EIM domain and all configuration objects
          Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definitions
            Adding a system registry definition
            Adding an application registry definition
            Adding a group registry definition
            Adding an alias to a registry definition
            Defining a private user registry type in EIM
            Enabling mapping lookup support and the use of policy associations for a target registry
            Deleting a registry definition
            Removing an alias from a registry definition
            Adding a member to a group registry definition
          Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping identifiers
            Creating an EIM identifier
            Adding an alias to an EIM identifier
            Removing an alias from an EIM identifier
            Deleting an EIM identifier
            Customizing the EIM identifiers view
          Managing EIM associations
            Creating EIM associations
              Creating EIM identifier association
              Creating a policy association
                Creating a default domain policy association
                Creating a default registry policy association
                Creating a certificate filter policy association
            Adding lookup information to a target user identity
            Removing lookup information from a target user identity
            Displaying all identifier associations for an EIM identifier
            Displaying all policy associations for a domain
            Displaying all policy associations for a registry definition
            Deleting an identifier association
            Deleting a policy association
          Managing EIM user access control
          Managing EIM configuration properties
        Troubleshooting Enterprise Identity Mapping
          Troubleshooting domain controller connection problems
          Troubleshooting general EIM configuration and domain problems
          Troubleshooting EIM mapping problems
        Enterprise Identity Mapping APIs
        Related information for Enterprise Identity Mapping
      System i and Internet security
        Printable PDFs
        System i and Internet security considerations
        Planning Internet security
          The layered defense approach to security
          Security policy and objectives
          Scenario: JKL Toy Company e-business plans
        Security levels for basic Internet readiness
        Network security options
          Firewalls
          i5/OS packet rules
          Intrusion detection
          Choosing i5/OS network security options
        Application security options
          Web serving security
          Java Internet security
          E-mail security
          FTP security
        Transmission security options
          Using digital certificates for SSL
            SSL for secure Telnet access
            SSL for secure iSeries Access for Windows
          Virtual private network for secure private communications
      Intrusion detection
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Intrusion detection concepts
        Intrusion detection terminology
        Setting up an intrusion detection policy
          Editing the intrusion detection policy file
            Example: Traffic regulation policy
            Example: Restricted IP options policy
            Example: Perpetual echo policy
            Example: Intrusion detection scan policy
            Overview: Intrusion detection policy directives
            Details: Intrusion detection policy directives
          Backing up the intrusion detection policy file
        Writing intrusion detection programs
        Auditing intrusion detection activities
        Analyzing the auditing data
          Scan events
          Attack events
        Related information
      IP filtering and network address translation
        Printable PDF
        Scenarios: Packet rules
          Scenario: Mapping IP addresses using NAT
          Scenario: Creating filter rules to allow HTTP, Telnet, and FTP traffic
          Scenario: Combining NAT and IP filtering
          Scenario: Hiding IP addresses using masquerade NAT
        Packet rules concepts
          Packet rules terminology
          Packet rules versus other i5/OS security solutions
          Network address translation
            Static (map) NAT
            Masquerade (hide) NAT
            Masquerade (port-mapped) NAT
          IP filtering
            Sample filter statements
            IP packet header
          Organizing NAT rules with IP filter rules
          Organizing multiple IP filter rules
          Spoof protection
        Planning for packet rules
          Packet rules: User authority requirements
          Packet rules: System requirements
          Packet rules: Planning worksheet
        Configuring packet rules
          Accessing the packet rules editor
          Defining addresses and services
          Creating NAT rules
          Creating IP filter rules
          Defining IP filter interfaces
          Including files in packet rules
          Adding comments in the packet rules
          Verifying packet rules
          Activating packet rules
        Managing packet rules
          Deactivating packet rules
          Viewing packet rules
          Editing packet rules
          Backing up packet rules
          Journaling and auditing packet rules actions by packet rules
        Troubleshooting packet rules
        Related information
      Network authentication service
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Concepts
          Network authentication service terminology
          How does network authentication service work?
          Network authentication service protocols
          Network authentication service environment variables
        Scenarios
          Scenario: Setting up a Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
            Completing the planning work sheets
            Configuring Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
            Changing encryption values on i5/OS PASE Kerberos server
            Stopping and restarting Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
            Creating host principals for Windows 2000 and Windows XP workstations
            Creating user principals on the Kerberos server
            Adding System A service principal to the Kerberos server
            Configuring Windows 2000 and Windows XP workstations
            Configuring network authentication service
            Creating a home directory for users on System A
            Testing network authentication service
          Scenario: Configuring network authentication service
            Completing the planning work sheets
            Configuring network authentication service on System A
            Adding System A principal to the Kerberos server
            Creating a home directory for users on System A
            Testing network authentication service on System A
          Scenario: Setting up cross-realm trust
            Completing the planning work sheets
            Ensuring that the Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE on System B has started
            Creating a cross-realm trust principal on the i5/OS PASE Kerberos server
            Changing encryption values on i5/OS PASE Kerberos server
            Configuring the Windows 2000 server to trust SHIPDEPT.MYCO.COM
            Adding the SHIPDEPT.MYCO.COM realm to System A
          Scenario: Propagating network authentication service configuration across multiple systems
            Completing the planning work sheets
            Creating a system group
            Propagating system settings from the model system (System A) to System B and System C
            Configuring network authentication service on System D
            Adding the principals for endpoint systems to the Windows 2000 domain
          Scenario: Using Kerberos authentication between Management Central servers
            Completing the planning work sheets
            Setting the central system to use Kerberos authentication
            Creating MyCo2 system group
            Collecting system values inventory
            Comparing and updating Kerberos settings in iSeries Navigator
            Restarting Management Central server on the central system and target systems
            Adding Kerberos service principal to the trusted group file for each endpoint
            Verifying the Kerberos principals are added to the trusted group file
            Allowing trusted connections for the central system
            Repeating steps 4 through 6 for target systems
            Testing authentication on the endpoint systems
          Scenario: Enabling single sign-on for i5/OS
            Completing the planning work sheets
            Creating a basic single sign-on configuration for System A
            Configuring System B to participate in the EIM domain and configuring System B for network authentication service
            Adding both i5/OS service principals to the Kerberos server
            Creating user profiles on Systems A and B
            Creating home directories on Systems A and B
            Testing network authentication service on Systems A and B
            Creating EIM identifiers for two administrators, John Day and Sharon Jones
            Creating identifier associations for John Day
            Creating identifier associations for Sharon Jones
            Creating default registry policy associations
            Enabling registries to participate in lookup operations and to use policy associations
            Testing EIM identity mappings
            Configuring iSeries Access for Windows applications to use Kerberos authentication
            Verifying network authentication service and EIM configuration
            Post configuration considerations
        Planning network authentication service
          Planning a Kerberos server
          Planning realms
          Planning principal names
          Host name resolution considerations
            Resolving your host names
          Network authentication service planning work sheets
        Configuring network authentication service
          Configuring a Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
            Changing encryption values on Kerberos server
            Stopping and restarting the Kerberos server
            Creating host, user, and service principals
            Configuring Windows 2000 and Windows XP workstations
            Configuring a secondary Kerberos server
          Configuring network authentication service
            Adding i5/OS principals to the Kerberos server
            Creating a home directory
            Testing network authentication service configuration
        Managing network authentication service
          Synchronizing system times
          Adding realms
          Deleting realms
          Adding a Kerberos server to a realm
          Adding a password server
          Creating a trust relationship between realms
          Changing host resolution
          Adding encryption settings
          Obtaining or renewing ticket-granting tickets
            kinit
          Displaying credentials cache
            klist
          Managing keytab files
            keytab
          Changing Kerberos passwords
            kpasswd
          Deleting expired credentials cache files
            kdestroy
          Managing Kerberos service entries in LDAP directories
            ksetup
          Defining realms in the DNS database
          Defining realms in the LDAP server
            Defining schema on an LDAP server
        Troubleshooting
          Network authentication service errors and recovery
          Application connection problems and recovery
          API trace tool
            Setting up the API trace tool
            Accessing the API trace log file
          Troubleshooting Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
        Network authentication service commands
        Related information for network authentication service
      Object signing and signature verification
        Printable PDF
        Object signing concepts
          Digital signatures
          Signable objects
          Object signing processing
          Signature verification processing
          Code checker integrity verification function
        Object signing scenarios
          Scenario: Using DCM to sign objects and verify signatures
            Scenario details: Using DCM to sign objects and verify signatures
          Scenario: Using APIs to sign objects and verify object signatures
            Scenario details: Using APIs to sign objects and verify object signatures
          Scenario: Using iSeries Navigator Management Central to sign objects
            Scenario details: Using iSeries Navigator Management Central to sign objects
        Object signing and signature verification prerequisites
        Managing signed objects
          System values and commands that affect signed objects
          Save and restore considerations for signed objects
          Code checker commands to ensure signature integrity
          Verifying code checker function integrity
        Troubleshooting signed objects
          Troubleshooting object signing errors
          Troubleshooting signature verification errors
          Interpreting code checker verification error messages
        Related information for object signing and signature verification
      Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Scenarios
          Scenario: Securing a client connection to your Management Central server with SSL
            Configuration details: Secure a client connection to your Management Central server with SSL
          Scenario: Securing all connections to your Management Central server with SSL
            Configuration details: Secure all connections to your Management Central server with SSL
        SSL concepts
          History of SSL
          How SSL works
          Supported SSL and Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocols
          Server authentication
          Client authentication
        Planning SSL
        Application security with SSL
        Troubleshooting SSL
        Related information for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
      Single signon
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Single signon concepts
          Single signon overview
          Authentication
          Authorization
          Domains
          Identity mapping
          i5/OS enablement
          ISV enablement
        Single signon scenarios
          Scenario: Creating a single signon test environment
            Completing the planning work sheets
            Creating a basic single signon configuration for System A
            Adding System A service principal to the Kerberos server
            Creating home directory for John Day on System A
            Testing network authentication service configuration on System A
            Creating an EIM identifier for John Day
            Creating a source association and target association for the new EIM identifier
            Testing EIM identity mappings
            Configuring iSeries Access for Windows applications to use Kerberos authentication
            Verifying network authentication service and EIM configuration
            (Optional) Post configuration considerations
          Scenario: Enabling single signon for i5/OS
            Completing the planning work sheets
            Creating a basic single signon configuration for System A
            Configuring System B to participate in the EIM domain and configure System B for network authentication service
            Adding both i5/OS service principals to the Kerberos server
            Creating user profiles on System A and System B
            Creating home directories on System A and System B
            Testing network authentication service on System A and System B
            Creating EIM identifiers for two administrators, John Day and Sharon Jones
            Creating identifier associations for John Day
            Creating identifier associations for Sharon Jones
            Creating default registry policy associations
            Enabling registries to participate in lookup operations and to use policy associations
            Testing EIM identity mappings
            Configuring iSeries Access for Windows applications to use Kerberos authentication
            Verifying network authentication service and EIM configuration
            (Optional) Post configuration considerations
          Scenario: Propagating network authentication service and EIM across multiple systems
            Completing the planning work sheets
            Creating a system group
            Propagating system settings from the model system (System A) to System B and System C
            Completing the configurations for network authentication service and EIM on System B and System C
            Configuring network authentication service and EIM on the V5R2 or later system, System D
          Scenario: Configuring the Management Central servers for single signon
            Verifying that the domain appears in Domain Management
            Creating EIM identifiers
            Creating identifier associations
            Configuring the Management Central servers to use network authentication service
            Configuring the Management Central servers to use EIM
          Scenario: Enabling single signon for ISV applications
            Completing the planning prerequisite worksheet
            Writing a new application or change an existing application
            Creating a single signon test environment
            Testing your application
            ISV code examples
        Planning for single signon
          Requirements for configuring a single signon environment
          Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for i5/OS
          Single signon planning worksheets
        Configuring Single signon
        Managing Single signon
        Troubleshooting Single signon
        Related information
      Virtual Private Networking (VPN)
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        VPN concepts
          IP Security (IPSec) protocols
            Authentication Header
            Encapsulating Security Payload
            AH and ESP combined
          Key management
          Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol (L2TP)
          Network address translation for VPN
          NAT compatible IPSec with UDP
          IP Compression (IPComp)
          VPN and IP filtering
            VPN connections with no policy filters
            Implicit IKE
        VPN scenarios
          Scenario: Basic branch office connection
            Completing the planning worksheets
            Configuring VPN on System-A
            Configuring VPN on System-C
            Starting VPN
            Testing a connection
          Scenario: Basic business to business connection
            Completing the planning worksheets
            Configuring VPN on System-A
            Configuring VPN on System-C
            Activating packet rules
            Starting a connection
            Testing a connection
          Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
            Configuring VPN on System-A
            Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System-A
            Applying the l2tptocorp dynamic-key group to the toCorp PPP profile
            Configuring VPN on System-B
            Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System-B
            Activating packet rules
          Scenario: Firewall Friendly VPN
            Completing the planning worksheets
            Configuring VPN on Gateway-B
            Configuring VPN on System-E
            Starting Connection
            Testing the connection
          Scenario: Using network address translation for VPN
        Planning for VPN
          VPN setup requirements
          Determining what type of VPN to create
          VPN planning advisor
          Completing VPN planning worksheets
            Planning worksheet for dynamic connections
            Planning worksheet for manual connections
        Configuring VPN
          Configuring VPN connections with the New Connection wizard
          Configuring VPN security policies
            Configuring an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) policy
            Configuring a data policy
          Configuring a secure VPN connection
          Configuring a manual connection
          Configuring VPN packet rules
            Configuring the pre-IPSec filter rule
            Configuring a policy filter rule
            Defining an interface for the VPN filter rules
            Activating VPN packet rules
          Configure Traffic Flow Confidentiality (TFC)
          Configuring Extended Sequence Number (ESN)
          Starting a VPN connection
        Managing VPN
          Setting default attributes for your connections
          Resetting connections in error state
          Viewing error information
          Viewing attributes of active connections
          Viewing the VPN server trace
          Viewing VPN server job logs
          Viewing attributes of Security Associations (SA)
          Stopping a VPN connection
          Deleting VPN configuration objects
        Troubleshooting VPN
          Getting started with VPN troubleshooting
          Common VPN configuration errors and how to fix them
            VPN error message: TCP5B28
            VPN error message: Item not found
            VPN error message: PARAMETER PINBUF IS NOT VALID
            VPN error message: Item not found, Remote key server...
            VPN error message: Unable to update the object
            VPN error message: Unable to encrypt key...
            VPN error message: CPF9821
            VPN error: All keys are blank
            VPN error: Sign-on for a different system appears when using Packet Rules
            VPN error: Blank connection status in iSeries Navigator window
            VPN error: Connection has enabled status after you stop it
            VPN error: 3DES not a choice for encryption
            VPN error: Unexpected columns display in the iSeries Navigator window
            VPN error: Active filter rules fail to deactivate
            VPN error: The key connection group for a connection changes
          Troubleshooting VPN with the QIPFILTER journal
            QIPFILTER journal fields
          Troubleshooting VPN with the QVPN journal
            QVPN journal fields
          Troubleshooting VPN with the VPN job logs
            Common VPN Connection Manager error messages
          Troubleshooting VPN with the communications trace
        Related information for VPN
      Related information
    NetWare on iSeries
      Printable PDF
      NetWare Enhanced Integration advantages
      Install NetWare Enhanced Integration
        Software and hardware requirements for NetWare Enhanced Integration
      Configure NetWare Enhanced Integration
        Activate the TCP/IP protocol
          Configure TCP/IP for NetWare
        Install Novell NetWare patches on servers
        Install the NetWare Enhanced Integration NLM on servers
          Create installation diskettes for NetWare Enhanced Integration NLMs
          Load the NetWare Enhanced Integration NLM
        Create a QNETWARE user profile on NetWare servers
        Enable iSeries to automatically start authenticated connections
        Set up authentication entries
        Restart iSeries after installing NetWare Enhanced Integration
        Verify communications to the NLMs
        Define network server attributes
        Unlink and delete NetWare NWSDs when you upgrade the release level
      Manage NetWare server connections and authentication
        Authenticated connections process
        Manually start a connection to the NetWare server
          Details: Connections in a batch job or printing
        Create authentication entries
        NetWare Directory Services
        iSeries authentication entry commands
        Work with NetWare connections
        Work with your NetWare servers from iSeries
      Manage NetWare users from iSeries
        Advantages of managing NetWare users from iSeries
        User enrollment
          QNETWARE user profile
          Network server user attributes
          Profile characteristics
          NetWare object rights and attributes
          Use of multiple iSeries systems to enroll users
        Set up your NetWare servers for user enrollment
        Set up iSeries for user enrollment
        Create iSeries group and user profiles for NetWare servers
        Enroll iSeries users on NetWare
          Specify the default list of NDS trees
          Enroll users when iSeries does not store passwords
        Propagate profile changes to NetWare
        Check iSeries user enrollment status
        User enrollment and authentication commands
        End user enrollment
      Manage NetWare volumes from iSeries
        About NetWare volumes
        Access files in your NetWare volumes from iSeries
        Create a NetWare volume
        Change a NetWare volume
          Increase NetWare volume size
          Mount and remove NetWare volumes
        Display NetWare volumes
        Delete a NetWare volume
      Manage NetWare files from iSeries with QNetWare file system
        QNetWare directory structure
          Details: QNetWare file system
        Authorize users to files and directories
          Inherited Rights Filter and effective rights
          NetWare authority and ownership
        Change file or directory ownership
        Mount NetWare file systems
        Display information about particular file systems
        Copy objects
          Example: Copying a file to the QNetWare file system
          Example: Copying an iSeries database file that has packed decimal fields to the QNetWare file system
          Example: ILE C for iSeries program to copy an iSeries database file to QNetWare File System
        Considerations for using integrated file system APIs on the QNetWare file system
      Save and restore NetWare data from the QNetWare directory
        Save NetWare data through the QNetWare directory
        Restoring NetWare data through the QNetWare directory
      Print from iSeries to NetWare printers
        iSeries-to-NetWare printing environment
        Set up NetWare print support
        Start the print server function
        Use multiple NetWare print queues
        Create an output queue on iSeries for NetWare printers
        Start writers to the output queue
      Troubleshoot NetWare Enhanced Integration
        View job logs to analyze problems
          Details: Events that start the QNETWARE and QPRFSYNCH jobs
        User enrollment error codes
        Troubleshoot connection problems
        Troubleshoot system operator rights problems
        Troubleshoot communication problems
        Troubleshoot QNETWARE file system problems
    TCP/IP setup
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Internet Protocol version 6
        IPv6 overview
        Available IPv6 functions
        IPv6 concepts
          IPv6 address formats
          IPv6 address types
          Neighbor discovery
          Stateless address autoconfiguration
          Comparison of IPv4 and IPv6
        Scenario: IPv6
          Scenario: Creating an IPv6 local area network
        IPv6 troubleshooting
        Related information for IPv6
      Planning TCP/IP setup
        Gathering TCP/IP configuration information
        TCP/IP security considerations
      Installing TCP/IP
      Configuring TCP/IP
        Configuring TCP/IP for the first time
          Configuring TCP/IP using the EZ-Setup wizard
          Configuring TCP/IP using the character-based interface
            Configuring a line description (Ethernet)
            Turning on IP datagram forwarding
            Configuring an interface
            Configuring a route
            Defining local domain and host names
            Defining a host table
            Starting TCP/IP
        Configuring IPv6
          Hardware and software requirements
          Configuring IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration
          Creating a new IPv6 interface
        Configuring TCP/IP when the operating system is in restricted state
      Customizing TCP/IP with iSeries Navigator
        Changing TCP/IP settings
        Configuring IPv6
        Adding IPv4 interfaces
        Adding IPv6 interfaces
        Adding IPv4 routes
        Adding IPv6 routes
      TCP/IP techniques connecting virtual Ethernet to external LANs
        Proxy Address Resolution Protocol method
          Step 1: Enabling logical partitions to participate in a virtual Ethernet
          Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 270 and 8xx
            Creating the Ethernet line descriptions on systems other than models 270 and 8xx
          Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
          Step 4: Creating the interface to enable proxy ARP
          Step 5: Creating the virtual TCP/IP interface on partition A
          Step 6: Creating the virtual TCP/IP interface on partition B
          Step 7: Creating a preferred interface list
          Step 8: Creating the route
          Step 9: Verifying network communications
        Network address translation method
          Step 1: Enabling logical partitions to participate in a virtual Ethernet
          Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 270 and 8xx
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on systems other than models 270 and 8xx
          Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
          Step 4: Creating the interfaces
          Step 5: Verifying network communications
          Step 6: Creating packet rules
          Step 7: Verifying network communications
        TCP/IP routing method
          Step 1: Enabling logical partitions to participate in a virtual Ethernet
          Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 270 and 8xx
            Creating Ethernet line descriptions on systems other than models 270 and 8xx
          Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
          Step 4: Creating the interfaces
        Virtual Ethernet considerations
      Related information for TCP/IP setup
    TCP/IP applications, protocols, and services
      BOOTP
        Printable PDF
        Configuring the BOOTP server
        Changing BOOTP attributes
        Working with the BOOTP table
      Connecting to the Internet
      DHCP
        Printable PDF
        DHCP concepts
          DHCP client/server interaction
          Leases
          Relay agents and routers
          DHCP client support
          BOOTP
          Dynamic updates
          DHCP options lookup
        Examples: DHCP
          Example: Simple DHCP subnet
          Example: Multiple TCP/IP subnets
          Example: DHCP and multihoming
          Example: DNS and DHCP on the same System i
          Example: DNS and DHCP on different System i models
          Example: PPP and DHCP on a single System i
          Example: DHCP and PPP profile on different System i models
        Planning for DHCP
          Security considerations
          Network topology considerations
        Configuring DHCP
          Configuring the DHCP server and BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
            Configuring or viewing the DHCP server
            Starting or stopping the DHCP server
            Configuring the DHCP server to be started automatically
            Accessing the DHCP server monitor
            Configuring the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
            Starting or stopping the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
            Configuring the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent to be started automatically
          Configuring clients to use DHCP
            Enabling DHCP for Windows Me clients
              Checking the DHCP lease for Windows Me clients
            Enabling DHCP for Windows 2000 clients
              Checking the MAC address and DHCP lease
              Updating DNS A records
            Enabling DHCP for Windows XP clients
              Checking the MAC address and DHCP lease
              Updating DNS A records
          Configuring DHCP to send dynamic updates to DNS
            Disabling DNS dynamic updates
        Managing leased IP addresses
        Troubleshooting DHCP
          Gathering detailed DHCP error information
            Tracing the DHCP server
          Problem: Clients are not receiving an IP address or their configuration information
          Problem: Duplicate IP address assignments on the same network
          Problem: DNS records are not being updated by DHCP
          Problem: DHCP job log has DNS030B messages with error code 3447
        Related information for DHCP
      IBM Directory Server for iSeries (LDAP)
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Directory Server concepts
          Directories
          Distinguished names (DNs)
          Suffix (naming context)
          Schema
            IBM Directory Server schema
            Common schema support
            Object classes
            Attributes
              Common subschema elements
              The objectclass attribute
              The attributetypes attribute
              The IBMAttributeTypes attribute
              Matching rules
              Indexing rules
                Indexing rules specifications for attributes
              Attribute syntax
            Object identifier (OID)
            The subschema entries
            The IBMsubschema object class
            Schema queries
            Dynamic schema
            Disallowed schema changes
            Schema checking
            iPlanet compatibility
            Generalized and UTC time
          Recommended practices for directory structure
          Publishing
          Replication
            Replication overview
            Replication terminology
            Replication agreements
            How replication information is stored in the server
            Security considerations for replication information
            Replication in a high availability environment
          Realms and user templates
          Search parameters
          National language support (NLS) considerations
          Language tags
          LDAP directory referrals
          Transactions
          Directory Server security
            Auditing
            Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) with the Directory Server
            Kerberos authentication with the Directory Server
            Groups and roles
              Static groups
              Dynamic groups
              Nested groups
              Hybrid groups
              Determining group membership
              Group object classes for nested and dynamic groups
              Group attribute types
              Roles
            Administrative access
            Proxy authorization
            Access control lists
              Filtered access control lists
              The access control attribute syntax
              EntryOwner
              Propagation
              Access evaluation
              Subtree replication considerations
              Example of defining the ACIs and entry owners
              Example of changing the ACI and entry owner values
              Example of deleting the ACI and entry owner values
              Example of retrieving the ACI and entry owner values
            Ownership of LDAP directory objects
            Password policy
            Password policy tips
            Authentication
            Denial of service
          Operating system projected backend
            User projected directory information tree
            LDAP operations
            Administrator and replica bind DNs
            User projected schema
            Read access to projected users
          Directory Server and i5/OS journaling support
          Unique attributes
          Operational attributes
          Server caches
            Attribute cache
            Filter cache
            Entry cache
            ACL cache
          Controls and extended operations
          Save and restore considerations
        Getting started with Directory Server
          Migration considerations
            Migrating to V5R4 from V5R3 or V5R2
            Migrating data from V4R4 ,V4R5, or V5R1 to V5R4
              Upgrading from V4R4, V4R5, or V5R1 to an interim release
              Saving the database library and installing V5R4
            Migrating a network of replicating servers
            Kerberos service name change
          Planning your Directory Server
          Configuring the Directory Server
          Populating the directory
          Web administration
            Set up Web administration for the first time
            Web administration tool
        Scenarios
          Scenario: Setting up a Directory Server
          Scenario: Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
        Administering Directory Server
          General administration tasks
            Starting the Directory Server
            Stopping the Directory Server
            Checking the status of the Directory Server
            Checking jobs on the Directory Server
            Managing server connections
            Managing connection properties
            Enabling event notification
            Specifying transaction settings
            Changing the port or IP address
            Specifying a server for directory referrals
            Adding and removing Directory Server suffixes
            Granting administrator access to projected users
            Enabling language tags
            Tracking access and changes to the LDAP directory
            Enabling object auditing for the Directory Server
            Adjusting search settings
            Enabling or disabling read access to projected users
            Publishing information to the Directory Server
            Importing an LDIF file
            Exporting an LDIF file
            Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
          Administrative group tasks
            Enabling the administrative group
            Adding, editing, and removing administrative group members
          Search limit group tasks
            Creating a search limit group
            Changing a search limit group
            Copying a search limit group
            Removing a search limit group
          Proxy authorization group tasks
            Creating a proxy authorization group
            Changing a proxy authorization group
            Copying a proxy authorization group
            Removing a proxy authorization group
          Unique attribute tasks
            Determining if an attribute can be specified as unique
            Creating a unique attributes list
            Removing an entry from the unique attributes list
          Performance tasks
            Setting database connections and cache settings
            Configuring attribute cache
            Configuring transaction settings
          Replication tasks
            Creating a master-replica topology
            Creating a master-forwarder-replica topology
            Creating a master server (replicated subtree)
            Creating a new replica server
            Creating replication credentials
            Creating a replica server
            Coping data to the replica
            Adding supplier information to the new replica
            Creating a complex replication topology
            Creating a complex topology with peer replication
            Promoting a server to be a peer
            Setting up a gateway topology
            Changing replication properties
            Adding supplier information
            Editing supplier information
            Removing supplier information
            Creating replication schedules
            Creating a daily replication schedule
            Managing replication queues
            Setting up replication over a secure connection
          Topology tasks
            Viewing the topology
            Adding a replica
            Editing an agreement
            Moving or promoting a server
            Demoting a master
            Replicating a subtree
            Editing a subtree
            Removing a subtree
            Quiescing the subtree
            Editing access control lists
          Security property tasks
            Password tasks
              Setting password policy properties
              Setting password lockout properties
              Setting password validation properties
              Viewing password policy attributes
              Overriding password policy attributes
            Enabling SSL and Transport Layer Security on the Directory Server
            Enabling Kerberos authentication on the Directory Server
            Configuring DIGEST-MD5 authentication on the Directory Server
          Schema tasks
            Viewing object classes
            Adding an object class
            Editing an object class
            Copying an object class
            Deleting an object class
            Viewing attributes
            Adding an attribute
            Editing an attribute
            Copying an attribute
            Deleting an attribute
            Copying the schema to other servers
          Directory entry tasks
            Browsing the directory tree
            Adding an entry
            Adding an entry containing attributes with language tags
            Deleteing an entry
            Editing an entry
            Copying an entry
            Editing access control lists
            Adding an auxiliary object class
            Deleting an auxiliary class
            Changing group membership
            Searching the directory entries
            Changing binary attributes
          User and group tasks
            User tasks
              Adding users
              Finding users within the realm
              Editing a user's information
              Copying a user
              Removing a user
            Group tasks
              Adding groups
              Finding groups within the realm
              Editing a group's information
              Copying a group
              Removing a group
          Realm and user template tasks
            Creating a realm
            Creating a realm administrator
            Creating a template
            Adding the template to a realm
            Creating groups
            Adding a user to the realm
            Realm tasks
              Adding a realm
              Editing a realm
              Removing a realm
              Editing ACLs on the realm
            Template tasks
              Adding a user template
              Editing a template
              Removing a template
              Editing ACLs on the template
          Access control list (ACL) tasks
            Viewing access rights for a specific effective ACL
            Viewing effective owners
            Adding , editing. and removing nonfiltered ACLs
            Adding , editing. and removing filtered ACLs
            Adding or removing owners
        Reference
          Command line utilities
            ldapmodify and ldapadd
            ldapdelete
            ldapexop
            ldapmodrdn
            ldapsearch
            ldapchangepwd
            ldapdiff
            Using SSL with the LDAP command line utilities
          LDAP data interchange format (LDIF)
            Example: LDIF
            Version 1 LDIF support
            Examples: Version 1 LDIF
          Directory Server configuration schema
            Directory information tree
            Attributes
          Object identifiers (OIDs)
          IBM Tivoli Directory Server equivalence
          Default configuration for Directory Server
        Troubleshooting Directory Server
          Monitoring errors and access with the Directory Server job log
          Using TRCTCPAPP to help find problems
          Using the LDAP_OPT_DEBUG option to trace errors
          GLEnnnn message identifiers
          Common LDAP client errors
            ldap_search: Timelimit exceeded
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Operations error
            ldap_bind: No such object
            ldap_bind: Inappropriate authentication
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Insufficient access
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Cannot contact LDAP server
            [Failing LDAP operation]: Failed to connect to SSL server
          Password policy-related errors
          Troubleshooting the QGLDCPYVL API
        Related information
      Domain Name System
        Printable PDF
        DNS concepts
          Understanding zones
          Understanding DNS queries
          DNS domain setup
          Dynamic updates
          BIND 8 features
          DNS resource records
          Mail and MX records
        Examples: DNS
          Example: Single DNS server for an intranet
          Example: Single DNS server with Internet access
          Example: DNS and DHCP on the same System i
          Example: Splitting DNS over firewall
        Planning for DNS
          Determining DNS authorities
          Determining domain structure
          Planning security measures
        DNS requirements
          Determining if DNS is installed
          Installing DNS
        Configuring DNS
          Accessing DNS in iSeries Navigator
          Configuring name servers
            Creating a name server instance
            Editing DNS server properties
            Configuring zones on a name server
          Configuring DNS to receive dynamic updates
          Importing DNS files
            Record validation
          Accessing external DNS data
        Managing DNS
          Verifying the DNS function is working
          Managing security keys
          Managing DNS keys
          Managing dynamic update keys
          Accessing DNS server statistics
            Accessing server statistics
            Accessing an active server database
          Maintaining DNS configuration files
          Advanced DNS features
            Changing DNS attributes
            Starting or stopping DNS servers
            Changing debug values
        Troubleshooting DNS
          Logging DNS server messages
          Changing DNS debug settings
        Related information for DNS
      E-mail
        Printable PDF
        E-mail concepts
          SMTP on i5/OS
          POP on i5/OS
        Scenario: Sending and receiving e-mail locally
        Planning for e-mail
          Controlling e-mail access
            Controlling SMTP access
            Controlling POP access
          Preventing e-mail access
            Preventing SMTP access
              Preventing SMTP from starting when TCP/IP starts
              Preventing access to SMTP ports
              Holding SNADS queues
            Preventing POP access
              Preventing POP from starting when TCP/IP starts
              Preventing access to POP ports
        Configuring e-mail
          Accessing e-mail servers with iSeries Navigator
          Configuring TCP/IP for e-mail
          Configuring SMTP and POP servers for e-mail
            Configuring the SMTP server
            Configuring the POP server
          Enrolling e-mail users
          Starting and stopping e-mail servers
            Starting the e-mail servers
            Stopping the e-mail servers
          Configuring a dial-up mail connection profile
          Configuring the ISP Dial-up Connection wizard
          Scheduling batch ISP e-mail jobs
          Configuring the SMTP server for dial-up mail retrieval
          Supporting multiple domains
          Securing e-mail
            Sending e-mail through a router or firewall
            Restricting relays
              Accepting relay messages from POP clients
              Using relay restriction and connection restriction functions together
            Restricting connections
            Filtering e-mail to prevent virus proliferation
        Sending and receiving e-mail
          Setting up POP e-mail clients
          QtmmSendMail API
          JavaMail
          Sending spooled files as PDF files
          Using LDAP for addresses
          Using SNADS to send e-mail
            Setting up headers to differentiate between recipients
            Supporting Internet addressing for the SNDDST command
            Attaching files
          Using SNADS to receive e-mail
        Managing e-mail
          Checking e-mail servers
          Removing POP e-mail users
          Preventing large e-mail messages from splitting
          Supporting Delivery Status Notification
          Hosting a Domino and SMTP server on the same system
          Hosting Domino LDAP and Directory Server on the same system
          Managing SMTP server performance
            Changing values for the SMTP server
            Changing values for the SMTP client
            Selecting new subsystem for SMTP server jobs
        E-mail reference information
          Mail server journal entries
          SMTP
          POP
        Troubleshooting e-mail
          Determining problems with e-mail
          Checking component journals
          Tracking undelivered e-mail
          Solving problems with the QtmmSendMail API
            Checking the API call
            Checking the MIME file
            Checking mail server framework jobs
        Related information for e-mail
      FTP
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Scenarios: FTP
          Scenario: Transferring a file from a remote host
          Scenario: Securing FTP with SSL
            Configuration details
              Creating and operating a local CA on the MyCo system
              i5/OS FTP: Enabling SSL for MyCo's FTP server
              Exporting a copy of MyCo's local CA certificate to a file
              Creating an *SYSTEM certificate store on TheirCo's system
              Importing MyCo's local CA certificate into TheirCo's *SYSTEM certificate store
              Specifying MyCo's local CA as a trusted CA for TheirCo's FTP client
        Configuring the FTP server on i5/OS
          Configuring FTP server in iSeries Navigator
          Configuring FTP servers for graphical FTP clients and Web tools
            File and directory entries in i5/OS format
            Files and directory entries in UNIX-style format
          Configuring anonymous FTP
            Preparing for anonymous FTP
            Writing exit programs for anonymous FTP
            Creating an i5/OS user profile: ANONYMOUS
            Creating a public library or directory
            Installing and registering exit programs
              Installing exit programs
              Registering exit programs
        Securing FTP on i5/OS
          Preventing FTP server access on i5/OS
            Preventing the FTP server from starting automatically on i5/OS
            Preventing access to FTP ports on i5/OS
          Controlling FTP access on i5/OS
          Using SSL to secure the FTP server on i5/OS
            Creating a local CA on i5/OS
            Associating a certificate with the FTP server on i5/OS
            Requiring client authentication for the FTP server
            Enabling SSL on the FTP server
          Securing FTP clients with TLS or SSL
          Managing access using FTP exit programs
          Managing access using iSeries Navigator
          Monitoring incoming FTP users
        Managing the FTP server
          Starting and stopping the FTP server
          Setting the number of available FTP servers
          Improving FTP server performance with configurable subsystem support
        Using the FTP client on the System i platform
          Starting and stopping a client session
          Server timeout considerations
          Transferring files with FTP
          Running FTP in unattended mode using a batch job on i5/OS
            Simple example: Batch FTP
            Complex example: Batch FTP
              Example: Creating a CL program to start FTP
              Example: Creating the FTP input file (FTCPDMS)
              Example: CL program for submitting the FTPBATCH job
              Example: Checking the FTP output file for errors
            Example: Network description for batch FTP
        FTP reference information
          FTP server subcommands on i5/OS
          FTP client subcommands on i5/OS
          FTP exit programs
            Request validation exit point: client and server
              Example: FTP client or server request validation exit program in CL code
              Example: FTP server request validation exit program in ILE RPG code
              VLRQ0100 exit point format
                VLRQ0100 exit point format usage notes
            FTP server logon exit point
              Example: FTP Server Logon exit program in CL code
              Example: FTP server logon exit program in C code
              Example: FTP server logon exit program in ILE RPG code
              TCPL0100 exit point format
                TCPL0100 format usage notes
              TCPL0200 exit point format
              TCPL0300 exit point format
            Removing exit programs
          Data transfer methods
            Transferring files that contain packed decimal data between System i platforms
            Transferring *SAVF files
            Transferring QDLS documents
            Transferring root, QOpenSys, QDLS, and QOPT files
            Transferring files using QfileSvr.400
            Transferring QSYS.LIB files
              Receiving text files to QSYS.LIB
            Considerations for creating files before transferring them into QSYS.LIB
            CCSID conversions
              Specifying mapping tables
              CCSID code page tagging for i5/OS files
              NLS considerations for FTP
          File systems and naming conventions
          i5/OS file systems that are supported by FTP
          Status messages from the FTP server
          FTP server syntax conventions
          FTP client syntax conventions
            Enclosing subcommand parameters
            File names for client-transfer subcommands
            Naming files for transfer
        Troubleshooting File Transfer Protocol
          Determining problems with FTP
          Materials required for reporting FTP problems
          Tracing the FTP server
          Tracing the FTP client
          Working with FTP server jobs and job log
      IP filtering and network address translation
        Printable PDF
        Scenarios: Packet rules
          Scenario: Mapping IP addresses using NAT
          Scenario: Creating filter rules to allow HTTP, Telnet, and FTP traffic
          Scenario: Combining NAT and IP filtering
          Scenario: Hiding IP addresses using masquerade NAT
        Packet rules concepts
          Packet rules terminology
          Packet rules versus other i5/OS security solutions
          Network address translation
            Static (map) NAT
            Masquerade (hide) NAT
            Masquerade (port-mapped) NAT
          IP filtering
            Sample filter statements
            IP packet header
          Organizing NAT rules with IP filter rules
          Organizing multiple IP filter rules
          Spoof protection
        Planning for packet rules
          Packet rules: User authority requirements
          Packet rules: System requirements
          Packet rules: Planning worksheet
        Configuring packet rules
          Accessing the packet rules editor
          Defining addresses and services
          Creating NAT rules
          Creating IP filter rules
          Defining IP filter interfaces
          Including files in packet rules
          Adding comments in the packet rules
          Verifying packet rules
          Activating packet rules
        Managing packet rules
          Deactivating packet rules
          Viewing packet rules
          Editing packet rules
          Backing up packet rules
          Journaling and auditing packet rules actions by packet rules
        Troubleshooting packet rules
        Related information
      iSeries NetServer
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDFs
        iSeries NetServer versus iSeries Access for Windows
          Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows PCs
            Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows 2000
            Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows XP
            Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows Server 2003
            Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows Vista
        Accessing iSeries NetServer with Linux and Samba client support
        Getting started
          Requirements
          Configuring i5/OS for NetServer
          Configuring and connecting your PC client
            iSeries NetServer User Datagram Protocol broadcasts
            iSeries NetServer and Domain Name System management
              Connecting your PC client with DNS
              Configuring your PC client with DNS
                Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows 2000
                Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows XP
                Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows Server 2003
                Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows Vista
            iSeries NetServer and Windows Internet Naming Service management
              Connecting your PC client with WINS
              Configuring your PC client with WINS
                Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows 2000
                Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows XP
                Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows Server 2003
                Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows Vista
              Configuring iSeries NetServer with the address of the network WINS server
            PC client LMHOSTS static configuration files
          Finding iSeries NetServer on the network
        Administering iSeries NetServer
          Viewing and configuring iSeries NetServer properties
          Enabling iSeries NetServer support for Kerberos V5 authentication
            Installing iSeries Navigator Security option
            Starting iSeries NetServer Configuration wizard
            Additional configuration requirements for Kerberos V5 authentication enablement
          Changing the iSeries NetServer server name
          Disabled user profiles
            Displaying disabled user profiles
            Enabling a disabled user profile
          Starting and stopping iSeries NetServer
          Administering subsystems for iSeries NetServer
          Setting the guest user profile for iSeries NetServer
          Viewing iSeries NetServer status
          Viewing a list of iSeries NetServer shared objects
            Viewing a list of iSeries NetServer shared objects using iSeries Navigator
            Viewing a list of iSeries NetServer shared objects using Windows clients
          Viewing and configuring iSeries NetServer shared object properties
          Viewing shared object status
          Viewing a list of iSeries NetServer sessions
          Viewing iSeries NetServer session properties
          Viewing iSeries NetServer session connection status
          Stopping an iSeries NetServer session
        File shares
          Creating an iSeries NetServer file share
          Controlling access to iSeries NetServer file shares
          Stopping file sharing
          Accessing file shares from a Windows client
        Print shares
          Creating a print share
          PC client print device drivers for use with print shares
          Stopping print sharing
          Using print shares with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Vista client
        Domain logon support
          iSeries NetServer and client PC configuration
          Logon server setup
          Logon server home directories
          Roaming profiles
            Configuring user profiles from Windows 2000 and Windows XP clients
            Mandatory profiles
            Roaming profile issues
          Logon scripts
          Policy serving
          Browsing support
          Tips and techniques
          Troubleshooting the logon server
        iSeries NetServer security
          User profile authority requirements
          Guest user profiles
          Hiding iSeries NetServer from the network
          Requiring clients to sign requests
        Using Windows messenger service with iSeries NetServer
          Configuring the clients
            Configuring clients on Windows 2000 and Windows XP
            Configuring clients on Windows Server 2003
            Configuring clients on Linux
          Enabling iSeries NetServer for messaging specific to Windows
          Associated i5/OS messages
          Displaying a log of the message send attempts
          Sending custom messages through iSeries NetServer
        Tips and techniques
          iSeries NetServer does not appear in Windows My Network Places
          iSeries NetServer fails to start
          Starting iSeries NetServer at initial program load
          iSeries NetServer security: Guest versus nonguest
        API guides
        Backup and recovery of configuration and share information
        Troubleshooting iSeries NetServer
          Troubleshooting user profile connections
          Troubleshooting file share directory paths
          Troubleshooting print share problems
          Troubleshooting print problems when using guest support
          Troubleshooting PC client connection problems
          Troubleshooting file share problems
          Troubleshooting print device driver problems
          Troubleshooting iSeries NetServer using the QSYSOPR message queue
          Troubleshooting iSeries NetServer location on the network
          Troubleshooting iSeries NetServer using Windows messenger service
      HTTP Server
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Concepts
          Web Administration
          Context, directives, and the server area
          Content negotiation
          Virtual hosts
          Proxy server types
          Log formats
          Security tips
          Validation lists
          Kerberos
          User profiles and required authorities
          File compression
          Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
          Web Publishing with the PUT Method
          WebDAV
          Real time server statistics
          Highly available Web server cluster
          Web crawling
          Webserver search engine
          Triggered cache manager (TCM)
          Trigger messages
          ASF Jakarta Tomcat server
          WebSphere Application Server
        Scenarios
          Setting up HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
          Adding a new directory
          Adding user directories
          Adding cookie tracking
          Adding virtual hosts
          Adding password protection
          Adding dynamic content with server-side includes
          Adding Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protection
          Enabling single signon for HTTP Server
          Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process JSP file
          Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process Java servlet
          Setting up ASF Tomcat in-process War file
          Monitoring Web server activity with logs
        Tasks
          Getting started
          Installing and testing
          HTTP Server tasks
            Setting up additional MIME types
            Setting up content and language negotiation
            Setting up customized error messages
            Setting up directory indexing and directory listing
            Setting up environment variables
            Setting up highly available Web server cluster
            Setting up a cluster with CL commands
            Setting up welcome or index page
            Manually editing HTTP Server
            Managing HTTP Servers
            Managing addresses and ports
            Managing backup files
            Managing directories
            Managing a highly available server
            Managing ports for ADMIN server
            Managing server performance
          Compression tasks
            Setting up input decompression
            Setting up output compression
          FRCA tasks
            Setting up Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
          Log tasks
            Setting up logs
          Proxy tasks
            Setting up forward proxy
            Setting up reverse proxy
            Set up proxy chaining
          Search tasks
            Managing document lists
            Setting up thesaurus dictionary
            Managing thesaurus dictionary
            Managing search indexes
            Setting up document list
            Setting up options objects
            Managing Web crawlers
            Setting up URL mapping rules file
            Setting up URL object
            Setting up Webserver search engine
            Setting up validation lists
          Security tasks
            Setting up password protection
            Setting up SSL for ADMIN server
            Setting up to secure against denial of service
          Tomcat tasks
            Managin ASF Tomcat servers
            Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process JSP files
            Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process Java servlets
            Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process WAR files
          Triggered cache manager tasks
            Setting up triggered cache manager (TCM)
          WebDAV tasks
            Setting up WebDAV
          Web tasks
            Managing WebSphere Application Server
            Web Performance Monitor
            Web Performance Advisor
            Configure SSL for ADMIN wizard
            WebSphere Portal
          Virtual host tasks
            Setting up virtual hosts
        Programming
          API
            HTTP Server APIs
          Directives
          CGI
            Overview of CGI
            Environment variables
            Overview of High Availability CGI
            Guidelines for writing high availability CGIs
            Overview of Persistent CGI
            Common gateway interface (CGI)
            The CGI Process
            CGI Program Interface
            CGI Programs and Activation Groups
            Setting up CGI programs
            CGI in PASE
            How to enable the server to run CGI programs
            Troubleshooting your CGI programs
          Apache APR and APIs
          Regular expression notation
          Setting up third party modules
          Handlers
          Net.Data programs
          Java servlets and JSPs
        Troubleshooting
        Reference
          CL commands
          Environment variables
          Lotus Domino plug-in
          Server-side include commands
          Supported i5/OS file systems for Web content
          Time formats
        Related information
        Legal
      Quality of service
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Concepts
          Differentiated service
            Prioritized classes: How to classify network traffic
            Setting priorities: How to handle the classes
            Traffic conditioners
          Integrated service
            Traffic control functions
            Integrated service types
            Token bucket and bandwidth limits
            Integrated service using differentiated service markings
          Inbound admission policy
          Class of service
            Using codepoints to assign per-hop behaviors
            Average connection rate and burst limits
          QoS APIs
            QoS API connection-oriented functional flow
            QoS API connectionless functional flow
            QoS sendmsg() API extensions
          Directory server
            Keywords
            Distinguished name
        Scenarios: Quality of service policies
          Scenario: Limiting browser traffic
            Scenario details: Creating the differentiated service policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Secure and predictable results (VPN and QoS)
            Scenario details: Setting up a host-to-host VPN connection
            Scenario details: Creating the differentiated service policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Limiting inbound connections
            Scenario details: Creating the inbound admission policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying your policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Predictable B2B traffic
            Scenario details: Creating the integrated service policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Dedicated delivery (IP telephony)
            Scenario details: Creating the integrated service policy
            Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
            Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
            Scenario details: Changing properties
          Scenario: Monitoring current network statistics
            Scenario details: Opening QoS within iSeries Navigator
            Scenario details: Creating a differentiated service policy
            Scenario details: Completing a new class of service
            Scenario details: Monitoring your policy
            Scenario details: Changing values
            Scenario details: Monitoring the policy again
        Planning for QoS
          Quality of Service (QoS) planning advisor
          Authority requirements
          System requirements
          Service level agreement
          Network hardware and software
        Configuring QoS
          Configuring QoS with wizards
          Configuring directory server
          Ordering QoS policies
        Managing QoS
          Accessing QoS help in iSeries Navigator
          Backing up QoS policies
          Copying an existing policy
          Editing QoS policies
          Monitoring QoS
        Troubleshooting QoS
          Journaling QoS policies
            Viewing the journal entries on the monitor
            Viewing the journal entries through the output file
          Logging QoS server jobs
          Monitoring system transactions
          Trace TCP applications
            Examples: Reading the trace output
        Related information for QoS
      Remote Access Services: PPP connections
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        PPP concepts
          What is PPP
          Connection profiles
          Group policy support
        Scenarios: Remote access using PPP connections
          Scenario: PPP and DHCP on a single iSeries server
          Scenario: DHCP and PPP profile on different iSeries servers
          Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
          Scenario: Connecting your system to a PPPoE access concentrator
          Scenario: Connecting remote dial-in clients to your system
          Scenario: Connecting your office LAN to the Internet with a modem
          Scenario: Connecting your corporate and remote networks with a modem
          Scenario: Authenticating dial-up connections with RADIUS NAS
          Scenario: Managing remote user access to resources using group policies and IP filtering
          Scenario: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
            Scenario details: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
              Step 1: Configuring the L2TP terminator profile for any interface on the partition that owns the modems
              Step 2: Configuring an L2TP originator profile on 10.1.1.74
              Step 3: Configuring an L2TP remote dial profile for 192.168.1.2
              Step 4: Testing the connection
        Planning PPP
          Software and hardware requirements
          Connection alternatives
            Analog telephone lines
            Digital service and Digital Data Services
            Switched-56
            Integrated Services Digital Network
            T1/E1 and fractional T1 connections
            Frame relay
            L2TP (tunneling) support for PPP connections
              Voluntary tunnel
              Compulsory tunnel model - incoming call
              Compulsory tunnel model - remote dial
              L2TP multi-hop connection
            PPPoE (DSL) support for PPP connections
          Connection equipment
            Modems
            CSU/DSU
            ISDN terminal adapters
              ISDN terminal adapter suggestions
              ISDN terminal adapter restrictions
          IP address handling
            IP packet filtering
            IP address management strategy
          System authentication
            Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol with MD5
            Extensible Authentication Protocol
            Password Authentication Protocol
            Remote Authentication Dial In User Service overview
            Validation list
          Bandwidth considerations for multilink
        Configuring PPP
          Creating a connection profile
            Protocol type: PPP or Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP)
            Mode selections
              Switched line
              Leased line
              L2TP (virtual line)
              PPPoE line
            Link configuration
              Single line
              Line pool
              Multiple-connection profile support
                Remote IP address pools
          Configuring your modem for PPP
            Configuring a new modem
            Setting modem command strings
            Example: Configuring an ISDN terminal adapter
            Associating a modem with a line description
          Configuring a remote PC
          Configuring Internet access through the AT&T Global Network
          Connection wizards
          Configuring a group access policy
          Applying IP packet filtering rules to a PPP connection
          Enabling RADIUS and DHCP services for connection profiles
        Managing PPP
          Setting properties for PPP connection profiles
          Monitoring PPP activity
        Troubleshooting PPP
        Related information for PPP
      REXEC
        Printable PDF
        Changing attributes
        REXEC command considerations
        Selecting a command processor
        REXEC connection usage
          For i5/OS CL command processing
          For Qshell and spawned path command processing
        Spooled output considerations
        Client considerations
        REXEC server jobs and job names
        Creating REXEC server spooled job logs
        Exit points for controlling REXEC server
          RXCS0100
        Determining problems with REXEC
          Materials required for reporting REXEC problems
          Getting a copy of a REXEC server job log
          Tracing the REXEC server
      RouteD
        Printable PDF
        RouteD configuration commands
        RouteD attribute commands
        Work with RouteD Configuration command
        Scenario: RouteD configuration
        RIP_INTERFACE statement
          Supply values
          DIST_ROUTES_IN
          Metric
          Community
          Additional parameters
            BLOCK
            FORWARD
            FORWARD.COND
            NOFORWARD
      Simple Network Time Protocol
        Printable PDF
        SNTP concepts
          SNTP client
          SNTP server
        Scenario: Synchronizing clocks with i5/OS
          Configuring System A as an SNTP client and server
          Configuring your firewall to allow SNTP traffic
          Configuring the SNTP client on other systems in the network
          Specifying SNTP as your time maintenance application
          Starting SNTP manually
        Configuring SNTP
        Troubleshooting SNTP
          Logging SNTP activity
      TCP/IP routing and workload balancing
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        TCP/IP routing functions by release
        Packet processing
        General routing rules
        Routing connectivity methods
          Routing with point-to-point connections
          Proxy Address Resolution Protocol routing
            Transparent subnets
          Dynamic routing
          Route binding
          Classless Inter-Domain Routing
          Routing with virtual IP
          Fault tolerance
          Routing with network address translation
            Masquerade NAT
              Inbound masquerade NAT processing (response and other)
              Outbound masquerade NAT processing
            Dynamic NAT
            Static NAT
          Routing with OptiConnect and logical partitions
            TCP/IP and OptiConnect
            Routing with virtual OptiConnect and logical partitions
        TCP/IP workload balancing methods
          DNS-based load balancing
          Duplicate route-based load balancing
        Scenario: Adapter failover using virtual IP and proxy ARP
          Failover using automatic interface selection
          Failover using a preferred interface list
        Related information for TCP/IP routing and workload balancing
      TCP/IP subnet calculator advisor
      Telnet
        Printable PDF
        Telnet scenarios
          Telnet scenario: Telnet server configuration
          Telnet scenario: Cascaded Telnet sessions
            System request processing scenarios
            Using a group job
          Telnet scenario: Securing Telnet with SSL
            Configuration details for securing Telnet with SSL
        Planning for the Telnet server
          Virtual device descriptions
          Telnet security
            Preventing Telnet access
            Controlling Telnet access
        Configuring the Telnet server
          Starting the Telnet server
          Setting the number of virtual devices
            Automatically configuring virtual devices
            Creating your own virtual devices
          Restricting privileged users to specific devices and limiting sign-on attempts
          Setting the session keep-alive parameter
          Assigning devices to subsystems
          Activating the QSYSWRK subsystem
          Creating user profiles
          i5/OS supported emulation types
            Configuring Telnet server for 5250 full-screen mode
            Configuring Telnet server for 3270 full-screen mode
              Supported 3270 terminal types
            Configuring Telnet server for VTxxx full-screen mode
          Securing Telnet with SSL
            Configuring SSL on the Telnet server
              Removing port restrictions
              Assigning a certificate to the Telnet server
              Enabling client authentication for the Telnet server
                Example: Enabling client authentication for a PC5250 session
              Enabling SSL on the Telnet server
            SSL initialization and handshake
        Managing the Telnet server
          Configuring Telnet printer sessions
            Requirements for Telnet printer sessions
              Telnet server print support to iSeries Access for Windows Telnet client
          Ending the Telnet server session
          Ending device manager jobs
          Using Telnet exit point programs
            Device initialization exit program
              Telnet exit point format INIT0100: Required parameter group
              INIT0100: Format of user description information
              INIT0100: Format of device description information
              INIT0100: Format of connection description information
            Device termination exit program
            Examples: Telnet exit programs
        Managing the Telnet client
          Controlling Telnet server functions from the client
          5250 Telnet client sessions
            Starting a Telnet client session
          3270 Telnet client sessions
            Starting a 3270 Telnet client session
            3270 full-screen considerations
            Using a display station
            3270 keyboard mapping for Telnet servers
          VTxxx Telnet client sessions
            Starting a VTxxx Telnet client session
            VTxxx full screen considerations
            VTxxx emulation options
            VTxxx key values
              VTxxx national language support
              VTxxx national mode
              Numeric keypad
              Editing keypad
              VTxxx key values by 5250 function
              VT220 workstation operating modes
              VT220 top-row function keys
              VT100 and VT220 control character keywords
          Establishing a cascaded Telnet session
            Moving between cascaded Telnet sessions
          Ending a Telnet client session
        Troubleshooting the Telnet problems
          Determining problems with Telnet
            Pinging your host server
          Troubleshooting emulation types
          Troubleshooting your Telnet SSL server
            Checking system status
            Checking for an active SSL listener
            Checking the Telnet job log
            SSL return codes
          TRCTCPAPP service program outputs
          Materials needed to report Telnet problems
          Automatically generated diagnostic information
        Related information for Telnet
      Trivial File Transfer Protocol
        Printable PDF
        Configuring TFTP for clients
        Changing TFTP attributes
        Server ports and client ports
        TFTP Transfer Size option
        TFTP Subnet Broadcast option
          Client-to-server TFTP Read Request options
          Server-to-client TFTP option acknowledgment
          Server-to-client broadcast data packets
        Exit points for controlling TFTP server
      User-defined servers
      Virtual Private Networking (VPN)
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        VPN concepts
          IP Security (IPSec) protocols
            Authentication Header
            Encapsulating Security Payload
            AH and ESP combined
          Key management
          Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol (L2TP)
          Network address translation for VPN
          NAT compatible IPSec with UDP
          IP Compression (IPComp)
          VPN and IP filtering
            VPN connections with no policy filters
            Implicit IKE
        VPN scenarios
          Scenario: Basic branch office connection
            Completing the planning worksheets
            Configuring VPN on System-A
            Configuring VPN on System-C
            Starting VPN
            Testing a connection
          Scenario: Basic business to business connection
            Completing the planning worksheets
            Configuring VPN on System-A
            Configuring VPN on System-C
            Activating packet rules
            Starting a connection
            Testing a connection
          Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
            Configuring VPN on System-A
            Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System-A
            Applying the l2tptocorp dynamic-key group to the toCorp PPP profile
            Configuring VPN on System-B
            Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System-B
            Activating packet rules
          Scenario: Firewall Friendly VPN
            Completing the planning worksheets
            Configuring VPN on Gateway-B
            Configuring VPN on System-E
            Starting Connection
            Testing the connection
          Scenario: Using network address translation for VPN
        Planning for VPN
          VPN setup requirements
          Determining what type of VPN to create
          VPN planning advisor
          Completing VPN planning worksheets
            Planning worksheet for dynamic connections
            Planning worksheet for manual connections
        Configuring VPN
          Configuring VPN connections with the New Connection wizard
          Configuring VPN security policies
            Configuring an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) policy
            Configuring a data policy
          Configuring a secure VPN connection
          Configuring a manual connection
          Configuring VPN packet rules
            Configuring the pre-IPSec filter rule
            Configuring a policy filter rule
            Defining an interface for the VPN filter rules
            Activating VPN packet rules
          Configure Traffic Flow Confidentiality (TFC)
          Configuring Extended Sequence Number (ESN)
          Starting a VPN connection
        Managing VPN
          Setting default attributes for your connections
          Resetting connections in error state
          Viewing error information
          Viewing attributes of active connections
          Viewing the VPN server trace
          Viewing VPN server job logs
          Viewing attributes of Security Associations (SA)
          Stopping a VPN connection
          Deleting VPN configuration objects
        Troubleshooting VPN
          Getting started with VPN troubleshooting
          Common VPN configuration errors and how to fix them
            VPN error message: TCP5B28
            VPN error message: Item not found
            VPN error message: PARAMETER PINBUF IS NOT VALID
            VPN error message: Item not found, Remote key server...
            VPN error message: Unable to update the object
            VPN error message: Unable to encrypt key...
            VPN error message: CPF9821
            VPN error: All keys are blank
            VPN error: Sign-on for a different system appears when using Packet Rules
            VPN error: Blank connection status in iSeries Navigator window
            VPN error: Connection has enabled status after you stop it
            VPN error: 3DES not a choice for encryption
            VPN error: Unexpected columns display in the iSeries Navigator window
            VPN error: Active filter rules fail to deactivate
            VPN error: The key connection group for a connection changes
          Troubleshooting VPN with the QIPFILTER journal
            QIPFILTER journal fields
          Troubleshooting VPN with the QVPN journal
            QVPN journal fields
          Troubleshooting VPN with the VPN job logs
            Common VPN Connection Manager error messages
          Troubleshooting VPN with the communications trace
        Related information for VPN
      Related information
    TCP/IP troubleshooting
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      TCP/IP troubleshooter
      Troubleshooting tools and techniques
        Tools to verify your network structure
          Netstat
            Using Netstat from a character-based interface
              Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Interfaces
              Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Routes
              Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Connections
            Using Netstat from iSeries Navigator
              Using Netstat from iSeries Navigator: Interfaces
              Using Netstat from iSeries Navigator: Routes
              Using Netstat from iSeries Navigator: Connections
          Ping
            Using Ping from a character-based interface
              Pinging the loopback interface on your system
              Pinging your own system
              Pinging the interface on a network not directly attached to your local network
            Using Ping from iSeries Navigator
              Pinging the loopback interface on your system
              Pinging your own system
              Pinging the interface on a network not directly attached to your local network
            Common error messages
            PING parameters
          Trace route
            Using trace route from a character-based interface
            Using trace route from iSeries Navigator
        Tools for tracing data and jobs
          Communications trace
            Planning a communications trace
            Performing a communications trace
              Starting a communications trace
              Ending a communications trace
              Dumping a communications trace
              Printing a communications trace
              Viewing the contents of a communications trace
              Reading a communications trace
              Deleting a communications trace
            Tools for analyzing a communication trace
              Installing the Communication Trace Analyzer
              Starting the Communications Trace Analyzer
            Additional communications trace functions
              Checking a communications trace
              Programmatically checking storage space
          Trace connection
          Trace TCP/IP application
          Job trace
            Starting a job trace
            Re-creating the problem
            Ending a job trace
            Printing a job trace
            Deleting a job trace
            Advanced job trace functions
              Multiple generic traces
              Trace type information is cumulative
          Advanced trace function: Watch support
            Scenarios: Using watch support with traces
              Scenario: Using watch support with a communications trace
              Scenario: Using watch support with a job trace
            Watch parameters
            Using watch exit programs
              Example: Watch exit program
              Example: Modifying the exit program
            Traces that use watch support
        Troubleshooting tips
          Server table
          Checking jobs, job logs, and message logs
            Verifying that necessary jobs exist
              Verifying jobs from a character-based interface
              Verifying jobs from iSeries Navigator
            Checking the job logs for error messages and other indication of problems
              Checking job logs using the character-based interface
              Checking job logs using iSeries Navigator
            Changing the message logging level on job descriptions and active jobs
              Changing the message logging level from a character-based interface
              Changing the message logging level from iSeries Navigator
            Other job considerations
          Checking for active filter rules
          Verifying system startup considerations for networking
            Starting subsystems
            Starting TCP/IP
              Starting TCP/IP using the character-based interface
              Starting TCP/IP using iSeries Navigator
            Starting interfaces
            Starting servers
              Starting servers from a character-based interface
              Starting servers from iSeries Navigator
            Timing considerations
          Varying on lines, controllers, and devices
          Verifying the logical partition configuration
            Verifying the LPAR configuration from a character-based interface
            Verifying the LPAR configuration from iSeries Navigator
          Troubleshooting IPv6–related problems
        Advanced troubleshooting tools
          Licensed Internal Code logs
          Trace Internal (TRCINT) command
          Product activity log
          IOP dump
          Process dump
            Call stack dump
            Full job dump
      Troubleshooting problems related to specific applications
    Windows environment on iSeries
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Concepts
        Integrated server overview
        Advantages
        Terminology
        Hardware
          IXS and IXA attached servers
          iSCSI attached servers
            iSCSI attached server overview
            Basic single server support
            Multiple server support
            Advanced iSCSI support
            Diskless booting over iSCSI
            Remote server and service processor discovery
          Windows console
        Considerations
        Performance
          iSeries storage spaces versus dedicated disks
          Storage space balancing
          iSCSI attached server performance
          Virtual Ethernet
        Networking
          Service Processor Connection
          iSCSI network
          Point to point virtual Ethernet
          Virtual Ethernet networks
          External networks
        Software
          Integrated xSeries Server (IXS) and Integrated xSeries Adapter (IXA) attached xSeries servers
          iSCSI attached xSeries and BladeCenter servers
          iSCSI attached xSeries and BladeCenter servers with security
        High availability
        Security
          IXSs and IXA attached systems
          iSCSI attached systems
        User and group
          Types of user configurations
          User enrollment templates
          Password considerations
      Install and configure
        Hardware requirements
        Software requirements
        Prepare for the installation of integrated Windows servers
          Memory requirements
          Time synchronization
          Configure i5/OS TCP/IP
          iSeries Access
          Enable iSeries NetServer
          Create a guest user profile for iSeries NetServer
        Install IBM i5/OS Integrated Server Support
        Plan for the installation of Windows server
          Plan for iSCSI hardware installation
            Plan the boot mode for your hosted system iSCSI HBA
            Create a Service processor configuration and Remote system configuration
            Plan your service processor connection
            Configure the service processor discovery method on your iSeries server
          Network server descriptions
          Installation worksheet for OS/400 parameters
          Compare FAT, FAT32, and NTFS file systems
          Tip: Find resource names when you have multiple integrated servers
          Supported language versions
        Install Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003
          Prepare iSCSI hardware for Windows installation
            Initialize service processor security
            Create and start a network server host adapter
          Start the installation from the i5/OS console
          Continue the installation from the integrated Windows server console
          Complete the server installation
          Upgrade the IBM iSeries Integration for Windows Server licensed program
          Upgrade the integrated Windows server side of the IBM iSeries Integration licensed program
          Migrate to 2890 Integrated xSeries Server hardware
          Migrate to iSCSI attached servers
          Windows Cluster Service
            Install Windows Cluster service
              Install Windows Cluster service on a new Windows server
              Install Windows Cluster service on an existing server
            Prepare Windows before installing Windows Cluster service
            Install Windows Cluster service on Windows
              Install Windows Cluster service on Windows 2000
              Install Windows Cluster service on Windows 2003
          Enabling Kerberos with a Windows Server 2003 Active Directory Server
          Install the ATI Radeon 7000M video device drivers for Windows 2000 on the 2892-002 Integrated xSeries Server
          Adjust hardware acceleration for Windows Server 2003 on the 2892-002 or 4812-001 Integrated xSeries Server
          Respond to error messages during installation
        Set an integrated Windows server to automatically vary on with TCP/IP
        Code fixes
          Types of code fixes
          Synchronize software level using Windows server console
          Synchronize software level using iSeries Navigator
          Synchronize software level using a remote command
      Manage virtual Ethernet and external networks
        Configure IP address, gateway and MTU values
        Configure virtual Ethernet networks
        Configure inter-partition virtual Ethernet networks
        Explore point-to-point virtual Ethernet networks
        External networks
          Install network adapter drivers and add adapter address information to Windows server
        Remove network adapters
      Administer connections to iSCSI attached servers
        Work with iSCSI configuration objects
          Manage network server host adapters
            Create a network server host adapter object
            Create a network server host adapter object based on another one
            Display network server host adapter properties
            Change network server host adapter properties
            Start a network server host adapter
            Stop a network server host adapter
            Delete a network server host adapter
          Manage remote system network server configurations
            Create a remote system configuration object
            Create a remote system configuration object based on another one
            Display remote system configuration properties
            Change remote system configuration properties
            Display remote system status
            Delete a remote system configuration object
          Manage service processor network server configurations
            Create a service processor configuration object
            Create a service processor configuration object based on another one
            Display service processor configuration properties
            Change service processor configuration properties
            Initialize a service processor
            Delete a service processor configuration object
          Manage connection security network server configurations
            Create a connection security configuration object
            Create a connection security configuration object based on another one
            Display connection security configuration properties
            Change connection security configuration properties
            Delete a connection security object
        Configure security between i5/OS and hosted systems
          Configure CHAP
          Configure IPSec
          Configure service processor SSL
            Automatic SSL initialization
            Manual SSL initialization
          Service processor password
          Configure a firewall
        Manage iSCSI host bus adapters
          Hot spare between iSCSI local host adapters
          Manage iSCSI HBA usage
            Share an iSCSI HBA among multiple hosted servers
            Spreading workload over multiple iSCSI HBAs
            Using multiple iSCSI HBAs for redundancy
            Manage iSCSI HBA allocation at the Windows side of the iSCSI network
            Use the qvnimap command to view iSCSI HBA allocation
            Display information about virtual Ethernet adapters
          Configuring multipath I/O
            Configuring the Windows operating system for multipath I/O
            Configuring integrated servers for multipath I/O
          Maximum transmission unit (MTU) considerations
            Configuring virtual Ethernet for maximum performance on iSCSI networks that support frames larger than 1500 bytes
            Configuring virtual Ethernet for iSCSI networks that have a maximum frame size that is less than 1500 bytes
            Configuring virtual Ethernet to support unusual non-TCP applications that do not negotiate MTU
          Integrated DHCP server
        Remote server discovery and management
          Verify that IBM Director Server is installed and running
          Configure remote server and service processor discovery
            Service processor discovery configuration
            Dynamic IP addressing (DHCP)
            Service processor discovery methods
              Service Location Protocol (SLP) using multicast addressing
              Discovery by IP address
              Discovery by host name
          Use the MM or RSA II web interface
      Administer integrated Windows servers
        Start and stop an integrated server
          Start and stop using iSeries Navigator
          Start and stop using the character-based interface
          Shutdown from the Windows server console
          How to safely shutdown your iSeries when integrated Windows servers are present
        Connect to the 4812 IXS virtual serial console
        View or change configuration information
        Message logging
        Run integrated Windows server commands remotely
          Guidelines for submitting remote commands
          SBMNWSCMD and file level backup support for Kerberos v5 and EIM
        Hot spare between server hardware
      Manage storage
        i5/OS storage management
          Disk drives for integrated Windows servers
          Predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
        Administer integrated Windows server disk drives from OS/400
          Access the i5/OS integrated file system from an integrated server
          Obtain information about integrated server disk drives
          Add disk drives to integrated Windows servers
            Create an integrated server disk drive
            Link a disk drive to an integrated server
            Format integrated server disk drives
          Copy a disk drive
          Expand a disk drive
          Expand a system drive
          Unlink integrated Windows server disk drives
          Delete integrated Windows server disk drives
        Use Windows disk management programs with integrated Windows servers
      Share devices
        Determine the device description and hardware resource names for iSeries devices
        Use iSeries optical drives with integrated Windows servers
        Use iSeries tape drives with integrated Windows servers
          Install tape device drivers
          Format a tape on i5/OS for use with integrated Windows servers
          Allocate the iSeries tape drive to an integrated Windows server
          Return control of a tape drive from an integrated Windows server to the iSeries
          Supported iSeries tape drives
          Identify iSeries tape devices for applications
        Transfer control of the iSeries tape and optical drives between integrated Windows servers
        Print from an integrated Windows server to iSeries printers
      Administer Windows server users from i5/OS
        Enroll a single user using iSeries Navigator
        Enroll an i5/OS group using iSeries Navigator
        Enroll users using the character-based interface
        Create user templates
        Specify a home directory in a template
        Changing the LCLPWDMGT user profile attribute
        Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
        End user enrollment
        End group enrollment
        The QAS400NT user
        Preventing enrollment and propagation to an integrated Windows server
      Back up and recover
        Back up of the NWSD and disk drives associated with an integrated Windows server
          Back up the NWSD of an integrated Windows server
          Back up the NWSH of an iSCSI attached integrated Windows server
          Back up iSCSI NWSCFGs and validation lists
          Back up predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers created on V4R5 and later OS/400 systems
          Back up user-defined disk drives for an integrated Windows server
          Save and restore user enrollment information
          What objects to save and their location on OS/400
        Back up individual integrated Windows server files and directories
          File-level backup restrictions
          Preliminary administrator setup tasks
            Create shares on integrated Windows servers
            Adding members to QAZLCSAVL
            Ensure iSeries NetServer and the integrated Windows server are in same domain
          Save your files
            Example: How to address parts of an integrated Windows server
          Windows Backup utility
        Restore an integrated server's NWSD and disk drives
          Restore predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
          Restore user-defined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
          Restore integrated Windows server NWSDs
        Restore integrated Windows server NWSHs for iSCSI attached servers
        Restore integrated Windows server NWSCFGs for iSCSI attached servers
        Recover integrated Windows server files
      Uninstall
        Delete an integrated Windows server's NWSD
        Delete an integrated Windows server's line descriptions
        Delete TCP/IP interfaces associated with an integrated Windows server
        Delete controller descriptions associated with an integrated Windows server
        Delete device descriptions associated with an integrated Windows server
        Delete network server configurations associated with an iSCSI integrated Windows server
        Delete the IBM iSeries Integrated Server Support licensed program
      Troubleshoot
        Check message and job logs
          Monitor Job
          Additional logs and messages for iSCSI-attached servers
        Problems with integrated Windows servers
          Blue screen errors
          A full integrated server system drive
          Optical device problems
            Locked optical device for a failed server
          Tape problems
            Verify that the tape drive device driver is loaded
          Problems starting an integrated Windows server
            Problems hot sparing between servers
          Problems sharing hosted system hardware
            Multiple NWSDs defined to use the same hosted system hardware
            Special considerations for iSCSI attached systems
          NWSD configuration file errors
            Repair the NWSD configuration file
            Reset the NWSD configuration file parameter
            Use a previous version of the integrated server file
          DASD in IXA or iSCSI attached servers
          Failures enrolling users and groups
          User enrollment authorization problems
          Password problems
          IBM iSeries Integration for Windows Server snap-in program
          Problems with iSCSI attached servers
            Boot and storage path network analysis
            Managing path certificates
            IBM Director Troubleshooting
              Discovery problems
              Problems with SSL connections
            Virtual Ethernet problems on iSCSI attached servers
          Virtual Ethernet problems with IXS and IXA attached servers
            Both line description and icon are present
            Line description is present and icon is missing
            Line description is missing and icon is present
            Both line description and icon are missing
          General problems with external networks
          Manually update LAN drivers on the integrated Windows server
            Begin the LAN driver installation or update
            Select the adapter to install or update
            Complete the LAN driver installation or update
          Point to point LAN IP address conflicts
            Assign point to point virtual Ethernet IP addresses
          Problems with TCP/IP over virtual Ethernet
          Problems accessing Windows Server 2003 shares using the QNTC file system
          IFS access problems
          Problems with saving integrated Windows server files
          Unreadable messages in the server message queue
          Problems getting a Windows system memory dump
        Reinstall an integrated Windows server
        Collect integrated Windows server service data
          Create an integrated Windows server memory dump on OS/400
          Use the network server description (NWSD) dump tool on OS/400
      Network server description configuration files
        NWSD configuration file format
        Create an NWSD configuration file
        Example: NWSD configuration file
        Remove lines from an existing integrated Windows server file
          TARGETDIR
          TARGETFILE
        Change an integrated Windows server file with ADDCONFIG
          VAR
          ADDSTR
          ADDWHEN
            ADDWHEN and DELETEWHEN expression operators
          DELETEWHEN
          LINECOMMENT
          LOCATION
          LINESEARCHPOS
          LINESEARCHSTR
          LINELOCATION
          FILESEARCHPOS
          FILESEARCHSTR
          FILESEARCHSTROCC
          REPLACEOCC
          TARGETDIR
          TARGETFILE
          UNIQUE
          VAROCC
          VARVALUE
        Change an integrated Windows server file with UPDATECONFIG
          FILESEARCHPOS
          FILESEARCHSTR
          FILESEARCHSTROCC
        Set configuration defaults
          ADDWHEN
          DELETEWHEN
          FILESEARCHPOS
          FILESEARCHSTR
          TARGETDIR
          TARGETFILE
        Use substitution variables for keyword values
      Related information
  Planning
  Printing
    Basic printing
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Printing concepts
        Basic printing terminology
        Overview
        Printer file
          Printer file overview
          Printer file overrides
        Spooled files and output queues
          Spooling overview
          Spooled file
          Output queue
          Multiple output queues
          Output queue recovery
          Spooled file cleanup
          Default output queues
          Order of spooled files on an output queue
          Data queue support
            Record type 01 data queue entry format
            Record type 02 data queue entry format
          Spooled file names
          Spooled file security
          Output queue security
          QPRTJOB job
          Spooled file subsystem
          Spooled file library
          Spooled files in independent ASPs
        Printer writer program
        Printer data streams
          SNA character string
          Advanced Function Presentation data stream
          Intelligent Printer Data Stream
          American National Standard Code for Information Interchange
        Printer device description
        Job description
        Workstation description
        User profile
        System values
        Controlling printing to output queue or printer
          Routing process order
          Routing examples
            Example 1: Determining your output queue
            Example 2: Determining your output queue
            Example 3: Determining your output queue
            Example 4: Determining your output queue
            Example 5: Determining your output queue
            Example 6: Determining your output queue
            Example 7: Determining your output queue
            Example 8: Determining your printer name
            Example 9: Determining your printer name
            Example 10: Determining your printer name when using batch
            Example 11: Determining your printer name when using batch
            Example 12: Determining your printer name when using batch
            Self-test: Determining output queue and printer device
            Self-test answers
        Printer attachment methods
          TCP/IP-network-attached printers
            Intelligent Printer Data Stream with Print Services Facility
            Simple Network Management Protocol
            Printer Job Language
            Internet Printing Protocol
            Line printer requester/line printer daemon
          PC-attached printers
          Twinaxial-workstation-controller-attached printers
          ASCII-workstation-controller-attached printers
          Lexlink-network-attached printers
          Printers attached to IBM InfoWindow 3477, 3486, 3487, and 3488 display stations
        Remote system printing
          Benefits
          How remote system printing works
          User print information
          Send and defer status
        Fonts
          TrueType and OpenType fonts
          AFP compatibility fonts
            Font character sets
            Font global identifiers
            Code pages
            Stand-alone code pages
            Character set and code page combinations
            Coded fonts
        Double-byte character set support
          Special DBCS printer functions
            Character rotation
            Character expansion
            Condensed printing
            Horizontal and vertical lines
            Shift-control character printing
          Double-byte character printing considerations
            Extended character printing
            Condensed printing
            Page width
            Unprintable double-byte characters
            Double-byte data in an alphanumeric field
            Spanned lines
            Spanned pages
            Print key use
            5553 printer end-of-forms
            Double-byte data printed on alphanumeric printers
          DBCS spooled support
          3130 printer resident font support
        Internet Printing Protocol server
        Network print server
          Network print server objects
          How the network print server is accessed
          Exit points and the network print server
            Exit point QIBM_QNPS_ENTRY
            Exit point QIBM_QNPS_SPLF
          Use of network print server exit points
        Communications network printing functions
          3270 printer emulation
          Remote job entry printing
          3x74-attached printers
          Distributed data management printing
          Object distribution printing
        Host print transform
          Host print transform advantages
          How the host print transform function works
          AFP-to-ASCII transform function
          Host print transform in raster mode
          Host print transform and emulator products
        Image print transform
          Image print transform overview
          Image print transform advantages
          Image configuration objects
          Convert Image API
          Conversion of PostScript data streams with image print transform
          Page size
        Additional printing considerations
          Direct print considerations
          Open considerations
          Output considerations
          Close considerations
          First-character forms-control data considerations
          Printer font considerations
          Alternative character sets and code pages for printer output considerations
          Output field considerations
          Externally described printer-file record-format considerations
          Redirecting output considerations
          3812 and 3816 SCS printer considerations
          3835 printer considerations
          3912, 3916, and 4028 printer considerations
          Special printer file considerations for AFP data stream
          Special data description specifications considerations for AFP data stream
          Performance considerations
      Planning printing
      Configuring printing
        Configuring PJL printers
        Configuring SNMP printers
        Configuring LPR/LPD
        Configuring IPP printers
          Setting up validation lists for the IPP print driver
        Setting up the IPP server
          Verifying IPP server prerequisite programs
          Configuring your Web browser
          Starting the administrator interface
          Configuring an IPP server
          Configuring an IPP printer
          Configuring an IPP client
        Configuring Lexlink printers
        Configuring remote system printing
          i5/OS to i5/OS for remote system printing
          i5/OS to VM/MVS for remote system printing
          i5/OS to NetWare for remote system printing
        Configuring host print transform
          Automatically creating printer device descriptions
          Changing an existing printer device description
          Displaying the printer device description
          IBM iSeries Access for Windows PC5250 configuration recommendations
          3486, 3487, and 3488 InfoWindow display station configuration recommendations
          3477 InfoWindow display station configuration recommendations
          3197 display station configuration recommendations
          ASCII workstation controller configuration recommendations
          IBM remote 5250 emulation program configuration recommendations
        Configuring image print transform
          Printing to an ASCII printer with image print transform
          Printing to an IPDS printer with image print transform
          Printing with remote output queues and image print transform
      Managing printing
        Managing spooled files
          Displaying a list of spooled files
          Displaying the contents of a spooled file
          Displaying messages associated with a spooled file
          Holding a spooled file
          Releasing a spooled file
          Moving a spooled file
          Deleting spooled files
          Converting a spooled file to PDF
          Copying a spooled file to a physical file
          Sending a spooled file to another user or system
          Changing attributes of a spooled file
          Restarting the printing of a spooled file
          Suspending one spooled file and printing another
          Enabling spooled file notification message
          Controlling the number of spooled files
          Deleting expired spooled files
          Reclaiming spooled file storage
          Saving and restoring spooled files
          Controlling printing by spooled file size
        Printer-file-related tasks
          Changing printer files
          Overriding printer files
            Overriding file attributes
            Overriding file names or types
            Overriding file names or types and file attributes of the new file
            Generic override for printer files
          Deleting printer file overrides
          Displaying printer file overrides
        Managing printers
          Checking the status of a printer
          Making printer available
          Making printer unavailable
        Managing printer writers
          Starting a printer writer
          Stopping a printer writer
          Checking the status of a printer writer
        Managing remote writers
          Displaying remote writer status
          Starting a remote writer
          Stopping a remote writer
        Managing IPP server
          Starting the IPP server
          Stopping the IPP server
          Changing an IPP printer configuration
          Displaying an IPP printer configuration
          Deleting an IPP printer configuration
        Miscellaneous printing tasks
          Allowing direct printing
          Specifying separator pages
          Specifying print text
          Replacing unprintable characters
          Printing a graphic with other output
          Displaying graphic symbol sets
          Changing remote output queue description
      Examples: Using DDS and printer files
        Examples: Using DDS with RPG or COBOL
          Example: DDS row and column positioning source code
          Example: DDS absolute positioning source code
          Example: COBOL positioning source code
          Example: RPG positioning source code
        Example: Print font samples
          DDS source code
          C source code
          COBOL source code
          RPG source code
        Example: Using a program-described printer file with an application program
        Example: Using an externally described printer file with an application program
      Troubleshooting printing
        Troubleshooting the IPP server
        Troubleshooting the image print transform
      Reference information
        CL commands
          Jobs
          Output queues
          Printer devices
          Printer files
          Printer writers
          Spooled files
          User profiles
        Printer file parameter considerations
          Align (ALIGN) parameter
          Coded font (CDEFNT) parameter
          Corner staple (CORNERSTPL) parameter
          DBCS coded font (IGCCDEFNT) parameter
          Device type (DEVTYPE) parameter
          Edge stitch (EDGESTITCH) parameter
          Fidelity (FIDELITY) parameter
          Font character set (FNTCHRSET) parameter
          Margin (FRONTMGN and BACKMGN) parameters
          MULTIUP(1, 2, 3, or 4) and REDUCE(*NONE) parameters
          MULTIUP(1, 2, 3, or 4) and REDUCE(*TEXT) parameters
            MULTIUP support
            MULTIUP support for the 4224, 4230, 4234, 4247 printers
            Restrictions for MULTIUP with REDUCE(*TEXT)
          Output priority (OUTPTY) parameter
          Overlay (FRONTOVL and BACKOVL) parameters
          Page rotation (PAGRTT) parameter
            PAGRTT = *AUTO
            PAGRTT = *DEVD
            PAGRTT = 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees
            PAGRTT = *COR
            Page rotation on the 3831, 3835, 3900, InfoPrint 3000, and InfoPrint 4000 printers
            Page rotation and duplex printing
          Saddle stitch (SADLSTITCH) parameter
          Spooled output schedule (SCHEDULE) parameter
        Printer file return codes
          Major code 00 (00xx)
          Major code 80 (80xx)
          Major code 81 (81xx)
          Major code 82 (82xx)
          Major code 83 (83xx)
        Printer file feedback areas
          Open feedback area for printer
            Device definition list
          I/O feedback area
        AFP compatibility fonts and font substitution
          Font-related examples
          Font information
          Font attributes and font types
          Printer font support
          Font substitution by font ID range
          Mapping host-resident to printer-resident font character sets
          Mapping host-resident to printer-resident code pages
          Mapping printer-resident to host-resident font character sets
          Mapping printer-resident to host-resident code pages
          CHRID values supported
          LPI values supported
          CPI values supported
          4019 printer information
          4234 compressed font substitution by lines-per-inch value
        QWP4019 program
          QWP4019 parameter names and functions
          QWP4019 program use
        QPQCHGCF program
          QPQCHGCF parameter names and functions
          QPQCHGCF program use
          Restrictions on using the QPQCHGCF program
          Coded fonts whose font character sets reside in the 3130
          QPQCHGCF instructions for marking coded fonts
      Related information for printing
    Advanced Function Presentation
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDF
      Concepts
        Overview of AFP printing
        AFP resources
        AFP fonts
        Form definitions
        Line data
        Mixed data
        Object containers
        Overlays
        Page definitions
        Page segments
        Resources in the integrated file system
        Resource library lists
        AFP font libraries
        TrueType and OpenType fonts
        How TrueType and OpenType fonts differ from AFP fonts
        PSF configuration objects
        IPDS pass-through
        How page definitions, form definitions, and printer files interact
      Plan for AFP
        When PSF is required
        Install PSF
        Ensure you have the necessary AFP resources
      Get started with AFP
        Obtain AFP resources
          Fonts provided by i5/OS
          Create AFP resources
          Receive AFP resources from another system
            Fonts from zSeries
            Receive AFP resources inline in the data stream
            Receive resources and AFPDS data sent to network files
        Use AFP resources
          Specify AFP resources
            Specify a form definition
            Specify a page definition
            Specify a PSF configuration object
            Specify an overlay
            Specify an AFP font
            Specify a TrueType or OpenType font
            Example: specify a font
            Specify a page segment
            Specify an object container
          Search order of library list
        Create AFP data
        Print AFP data with PSF
          Print AFP data generated on the iSeries server
          Print data sent to iSeries from zSeries
        Transform data to PDF
          Transform spooled files to PDF without manual setup
          Transform spooled files to PDF with manual setup
            Set up your PSF configuration object
            Change the input file to create multiple output files or an indexed file
            Configure a device for PDF conversion
          Send the PDF file as e-mail
      Configure PSF
      Manage PSF
        Enable IPDS pass-through support
        Share print sessions
        Automatic session recovery
      Send data from zSeries to iSeries servers
        Send print data from a VM S/390 to the output queue of a user ID
        Send print data from MVS S/390 to an i5/OS output queue
        Send data from a zSeries server to i5/OS network files
      Line and mixed data stream support
        Printer file parameters used with line and mixed data
        Special characters used with line data
        Considerations and restrictions when using line data
      AFP reference information
        Form definitions included with the server
        Page definitions included with the server
        CL commands for PSF configuration objects
        CL commands for device descriptions
        Purchase fonts
        TrueType fonts on OS/400 V5R2
        S/390 parameters and corresponding i5/OS printer file parameters
        ANSI carriage control characters
        Machine code carriage control characters
      Troubleshoot AFP
      Related information for AFP
  Programming
    Application programming interfaces
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDFs
      API finder
      APIs by category
        Backup and Recovery APIs
        Client Management Support APIs
        Cluster APIs
        Communications APIs
        Configuration APIs
        Cryptographic Services APIs
        Database and File APIs
        Date and Time APIs
        Debugger APIs
        Dynamic Screen Manager APIs
        Edit Function APIs
        GDDM APIs
        Hierarchical File System APIs
        High-Level Language APIs
        HTTP Server for i5/OS APIs
        ILE CEE APIs
        International Components for Unicode APIs
        iSeries Access for Windows APIs
        Java APIs
        Journal and Commit APIs
        Lotus Domino for i5/OS APIs
        Machine Interface Instructions APIs
        Message Handling APIs
        National Language Support APIs
        Network Management APIs
        Object APIs
        Office APIs
        Operational Assistant APIs
        i5/OS PASE APIs
        Performance Management APIs
        Print APIs
        Problem Management APIs
        Process Open List APIs
        Program and CL Command APIs
        Pthread APIs
        Registration Facility APIs
        Remote Control Panel APIs
        Remote Procedure Call APIs
        Security APIs
        Server Support APIs
        System Manager for i5/OS APIs
        Software Product APIs
        UNIX-Type APIs
        User Application APIs
        User Interface Manager APIs
        Virtual Terminal APIs
        Work Management APIs
        Work Station Support APIs
        XML Parsing APIs
        Miscellaneous APIs
      Alphabetic list of APIs
      API concepts
        Overview: APIs
        API terminology
        Generic library names
        API naming conventions
        Language selection considerations
        Types of APIs
          APIs for the program-based environment
          APIs for the service program-based environment
          APIs for the ILE Common Execution Environment
          Differences between program-based APIs and service program-based APIs
            Example in ILE C: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
            Example in OPM COBOL: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
            Example in OPM RPG: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
            Example in ILE RPG: Logging software error (program API without pointers)
            Example in ILE C: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
            Example in ILE COBOL: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
            Example in ILE RPG: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
          APIs for the UNIX-type environment
            Examples: UNIX-type APIs
        API information format
          API description
          API format
          API field descriptions
          API error messages
          Extracting a field from the format
          Processing lists that contain data structures
        API parameters
          Passing parameters
          Input and output parameters
          Offset values and lengths
          Offset versus displacement considerations for structures
          Error code parameter
            Error code parameter format
            Examples: Receiving error conditions
            Using the job log to diagnose API errors
        Include files and the QSYSINC library
        Internal object types
        Data types and APIs
        Internal identifiers
        User spaces and receiver variables
          User spaces
            General data structure
            Common data structure formats
            Example: User space format
            List sections
          Receiver variables
            Bytes available and bytes returned fields
            Keyed interface
            User space alternative
        Continuation handle
        List APIs overview
          General data structure for list APIs
          User spaces for list APIs
            Logic flow of processing a list of entries
            Manipulating a user space with pointers
            Manipulating a user space without pointers
            Examples: Changing a user space
              Example: User space before and after change
              Example in ILE RPG: Changing a user space
              Example in OPM RPG: Changing a user space
            Additional information about list APIs and a user space
            Example in CL: Listing database file members
          Example in OPM RPG: List APIs
          Example in ILE CL: List APIs
          Example in ILE C: List APIs
          Example in ILE RPG: List APIs
          Example in ILE COBOL: List APIs
        Domains
        Exit programs
        User index considerations
        Performance considerations
        APIs and system objects
        Open list information format
        Path name format
      Using APIs
        Examples: Program-based APIs
          Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
          Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
          Example in ILE C: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
          Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
          Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
          Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
          Example in ILE C: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
          Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
          Example in OPM RPG: Printing the HOLD value
          Example in ILE COBOL: Printing the HOLD value
          Example in ILE C: Printing the HOLD value
          Example in ILE RPG: Printing the HOLD value
          Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the initial library list
          Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving the initial library list
          Example in ILE C: Retrieving the initial library list
          Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the initial library list
          Example in OPM RPG: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
          Example in ILE COBOL: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
          Example in ILE C: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
          Example in ILE RPG: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
        Examples: Service program-based APIs
          Example in ILE C: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in OPM COBOL: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in ILE COBOL: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in OPM RPG: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in ILE RPG: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
          Example in ILE C: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in OPM COBOL: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in ILE COBOL: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in OPM RPG: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in ILE RPG: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
          Example in ILE C: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
          Example in OPM COBOL: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
          Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
          Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
          Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
        Performing tasks using APIs
          Examples: Packaging your own software products
            Creating the example product
            Example in CL: Creating objects for packaging a product
            Example in OPM RPG: Packaging a product
            Example in ILE C: Packaging a product
            Example in ILE COBOL: Packaging a product
            Example in ILE RPG: Packaging a product
          Examples: Retrieving a file description to a user space
            Example in ILE C: Retrieving a file description to a user space
            Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving a file description to a user space
            Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving a file description to a user space
          Examples: Using data queues or user queues
            Considerations for using data queues and user queues
            Example in ILE C: Using data queues
            Example in ILE COBOL: Using data queues
            Example in OPM RPG: Using data queues
            Example in ILE RPG: Using data queues
            Example in ILE C: Using user queues
      Examples: APIs and exit programs
        Example: Changing an active job
        Example: Changing a job schedule entry
        Example: Creating a batch machine
        Example: Creating and manipulating a user index
        Example: Creating your own telephone directory
        Example: Defining queries
        Example: Deleting old spooled files
        Example: Diagnostic reporting
        Example: Generating and sending an alert
        Example: Listing directories
        Example: Listing subdirectories
        Example: Saving to multiple devices
        Example: Saving and restoring system-level environment variables
        Examples: Scanning string patterns
        Example: Using a COBOL program to call APIs
        Examples: Using the Control Device (QTACTLDV) API
        Examples: Processing data queue entries
        Example: Using environment variables
        Examples: Using ILE Common Execution Environment APIs
        Example: Using generic terminal APIs
        Example: Using profile handles
        Example: Using registration facility APIs
        Example: Using semaphore set and shared memory functions
        Example: Using SNA/Management Services Transport APIs
        Example: Using source debugger APIs
        Example: Using process-related APIs
        Example: Using the user-defined communications programs for file transfer
        Example: Working with stream files
        Example: Creating a PTF exit program
        Example: Creating an exit program for Operational Assistant backup
      Machine interface programming
        Machine interface instructions
        Example: Writing an MI program
        Compiling an MI program
        Creating an MI version of the CLCRTPG program
        Enhanced version of the MICRTPG program
        Creating the MICRTPG2 program
        Example: Common MI programming techniques
        Program storage
      Common API programming errors
        Using the error code parameter
        Defining data structures
        Defining receiver variables
        Defining list entry format lengths
        Using null pointers with program-based APIs
        Defining byte alignment
        Using offsets in a user space
        Coding for new functions
    Control language
      Overview: Control language
      What's new for V5R4
      Printable PDFs
      CL command finder
      Alphabetic list of commands
      CL commands by category
        Advanced Job Scheduler for iSeries commands
        AFP Utilities for iSeries commands
        Backup Recovery and Media Services for iSeries commands
        Business Graphics Utility for AS/400 commands
        CICS Transaction Server for iSeries commands
        Communications Utilities for iSeries commands
        Content Manager OnDemand for iSeries commands
        Cryptographic Support for AS/400 commands
        DB2 DataPropagator for iSeries, V8.1 commands
        DB2 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit for iSeries commands
        Developer Kit for Java commands
        HTTP Server for iSeries commands
        Infoprint Server for iSeries commands
        IBM eServer iSeries Access for Web commands
        i5/OS commands
        Managed System Services for iSeries commands
        Performance Tools for iSeries commands
        Query for iSeries commands
        System Manager for iSeries commands
        TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities for iSeries commands
        WebSphere Development Studio commands
      CL concepts
        System operation control
          Control language
          Menus
          Messages
            Message descriptions
            Message queues
        CL commands
          CL command names
            Abbreviations of CL commands and keywords
              CL command verb abbreviations
              CL command abbreviations
              CL command keyword abbreviations
          CL command parts
            CL command syntax
            CL command label
            CL command parameters
            CL command delimiters
            CL command continuation
            CL command comments
          CL command definition parts
          CL command coding rules
          CL command information and documentation
            CL command documentation format
              CL environment classification
              CL threadsafe classification
              CL command description
              CL parameters
              CL command coding examples
              CL error messages
            CL command help
            Printing CL command descriptions on the system
            CL command prompters
          CL commands that operate on i5/OS objects
          CL commands that operate on multiple objects
        CL programs and procedures
          CL procedure
          CL module
          CL program
          Service program
        CL parameters
          Parameter values
            Constant value
              Character string
              Hexadecimal values
              Date values
              Decimal values
              Logical values
              Floating-point constants
            Variable name
            Expressions
            List of values
          Parameters in keyword and positional form
          Required, optional, and key parameters
          Commonly used parameters
            AUT parameter
            CLS parameter
            COUNTRY parameter
            FILETYPE parameter
            FRCRATIO parameter
            IGCFEAT parameter
            JOB parameter
            LABEL parameter
            LICOPT parameter
            MAXACT parameter
            OBJ parameter
            OBJTYPE parameter
            OUTPUT parameter
            PRTTXT parameter
            REPLACE parameter
            JOBPTY, OUTPTY, and PTYLMT scheduling priority parameters
            SEV parameter
            SPLNBR parameter
            TEXT parameter
            VOL parameter
            WAITFILE parameter
          Parameter values used for testing and debugging
            Program-variable description
            Basing-pointer description
            Subscript description
            Qualified-name description
        Control language elements
          CL character sets and values
            Character sets
              Double-byte character text in CL commands
            Special character use
            Symbolic operators
            Predefined values
          Expressions in CL commands
            Arithmetic expressions
            Character string expressions
              Example: Character string expressions
              Example: Using character strings and variables
            Relational expressions
            Logical expressions
            Operators in expressions
            Priority of operators when evaluating expressions
          Built-in functions for CL
          Naming within commands
            Folder and document names
        i5/OS objects
          Library objects
          External object types
          Simple and qualified object names
          Generic object names
          Object naming rules
            Communication names (*CNAME)
            Generic names (*GENERIC)
            Names (*NAME)
            Path names (*PNAME)
            Simple names (*SNAME)
            Additional rules for unique names
        Database files and device files used by CL commands
      CL programming
        Process for creating a CL source program or CL procedure
          Interactive entry
          Batch entry
          Parts of a CL procedure
          Example: Simple CL procedure
        Commands used in CL procedures
          Common commands used in CL procedures
        Operations performed by CL procedures
        Variables in CL commands
          Declaring variables to a CL procedure
          Uses for based variables
          Uses for defined variables
          Variables to use for specifying a list or qualified name
          Cases of characters in variables
          Variables that replace reserved or numeric parameter values
          Changing the value of a variable
          Trailing blanks on command parameters
          Writing comments in CL procedures
        Controlling processing within a CL program or CL procedure
          GOTO command and command labels in a CL program or procedure
          IF command in a CL program or procedure
          ELSE command in a CL program or procedure
          Embedded IF commands in a CL program or procedure
          DO command and DO groups in a CL program or procedure
          DOUNTIL command in a CL program or procedure
          DOWHILE command in a CL program or procedure
          DOFOR command in a CL program or procedure
          ITERATE command in a CL program or procedure
          LEAVE command in a CL program or procedure
          CALLSUBR command in a CL program or procedure
          SELECT command and SELECT groups in a CL program or procedure
          SUBR command and subroutines in a CL program or procedure
          *AND, *OR, and *NOT operators
          %ADDRESS built-in function in a CL program or procedure
          %BINARY built-in function
          %OFFSET built-in function
          %SUBSTRING built-in function
          %SWITCH built-in function
            %SWITCH with the IF command
            %SWITCH with the Change Variable command
          Monitor Message command
        Retrieving values that can be used as variables
          Retrieving system values
            Example: Retrieving QTIME system value
            Retrieving the QDATE system value into a CL variable
          Retrieving configuration source
          Retrieving configuration status
          Retrieving network attributes
            Example: Using the Retrieve Network Attributes command
          Retrieving job attributes
            Example: Using the Retrieve Job Attributes command
          Retrieving user profile attributes
            Example: Using the Retrieve User Profile command
          Retrieving member description information
            Example: Using the Retrieve Member Description command
        Compiling CL procedures
          Logging CL procedure commands
          CL module compiler listings
          Common compilation errors
          Obtaining a CL procedure dump
          Displaying module attributes
          Displaying program attributes
          Return code summary
        Compiling source programs for a previous release
          Previous-release (*PRV) libraries
          Installing CL compiler support for a previous release
        Controlling flow and communicating between programs and procedures
          Passing control to another program or procedure
            Using the Call Program command to pass control
            Using the Call Bound Procedure command to pass control
            Using the Return command to pass control
          Passing parameters
            Using the Call Program command to pass control to a called program
            Common errors when calling programs and procedures
              Data type errors using the CALL command
              Data type errors when passing parameters
              Decimal length and precision errors
              Character length errors
        Communicating between programs and procedures
          Using data queues
            Remote data queues
            Comparisons with using database files as queues
            Similarities to message queues
            Prerequisites for using data queues
            Managing the storage used by a data queue
            Allocating data queues
            Examples: Using a data queue
              Example: Waiting up to two hours to receive data from data queue
              Example: Waiting for input from a display file and an ICF file
              Example: Waiting for input from a display file and a data queue
            Creating data queues associated with an output queue
          Using data areas
            Local data area
            Group data area
            Program Initialization Parameter data area
            Remote data areas
            Creating a data area
            Data area locking and allocation
            Displaying a data area
            Changing a data area
            Retrieving a data area
            Examples: Retrieving a data area
              Example: Retrieving data area ORDINFO
              Example: Retrieving data area DA1
              Example: Retrieving data area DA2
            Example: Changing and retrieving a data area
        Defining and documenting commands
          Defining commands
            Command definition statements
              Creating user-defined commands
            Command definition process
              Create Command command
              Command definition object
              Validity checking
              Prompt override program
              Command processing program
              Command exit programs and independent ASPs
              Authority needed for defining commands
              Example: Creating a command
            Defining a command
              Using the CMD statement
              Defining parameters
                Naming the keyword for the parameter
                Parameter types
                Length of parameter value
                Default values
                Example: Defining a parameter
            Data type and parameter restrictions
            Defining lists for parameters
              Defining a simple list
                Using CL or other HLLs for simple lists
                Using REXX for simple lists
              Defining a mixed list
                Using CL or other HLLs for mixed lists
                Using REXX for mixed lists
              Defining lists within lists
                Using CL or other HLLs for lists within lists
                Using REXX for lists within lists
              Defining a qualified name
                Using CL or other HLLs for a qualified name
                Using REXX for a qualified name
              Defining a dependent relationship
              Possible choices and values for parameter definitions
            Specifying prompt control
              Specifying conditional prompting
              Additional parameters for prompting
            Key parameters and prompt override programs
              Using a prompt override program
                Identifying key parameters
                Prompt override program
                  Parameters passed to the prompt override program
                  Information returned from the prompt override program
                  Allowing for errors in a prompt override program
                Specifying the prompt override program when creating or changing commands
              Example: Using a prompt override program
            Creating commands
              Command definition source listing
              Command errors when processing command definition statements
            Displaying a command definition
            Effect of changing the command definition of a command in a procedure or program
              Changing command defaults
              Examples: Changing command defaults
            Command processing program
              CL or HLL command processing program
              REXX command processing procedure
            Validity checking program
            Examples: Defining and creating commands
              Example: Calling application programs
              Example: Substituting a default value
              Example: Displaying an output queue
              Example: Displaying messages from IBM-supplied commands more than once
              Example: Creating abbreviated change job command
              Example: Creating abbreviated printer writer command
              Example: Deleting files and source members
              Example: Deleting program objects
          Documenting command
            Commands and command help
            Writing command help
              Generating UIM source for command help
              Common help sharing
              Organizing help text into help modules
            Generating HTML source for command documentation
          Proxy commands
        Command-related APIs
          QCAPCMD program
          QCMDEXC program
            QCMDEXC program with DBCS data
          QCMDCHK program
        Prompting for user input at run time
          Using the i5/OS prompter within a CL procedure or program
          Using selective prompting for CL commands
          Using QCMDEXC with prompting in CL procedures and programs
        Entering program source
          Using the Start Programmer Menu command
            Using the EXITPGM parameter of the Start Programmer Menu command
        Command analyzer exit points
        Designing application programs for DBCS data
          Designing DBCS application programs
          Converting alphanumeric programs to process DBCS data
          Using DBCS data in a CL program
        Loading and running an application from tape or optical media
          Example: QINSTAPP program
        Transferring control to improve performance
          Example: Using the Transfer Control command
          Passing parameters using the Transfer Control command
        Examples: CL programs and procedures
          Example: Initial program for setup (programmer)
          Example: Saving specific objects in an application (system operator)
          Example: Recovery from abnormal end (system operator)
          Example: Timing out while waiting for input from a device display
          Example: Performing date arithmetic
      Debugging CL programs and procedures
        Debugging ILE programs
          Debug commands
          Preparing a program object for a debug session
            Using a root source view to debug ILE programs
            Using a listing view to debug ILE programs
            Using a statement view to debug ILE programs
          Starting the ILE source debugger
          Adding program objects to a debug session
          Removing program objects from a debug session
          Viewing the program source
            Changing a module object
            Changing the module object view
          Setting and removing breakpoints
            Setting and removing unconditional breakpoints
            Setting and removing conditional breakpoints
            Using the Work with Breakpoints display
            Using the BREAK and CLEAR debug commands to set and remove conditional breakpoints
            National Language Sort Sequence
            Examples: Conditional breakpoint
            Removing all breakpoints
          Using instruction stepping
            F10 (Step) to step over program objects or F22 (Step into) to step into program objects
            Using the STEP debug command to step through a program object
          Displaying variables
            Example: Displaying logical variable
            Examples: Displaying character variable
            Example: Displaying decimal variable
            Example: Displaying variables as hexadecimal values
          Changing the value of variables
            Example: Changing logical variable
            Examples: Changing character variable
            Examples: Changing decimal variable
          Displaying variable attributes
          Equating a name with a variable, an expression, or a command
          Source debug and i5/OS globalization
            Working with *SOURCE view
          Operations that temporarily remove steps
        Debugging original program model programs
          Starting debug mode
            Adding programs to debug mode
            Preventing updates to database files in production libraries
          Displaying the call stack
            Program activations
          Handling unmonitored messages
          Breakpoints
            Adding breakpoints to programs
            Adding conditional breakpoints
            Removing breakpoints from programs
          Traces
            Adding traces to programs
            Using instruction stepping
            Using breakpoints within traces
            Removing trace information from the system
            Removing traces from programs
          Displaying testing information
          Displaying the values of variables
          Changing the values of variables
          Reasons for using a job to debug another job
            Debugging batch jobs that are submitted to a job queue
            Debugging batch jobs that are not started from job queues
            Debugging a job that is running
            Debugging another interactive job
            Considerations when debugging one job from another job
          Debugging at the machine interface level
          Security considerations
          Operations that temporarily remove breakpoints
      Objects and libraries
        Objects
          Object types and common attributes
          Functions performed on objects
            Functions the system performs automatically
            Functions you can perform using commands
        Libraries
          Library lists
            Functions of using a library list
            A job's library list
            Changing the library list
            Considerations for using a library list
            Displaying a library list
            Using library lists to search for objects
              Generic object names searching
              Searching for multiple objects or a single object
        Using libraries
          Creating a library
          Authority for libraries specification
            Object authority
            Data authority
            Combined authority
          Security considerations for objects
            The Display Audit Journal Entries command to generate security journal audit reports
          Setting default public authority
          Setting default auditing attribute
          Placing objects in libraries
          Deleting and clearing libraries
          Displaying library names and contents
          Displaying and retrieving library descriptions
        Changing national language versions
        Describing objects
        Displaying object descriptions
        Retrieving object descriptions
          Example: Using the Retrieve Object Description command
        Creation information for objects
        Detecting unused objects on the system
        Moving objects from one library to another
        Creating duplicate objects
        Renaming objects
        Object compression or decompression
          Restrictions for compression of objects
          Temporarily decompressed objects
          Automatic decompression of objects
        Deleting objects
        Allocating resources
          Lock states for objects
          Displaying the lock states for objects
        Accessing objects in CL programs
          Accessing command definitions, files, and procedures
            Accessing command definitions
            Accessing files
            Accessing procedures
          Checking for the existence of an object
        Working with files in CL procedures
          Data manipulation commands
          Files in a CL procedure
          Opening and closing files in a CL procedure
          Declaring a file
          Sending and receiving data with a display file
          Example: Writing a CL program to control a menu
          The Override with Display File command to override display files in a CL procedure or program
          Working with multiple device display files
          The Receive File command to receive data from a database file
          The Override with Database File command to override database files in a CL procedure or program
          Output files from display commands
      Messages
        Defining message descriptions
          Creating a message file
            Message files in independent ASPs
            Determining the size of a message file
          Adding messages to a file
            Assigning a message identifier
            Defining messages and message help
            Defining substitution variables
            Assigning a severity code
            Specifying validity checking for replies
            Example: Sending an immediate message and handling a reply
              Sending immediate messages with double-byte characters
            Defining default values for replies
            Specifying default message handling for escape messages
              Example: Sending the last diagnostic message as an escape message
              Specifying the alert option
            Example: Describing a message
            Defining double-byte messages
          Viewing messages
          Message file searching
            System message file searches
            Overriding message files
              Example: Overriding a message file
        Message queues
          Types of message queues
          Creating or changing a message queue
            Message queues in independent ASPs
            Message queues in break mode
            Placing a message queue in break mode automatically
          Job message queues
            External message queue
            Call message queue
        Commands used to send messages to a system user
        Commands used to send messages from a CL program
          Inquiry and informational messages
          Completion and diagnostic messages
          Status messages
          Escape and notify messages
          Examples: Sending messages
          Identifying a call stack entry
            Using the Send Program Message command as the base
            Identifying the base entry by name
            Using the program boundary as a base
            Using the most recently called procedure as a base
            Using a control boundary as a base
            Considerations for service programs
        Receiving messages into a CL procedure or program
          Receiving request messages
          Writing request-processor procedures and programs
          Determining if a request processor exists
        Retrieving message descriptions from a message file
        Removing messages from a message queue
        Monitoring for messages in a CL program or procedure
          Watching for messages
          CL handling for unmonitored messages
          Monitoring for notify messages
          Monitoring for status messages
          Preventing the display of status messages
        Receiving a message from a program or procedure that has ended
        Break-handling programs
        Ways of handling replies to inquiry messages
          Using a sender copy message to obtain a reply
          Finding the job that sent the reply
          Using the system reply list
          Using the reply handling exit program
        Message subfiles in a CL program or procedure
        Log messages
          Job log
            Writing a job log to a file
            Controlling information written in a job log
            Job log message filtering
            Example: Controlling information written in a job log
            Job log sender or receiver information
            Displaying a job log
            Preventing the production of job logs
            Job log considerations
            Interactive job log considerations
            Batch job log considerations
            Message filtering through the Control Job Log Output API
            Job log output files
              Job log direction
              Primary job log model
          QHST history log
            Format of the history log
            QHST file processing
            QHST job start and completion messages
            QHST files deletion
        QSYSMSG message queue
          Messages sent to QSYSMSG message queue
          Example: Receiving messages from QSYSMSG
    Communications
      Socket programming
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDFs
        Prerequisites for socket programming
        How sockets work
        Socket characteristics
          Socket address structure
          Socket address family
            AF_INET address family
            AF_INET6 address family
            AF_UNIX address family
            AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
          Socket type
          Socket protocols
        Basic socket design
          Creating a connection-oriented socket
            Example: A connection-oriented server
            Example: A connection-oriented client
          Creating a connectionless socket
            Example: A connectionless server
            Example: A connectionless client
          Designing applications with address families
            Using AF_INET address family
            Using AF_INET6 address family
            Using AF_UNIX address family
              Example: Server application that uses AF_UNIX address family
              Example: Client application that uses AF_UNIX address family
            Using AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
              Example: Server application that uses AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
              Example: Client application that uses AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
        Advanced socket concepts
          Asynchronous I/O
          Secure sockets
            Global Secure ToolKit (GSKit) APIs
            SSL_ APIs
            Secure socket API error code messages
          Client SOCKS support
          Thread safety
          Nonblocking I/O
          Signals
          IP multicasting
          File data transfer—send_file() and accept_and_recv()
          Out-of-band data
          I/O multiplexing—select()
          Socket network functions
          Domain Name System support
            Environment variables
            Data caching
          Berkeley Software Distribution compatibility
          UNIX 98 compatibility
          Descriptor passing between processes: sendmsg() and recvmsg()
        Socket scenario: Creating an application to accept IPv4 and IPv6 clients
          Example: Accepting connections from both IPv6 and IPv4 clients
          Example: IPv4 or IPv6 client
        Socket application design recommendations
        Examples: Socket application designs
          Examples: Connection-oriented designs
            Examples: Establishing secure connections
            Example: Writing an iterative server program
            Example: Using the spawn() API to create child processes
              Example: Creating a server that uses spawn()
              Example: Enabling the worker job to receive a data buffer
            Example: Passing descriptors between processes
              Example: Server program used for sendmsg() and recvmsg()
              Example: Worker program used for sendmsg() and recvmsg()
            Examples: Using multiple accept() APIs to handle incoming requests
              Example: Server program to create a pool of multiple accept() worker jobs
              Example: Worker jobs for multiple accept()
            Example: Generic client
          Example: Using asynchronous I/O
          Examples: Establishing secure connections
            Example: GSKit secure server with asynchronous data receive
            Example: GSKit secure server with asynchronous handshake
            Example: Establishing a secure client with Global Secure ToolKit APIs
            Example: Establishing a secure server with SSL_ APIs
            Example: Establishing a secure client with SSL_ APIs
          Example: Using gethostbyaddr_r() for threadsafe network routines
          Example: Nonblocking I/O and select()
          Using poll() instead of select()
          Example: Using signals with blocking socket APIs
          Examples: Using multicasting with AF_INET
            Example: Sending multicast datagrams
            Example: Receiving multicast datagrams
          Example: Updating and querying DNS
          Examples: Transferring file data using send_file() and accept_and_recv() APIs
            Example: Using accept_and_recv() and send_file() APIs to send contents of a file
            Example: Client request for a file
        Xsockets tool
          Configuring Xsockets
            What is created by integrated Xsocket setup
          Configuring Xsockets to use a Web browser
            Configuring HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
            Configuring Tomcat
            Updating configuration files
            Testing Xsockets tool in a Web browser
          Using Xsockets
            Using integrated Xsockets
            Using Xsockets in a Web browser
          Deleting objects created by the Xsockets tool
          Customizing Xsockets
        Serviceability tools
      Using Sun TI-RPC to develop distributed applications
        Printable PDF
        Using the rpcbind daemon
          Ensuring that the rpcbind daemon is running on i5/OS
          Starting and ending the rpcbind daemon on i5/OS
        Using the rpcgen compiler
        Using the network selection mechanism
        Using data conversion support
        Examples: Developing service applications based on TI-RPC code
          Example: TI-RPC simplified-level service API
          Example: TI-RPC top-level service API
          Example: TI-RPC intermediate-level service API
          Example: TI-RPC expert-level service API
          Example: Adding authentication to the TI-RPC service
        Examples: Developing client applications based on TI-RPC code
          Example: TI-RPC simplified-level client API
          Example: TI-RPC top-level client API
          Example: TI-RPC intermediate-level client API
          Example: TI-RPC expert-level client API
          Example: Adding authentication to the TI-RPC client
    DDS
      DDS keyword finder
      DDS concepts
        Printable PDF
        Creating a file using DDS
          Completing the DDS form
          Entering the DDS source statements
          Creating the DDS file
        DDS coding rules, conventions, and terms
          Conventions and terminology used in the DDS information
          Rules for DDS keywords and parameter values
          DDS naming conventions
          DDS keywords and parameters
        General considerations for using DBCS text with DDS files
          Positional entries for files that use DBCS data
            Length (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type (position 35)
          Keyword entries for files that use DBCS (positions 45 through 80)
          DBCS character strings
            Entering bracketed-DBCS character strings
            Entering DBCS-graphic character strings
          DDS computer printouts with DBCS output
        Examples: DDS coding
          Examples: DDS syntax
            DDS syntax for a physical file
            DDS syntax for a simple logical file
            DDS syntax for a join logical file
            DDS syntax for a display file
            DDS syntax for a printer file
            DDS syntax for an intersystem communications function file
          Examples: DDS for each file type
            Example: A field reference file
            Example: A physical file with a new record format
            Example: A logical file specifying multiple formats and new keys
            Example: A logical file specifying a new record format
            Example: A join logical file
            Example: An inquiry display with two record formats in DDS
            Example: A subfile with SFLPAG value equal to SFLSIZ value
            Example: A subfile with paging by i5/OS and high-level language program
            Example: A horizontal subfile displayable on two display sizes
            Example: A message subfile using DDS
            Example: A printer file using DDS
            Example: An intersystem communications function file using DDS
          Example: Program that uses a physical file, display file, and printer file
          Example: DDS compiler listing
          DDS debugging template
        When to specify REF and REFFLD keywords for DDS files
        Related information for DDS concepts
      DDS for physical and logical files
        What's new for V5R4
        Printable PDF
        Defining physical and logical files using DDS
          Defining a physical file using DDS
          Defining a logical file using DDS
            Simple- and multiple-format logical files in DDS
            Join logical files in DDS
            Specifying record formats in a logical file in DDS
          Positional entries for physical and logical files (positions 1 through 44)
            Sequence number for physical and logical files (positions 1 through 5)
            Form type for physical and logical files (position 6)
            Comment for physical and logical files (position 7)
            Conditioning for physical and logical files (positions 8 through 16)
            Type of name or specification for physical and logical files (position 17)
            Reserved for physical and logical files (position 18)
            Name for physical and logical files (positions 19 through 28)
              Record format
              Field name
              Key field name
                DDS access path keywords
                DDS logical files with more than one record format
                Using *NONE in the key field when creating a DDS file
                Example 1: Specifying the key field
                Example 2: Specifying the key field
                Example 3: Specifying the key field
                Example 4: Specifying the key field
              Select/omit field name
            Reference for physical and logical files (position 29)
            Length for physical and logical files (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type for physical and logical files (position 35)
              Conversion of one numeric data type to another in a DDS file
              Conversion between zoned decimal and character or hexadecimal in a DDS file
              Conversion of a field from floating point to packed decimal, zoned decimal, or binary in DDS
              Conversion of data types when concatenating fields in DDS
              Conversion of data types when substringing fields in DDS
            Decimal positions for physical and logical files (positions 36 and 37)
            Usage for physical and logical files (position 38)
            Location for physical and logical files (positions 39 through 44)
        Keyword entries for physical and logical files (positions 45 through 80)
          ABSVAL (Absolute Value) keyword for physical and logical files
          ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for physical and logical files
          ALL (All) keyword—logical files only
          ALTSEQ (Alternative Collating Sequence) keyword for physical and logical files
          ALWNULL (Allow Null Value) keyword—physical files only
          CCSID (Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword for physical and logical files
          CHECK (Check) keyword for physical and logical files
          CHKMSGID (Check Message Identifier) keyword for physical and logical files
          CMP (Comparison) keyword for physical and logical files
          COLHDG (Column Heading) keyword for physical and logical files
          COMP (Comparison) keyword for physical and logical files
            Specifying COMP at the field level
            Specifying COMP at the select/omit-field level
          CONCAT (Concatenate) keyword—logical files only
          DATFMT (Date Format) keyword for physical and logical files
          DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword for physical and logical files
          DESCEND (Descend) keyword for physical and logical files
          DFT (Default) keyword—physical files only
          DIGIT (Digit) keyword for physical and logical files
          DYNSLT (Dynamic Select) keyword—logical files only
          EDTCDE (Edit Code) and EDTWRD (Edit Word) keywords for physical and logical files
          FCFO (First-Changed First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
          FIFO (First-In First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
          FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) keyword for physical and logical files
          FORMAT (Format) keyword for physical and logical files
          JDFTVAL (Join Default Values) keyword—join logical files only
          JDUPSEQ (Join Duplicate Sequence) keyword—join logical files only
          JFILE (Joined Files) keyword—join logical files only
          JFLD (Joined Fields) keyword—join logical files only
          JOIN (Join) keyword—join logical files only
          JREF (Join Reference) keyword—join logical files only
          LIFO (Last-In First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
          NOALTSEQ (No Alternative Collating Sequence) keyword for physical and logical files
          PFILE (Physical File) keyword—logical files only
          RANGE (Range) keyword for physical and logical files
            Specifying RANGE at the field level
            Specifying RANGE at the select/omit-field level
          REF (Reference) keyword—physical files only
          REFACCPTH (Reference Access Path Definition) keyword—logical files only
          REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword—physical files only
          REFSHIFT (Reference Shift) keyword for physical and logical files
          RENAME (Rename) keyword—logical files only
          SIGNED (Signed) keyword for physical and logical files
          SST (Substring) keyword—logical files only
          TEXT (Text) keyword for physical and logical files
          TIMFMT (Time Format) keyword for physical and logical files
          TIMSEP (Time Separator) keyword for physical and logical files
          TRNTBL (Translation Table) keyword—logical files only
          UNIQUE (Unique) keyword for physical and logical files
          UNSIGNED (Unsigned) keyword for physical and logical files
          VALUES (Values) keyword for physical and logical files
            Specifying VALUES at the field level
            Specifying VALUES at the select/omit-field level
          VARLEN (Variable-Length Field) keyword for physical and logical files
          ZONE (Zone) keyword for physical and logical files
        Unicode considerations for database files
          Unicode considerations for database files: Length (positions 30 through 34)
          Unicode considerations for database files: Data type (position 35)
          Unicode considerations for database files: Decimal positions (positions 36 and 37)
          Unicode considerations for database files: Keyword considerations (positions 45 through 80)
        DBCS considerations for database files
          Positional entry considerations for database files that use DBCS
            Length (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type (position 35)
            Decimal (positions 36 and 37)
          Keyword considerations for database files that use DBCS
            CONCAT (Concatenate) keyword
          Additional considerations for describing database files that contain DBCS data
      DDS for display files
        Printable PDF
        Defining a display file for DDS
          Conventions and terminology used in the DDS information
          Positional entries for display files (positions 1 through 44)
            Positional entries for display files (positions 1 through 7)
            Condition for display files (positions 7 through 16)
              Specifying a condition for a field or for more than one keyword
              Display size condition names
            Type of name or specification for display files (position 17)
            Reserved for display files (position 18)
            Name for display files (positions 19 through 28)
            Reference for display files (position 29)
            Length for display files (positions 30 through 34)
            Data type and keyboard shift for display files (position 35)
              Keyboard types
                Typewriter-like keyboard
                Data-entry keyboard
              Valid entries for display files
                Default (blank)
                Alphabetic only (X)
                Alphanumeric shift (A)
                Numeric shift (N)
                Signed numeric (S)
                Numeric only (Y)
                Katakana (W)
                Inhibit keyboard entry (I)
                Digits only (D)
                Numeric only character (M)
                Floating point (F)
                Date (L), Time (T), and Timestamp (Z)
            Decimal positions for display files (positions 36 and 37)
            Usage for display files (position 38)
            Location for display files (positions 39 through 44)
              Line (positions 39 through 41)
              Position (positions 42 through 44)
              Beginning attribute character
              Ending attribute character
              Overlapping fields
              Display length
        DDS keyword entries for display files (positions 45 through 80)
          ALARM (Audible Alarm) keyword for display files
          ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for display files
          ALTHELP (Alternative Help Key) keyword for display files
          ALTNAME (Alternative Record Name) keyword for display files
          ALTPAGEDWN/ALTPAGEUP (Alternative Page Down/Alternative Page Up) keyword for display files
          ALWGPH (Allow Graphics) keyword for display files
          ALWROL (Allow Roll) keyword for display files
          ASSUME (Assume) keyword for display files
          AUTO (Auto) keyword for display files
          BLANKS (Blanks) keyword for display files
          BLINK (Blink) keyword for display files
          BLKFOLD (Blank Fold) keyword for display files
          CAnn (Command Attention) keyword for display files
          CFnn (Command Function) keyword for display files
          CHANGE (Change) keyword for display files
          CHCACCEL (Choice Accelerator Text) keyword for display files
          CHCAVAIL (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Available) keyword for display files
          CHCCTL (Choice Control) keyword for display files
          CHCSLT (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Selected) keyword for display files
          CHCUNAVAIL (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Unavailable) keyword for display files
          CHECK (Check) keyword for display files
          CHGINPDFT (Change Input Default) keyword for display files
          CHKMSGID (Check Message Identifier) keyword for display files
          CHOICE (Selection Field Choice) keyword for display files
          CHRID (Character Identifier) keyword for display files
          CLEAR (Clear) keyword for display files
          CLRL (Clear Line) keyword for display files
          CMP (Comparison) keyword for display files
          CNTFLD (Continued-Entry Field) keyword for display files
          COLOR (Color) keyword for display files
          COMP (Comparison) keyword for display files
          CSRINPONLY (Cursor Movement to Input-Capable Positions Only) keyword for display files
          CSRLOC (Cursor Location) keyword for display files
          DATE (Date) keyword for display files
          DATFMT (Date Format) keyword for display files
          DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword for display files
          DFT (Default) keyword for display files
          DFTVAL (Default Value) keyword for display files
          DLTCHK (Delete Check) keyword for display files
          DLTEDT (Delete Edit) keyword for display files
          DSPATR (Display Attribute) keyword for display files
          DSPMOD (Display Mode) keyword for display files
          DSPRL (Display Right to Left) keyword for display files
          DSPSIZ (Display Size) keyword for display files
          DUP (Duplication) keyword for display files
            Programming for the Dup key
          EDTCDE (Edit Code) keyword for display files
          EDTMSK (Edit Mask) keyword for display files
          EDTWRD (Edit Word) keyword for display files
          ENTFLDATR (Entry Field Attribute) keyword for display files
          ERASE (Erase) keyword for display files
          ERASEINP (Erase Input) keyword for display files
          ERRMSG (Error Message) and ERRMSGID (Error Message Identifier) keywords for display files
          ERRSFL (Error Subfile) keyword for display files
          FLDCSRPRG (Cursor Progression Field) keyword for display files
          FLTFIXDEC (Floating-Point to Fixed Decimal) keyword for display files
          FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) Keyword for Display Files
          FRCDTA (Force Data) keyword for display files
          GETRETAIN (Get Retain) keyword for display files
          HELP (Help) keyword for display files
          HLPARA (Help Area) keyword for display files
          HLPBDY (Help Boundary) keyword for display files
          HLPCLR (Help Cleared) keyword for display files
          HLPCMDKEY (Help Command Key) keyword for display files
          HLPDOC (Help Document) keyword for display files
          HLPEXCLD (Help Excluded) keyword for display files
          HLPFULL (Help Full) keyword for display files
          HLPID (Help Identifier) keyword for display files
          HLPPNLGRP (Help Panel Group) keyword for display files
          HLPRCD (Help Record) keyword for display files
          HLPRTN (Help Return) keyword for display files
          HLPSCHIDX (Help Search Index) keyword for display files
          HLPSEQ (Help Sequencing) keyword for display files
          HLPTITLE (Help Title) keyword for display files
          HOME (Home) keyword for display files
          HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) keyword for display files
          INDARA (Indicator Area) keyword for display files
          INDTXT (Indicator Text) keyword for display files
          INVITE (Invite) keyword for display files
          INZINP (Initialize Input) keyword for display files
            ERASEINP(*ALL) keyword
          INZRCD (Initialize Record) keyword for display files
          KEEP (Keep) keyword for display files
          LOCK (Lock) keyword for display files
          LOGINP (Log Input) keyword for display files
          LOGOUT (Log Output) keyword for display files
          LOWER (Lower) keyword for display files
          MAPVAL (Map Values) keyword for display files
          MDTOFF (Modified Data Tag Off) keyword for display files
          MLTCHCFLD (Multiple-Choice Selection Field) keyword for display files
          MNUBAR (Menu Bar) keyword for display files
          MNUBARCHC (Menu-Bar Choice) keyword for display files
          MNUBARDSP (Menu-Bar Display) keyword for display files
          MNUBARSEP (Menu-Bar Separator) keyword for display files
          MNUBARSW (Menu-Bar Switch Key) keyword for display files
          MNUCNL (Menu-Cancel Key) keyword for display files
          MOUBTN (Mouse Buttons) keyword for display files
          MSGALARM (Message Alarm) keyword for display files
          MSGCON (Message Constant) keyword for display files
          MSGID (Message Identifier) keyword for display files
          MSGLOC (Message Location) keyword for display files
          NOCCSID (No Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword for display files
          OPENPRT (Open Printer File) keyword for display files
          OVERLAY (Overlay) keyword for display files
          OVRATR (Override Attribute) keyword for display files
          OVRDTA (Override Data) keyword for display files
          PAGEDOWN/PAGEUP (Page Down/Page Up) keywords for display files
          PASSRCD (Passed Record) keyword for display files
          PRINT (Print) keyword for display files
          PROTECT (Protect) keyword for display files
          PSHBTNCHC (Push Button Field Choice) keyword for display files
          PSHBTNFLD (Push Button Field) keyword for display files
          PULLDOWN (Pull-Down Menu) keyword for display files
          PUTOVR (Put with Explicit Override) keyword for display files
          PUTRETAIN (Put-Retain) keyword for display files
          RANGE (Range) keyword for display files
          REF (Reference) keyword for display files
          REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword for display files
          RETKEY (Retain Function Keys) and RETCMDKEY (Retain Command Keys) keywords for display files
          RETLCKSTS (Retain Lock Status) keyword for display files
          RMVWDW (Remove Window) keyword for display files
          ROLLUP/ROLLDOWN (Roll Up/Roll Down) keywords for display files
          RTNCSRLOC (Return Cursor Location) keyword for display files
          RTNDTA (Return Data) keyword for display files
          SETOF (Set Off) keyword for display files
          SETOFF (Set Off) keyword for display files
          SFL (Subfile) keyword for display files
          SFLCHCCTL (Subfile Choice Control) keyword for display files
          SFLCLR (Subfile Clear) keyword for display files
          SFLCSRPRG (Subfile Cursor Progression) keyword for display files
          SFLCSRRRN (Subfile Cursor Relative Record Number) keyword for display files
          SFLCTL (Subfile Control) keyword for display files
          SFLDLT (Subfile Delete) keyword for display files
          SFLDROP (Subfile Drop) keyword for display files
          SFLDSP (Subfile Display) keyword for display files
          SFLDSPCTL (Subfile Display Control) keyword for display files
          SFLEND (Subfile End) keyword for display files
          SFLENTER (Subfile Enter) keyw